Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Main Index
Corporate
MSC.Software Corporation
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Telephone: (800) 345-2078
FAX: (714) 784-4056
Europe
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich
GERMANY
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6
Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
User Documentation: Copyright 2008 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This document, and the software described in it, are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of such license. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written authorization of
MSC.Software Corporation is strictly prohibited.
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this document are for illustrative and educational purposes
only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. THIS DOCUMENT IS
PROVIDED ON AN AS-IS BASIS AND ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
MSC.Software logo, MSC, MSC., MSC/, MD Nastran, ADAMS, Dytran, MARC, Mentat, and Patran are trademarks or registered
trademarks of MSC.Software Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. MSC.Nastran is an enhanced proprietary version developed and maintained by
MSC.Software Corporation. Python is a trademark of the Python Software Foundation. LS-DYNA is a trademark of Livermore Software
Technology Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers.
METIS is copyrighted by the regents of the University of Minnesota.
NT-MPICH is developed by Lehrstuhl fr Betriebssysteme der RWTH Aachen. Copyright 1992-2004 Lehrstuhl fr Betriebssysteme
der RWTH Aachen.
PCGLSS 6.0 is licensed from Computational Applications and System Integration Inc.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation),
as applicable.
Revision 0 04/11/2008
MDNA*R3*Z*ENON*Z*DC-USR-PDF
Main Index
Contents
MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) Users Guide
Contents
Introduction
MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
Defining the Model 16
Implicit and Explicit Methods
Implicit Methods 17
Explicit Methods 18
Typical Applications 24
16
17
26
27
28
Main Index
50
51
24
Output Requests
52
Files Created by SOL 700
52
55
Modeling
Coordinate Systems
58
User-defined Coordinate System 58
Nodal Coordinate Systems 59
Element Coordinate Systems 59
Material Coordinate Systems 60
Nodes
61
Degrees of Freedom
Elements
61
62
Modeling in MD Patran
63
Creating Geometry in MD Patran 63
Creating Finite Element Meshes in MD Patran
Example using MD Patran
67
Description of the Problem 67
Solution Type 68
Specifying the Solution Type 68
References 68
Defining the Solution Type in MD Patran
65
69
81
85
85
Main Index
85
79
Contents 5
90
91
Mass Scaling
95
Problems Involving a Few Small Elements 95
Problems Involving a Few Severely Distorted Elements
95
98
Main Index
120
130
Elements
Elements Overview
Element Types 136
136
Preliminaries
140
Governing Equations 141
CHEXA Solid Elements
144
Volume Integration 146
Hourglass Control 147
Fully Integrated Brick Elements and Mid-Step Strain Evaluation
CTETRA - Four Node Tetrahedron Element 152
CPENTA - Six Node Pentahedron Element 153
CBEAM - Belytschko Beam
154
Co-rotational Technique 154
Belytschko Beam Element Formulation
Calculation of Deformations 158
Calculation of Internal Forces 159
151
157
163
172
Main Index
Contents 7
184
197
216
217
219
Main Index
211
224
Graded Meshes
226
Requirements for Gluing Meshes 226
Gluing Meshes 227
Using Graded Meshes 228
Visualization with MD Patran 228
Materials
Lagrangian Material Models for SOL 700
232
Material Model 1: Elastic 238
Material Model 2: Orthotropic Elastic 239
Material Model 3: Elastic Plastic with Kinematic Hardening 240
Material Model 5: Soil and Crushable Foam 244
Material Model 6: Viscoelastic 245
Material Model 7: Continuum Rubber 246
Material Model 9: Null Material 246
Material Model 10: Elastic-Plastic-Hydrodynamic 246
Material Model 12: Isotropic Elastic-Plastic 249
Material Model 13: Isotropic Elastic-Plastic with Failure 250
Material Model 14: Soil and Crushable Foam With Failure 250
Material Model 15: Johnson and Cook Plasticity Model 251
Material Type 18: Power Law Isotropic Plasticity 252
Material Type 19: Elastic Plastic Material Model with Strain Rate Dependent
Yield 253
Material Type 20: Rigid 254
Material Model 22: Chang-Chang Composite Failure Model 255
Material Model 24: Piecewise Linear Isotropic Plasticity 256
Material Model 26: Crushable Foam 257
Material Model 27: Incompressible Mooney-Rivlin Rubber 261
Material Model 28: Resultant Plasticity 262
Material Model 29: FORCE LIMITED Resultant Formulation 263
Material Model 30: Shape Memory Alloy 270
Material Model 31: Slightly Compressible Rubber Model 274
Material Model 32: Laminated Glass Model 275
Material Model 34: Fabric 275
Material Model 36: Barlats 3-Parameter Plasticity Model 276
Material Type 37: Transversely Anisotropic Elastic-Plastic 278
Material Type 38: Blatz-Ko Compressible Foam 280
Material Model 39: Transversely Anisotropic Elastic-Plastic With FLD 280
Material Model 53: Low Density Closed Cell Polyurethane Foam 281
Material Models 54 and 55: Enhanced Composite Damage Model 282
Material Model 57: Low Density Urethane Foam 284
Material Type 58: Laminated Composite Fabric 286
Main Index
Contents 9
Main Index
325
346
Preliminaries
346
Slave Search
347
351
352
Bucket Sorting
353
Bucket Sorting in Single Surface Contact
Accounting For the Shell Thickness
Initial Contact Penetrations
357
358
Friction
355
356
359
Main Index
373
372
371
367
Contents 11
10 Eulerian Solvers
The Standard Euler Solver
376
Fluid-structure Interaction 377
The Numerical Scheme 378
The Time Step Criterion 380
Euler with Strength 381
The Multi-material Solver 382
Approximate Riemann Euler Solver
386
Euler Equations of Motion 386
Numerical Approach 387
Entropy Fix for the Flux Difference Riemann Scheme
Second Order Accuracy of the Scheme 390
Time Integration 391
11
394
Airbag Definition
395
Inflator Models in Airbags 397
Constant Volume Tank Tests 400
Porosity in Airbags 400
Initial Metric Method for Airbags 403
Heat Transfer in Airbags 404
Seatbelts
405
Seatbelt Pretensioner 406
Seatbelt Retractor 408
Seatbelt Sensor 411
Seatbelt Slipring 411
Occupant Dummy Models
Pre- and Postprocessing
Main Index
413
414
390
416
General Information
416
Release Platforms 416
MPI for MD Nastran SOL 700 417
Hardware and Software Requirements
Compatibility 418
Definition 418
417
User Notes
419
Specification of the Host file for Windows 419
Specification of the Host file for UNIX and LINUX 419
How to Run MD Nastran SOL 700 in Parallel 420
How to Run Fluid Structure Interaction (FSI) in Parallel 421
Additional information of Different Platforms
Windows XP and 2000 425
Extra MPIch information 425
421
13 Examples
Crash
428
Pick-up Truck Frontal Crash
Train-barrier Impact 437
428
444
Main Index
510
Contents 13
Defense
524
Rod Penetration 524
Shaped Charge, using IG Model, Penetrating through Two Thick Plates
Mine Blast 538
Blastwave Hitting a Bunker 548
Time Domain NVH
Chassis 555
555
Prestress
564
Simulation of Prestress and Impact on Rotating Fan Blades
Smooth Particle Hydrodynamics (SPH)
Ball Penetration using SPH Method 576
564
576
Main Index
591
530
Main Index
Chapter 1 Introduction
MD Natran R3 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) Users Guide
Main Index
Introduction
J
Feature List
16
17
26
28
27
24
Main Index
Chapter 1 Introduction 17
Implicit and Explicit Methods
using a preprocessor such as MD Patran. MD Patran provides a graphical user interface, an extensive line
of model building tools that you can use to construct and view your model, and generate a MD Nastran
Input file.
If you are using MD Patran as a preprocessor, you are required to specify an analysis code. Selecting MD
Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) as the analysis code under the Analysis Preference menu,
customizes MD Patran in five main areas:
Material Library
Element Library
Loads and Boundary Conditions
MPCs
Analysis forms
The analysis preference also specifies that the model information be output in the MD Nastran Input
File format.
Chapter 3: Modeling includes examples of forms and templates of the MD Patran Preference for
SOL 700.
Implicit Methods
Many finite element programs use implicit methods to carry out a transient solution. Normally, they use
Newmark schemes to integrate in time. If the current time step is step n , a good estimate of the
acceleration at the end of step n + 1 will satisfy the following equation of motion:
ext
where
M
Main Index
Fn + 1
a' n + 1
n+1
n+1
v' n + 1
d' n + 1
n+1
n+1
d' n + 1 = d n + v n t + ( ( 1 2 )a n t ) 2 + a' n + 1 t
v' n + 1 = v n + ( 1 )a n t + a' n + 1 t
or
d' n + 1 = d *n + a' n + 1 t
v' n + 1 = v n* + a' n + 1 t
where
The terms
and
d n*
v n*
and
are constants.
ext
or
ext
[ M + C t + K t ]a' n + 1 = F n + 1 Cv n* K d n*
M *a' n + 1 = F n + 1
M*
matrix as follows:
resi dual
a' n + 1 = M * F n + 1
This is analogous to decomposing the stiffness matrix in a linear static analysis. However, the dynamics
mean that mass and damping terms are also present.
Explicit Methods
The equation of motion
ext
M a n + Cv n + K d n = F n
Main Index
Chapter 1 Introduction 19
Implicit and Explicit Methods
can be rewritten as
ext
int
M an = Fn
1
Fn
resi dua l
an = M Fn
where
ext
Fn
int
= vector of internal loads (e.g., forces generated by the elements and hourglass forces)
F int
= mass matrix
Fn
C v n + Kd n
The acceleration can be found by inverting the mass matrix and multiplying it by the residual load vector.
In SOL 700, like any explicit finite element code, the mass matrix is lumped which results in a diagonal
mass matrix.
Since M is diagonal, its inversion is trivial, and the matrix equation is a set of independent equations for
each degree of freedom, as follows:
resi dual
a ni = F ni
Mi
n1
d, F , a
n12
n
d, F, a
n+12
n+1
d, F, a
time
vn + 1 2 = v n 1 2 + a n ( tn + 1 2 + t n 1 2 ) 2
dn + 1 = dn + v n + 1 2 tn + 1 2
The Leap-frog scheme results in a central difference approximation for the acceleration, and is secondorder accurate in t .
Explicit methods with a lumped mass matrix do not require matrix decompositions or matrix solutions.
Instead, the loop is carried out for each time step as shown in the following diagram:
Main Index
Grid-Point Accelerations
Leap-frog Integration in Time
Grid-Point Velocities
Grid-Point Displacements
where
Main Index
= Timestep
Chapter 1 Introduction 21
Implicit and Explicit Methods
where,
E
= Youngs modulus
= density
for accuracy.
Large geometric nonlinearity. Contact and friction algorithms can introduce potential
instabilities, and a small time step may be needed for accuracy and stability.
Those analyses where the physics of the problem demands a small time step (e.g. stress wave
in implicit methods becomes more difficult to achieve as the amount of nonlinearity for all
types increases.
Explicit methods have increasing advantages over implicit methods as the model gets bigger. For models
containing several hundred thousands of elements and including significant nonlinearity, SOL 700 may
provide the most cost-effective solution even for problems dominated by low-frequency structural
dynamics (see Figure 1-1).
Main Index
Implicit
Cost
(CPU Time)
Explicit
Problem Size
Cost
(# of Matrix)
Implicit
Explicit
Number/Extent of
Nonlinearities
Figure 1-1
Another case where explicit solutions may have advantages is in extremely large linear or nonlinear
problems where implicit solvers may be limited to the number or parallel domains. There is no limit to
the number of SOL 700 explicit parallel domains. Therefore, if you have more than 256 or so processors
available, the explicit analysis may be faster even for linear static analyses.
SOL 700 should normally be used for structural components that may undergo large, sudden
deformation, and for which the dimensions, deformed geometry, and residual stress state are of major
importance. Table 1-1 summarizes the areas of overlap as well as the differences between the implicit
and explicit analyses.
Table 1-1
Material Nonlinearity
Linear isotropic elastic (metals)
Nonlinear isotropic elastic (rubber materials)
Linear orthotropic elastic (composites)
Elastic-perfectly plastic (limit analysis)
Elastoplastic, strain hardening (metals)
Viscoelastic (polymers)
Main Index
Implicit
Explicit
Chapter 1 Introduction 23
Implicit and Explicit Methods
Table 1-1
Implicit
Explicit
Implicit
Explicit
Implicit
Explicit
Main Index
Typical Applications
Some of the typical structural applications which are well suited for the SOL 700 explicit analysis are:
Automotive and Aircraft crash worthiness
Crash/Crush simulations
Drop testing
Ship Collision
Projectile penetration
Bird Strike Simulation with structural Bird
Metal forming, stamping, and deep drawing
Jet engine blade containment
Golf Club simulation
Rollover events
Main Index
Chapter 1 Introduction 25
Principles of the Eulerian and Lagrangian Processors
The Eulerian solver is most frequently used for analyses of fluids or materials that undergo very
large deformations.
In the Eulerian solver, the grid points are fixed in space and the elements are simply partitions of the space
defined by connected grid points. The Eulerian mesh is a fixed frame of reference. The material of a
body under analysis moves through the Eulerian mesh; the mass, momentum, and energy of the material
are transported from element to element. The Eulerian solver therefore calculates the motion of material
through elements of constant volume.
It is important to note that the Eulerian mesh is defined in exactly the same manner as a Lagrangian mesh.
General connectivity is used so the Eulerian mesh can be of an arbitrary shape and have an arbitrary
numbering system. This offers considerably more flexibility than the logical rectangular meshes used in
other Eulerian codes.
However, you should remember that the use of an Eulerian mesh is different from that of the Lagrangian
type. The most important aspect of modeling with the Eulerian technique is that the mesh must be large
enough to contain the material after deformation. A basic Eulerian mesh acts like a container and, unless
specifically defined, the material cannot leave the mesh. Stress wave reflections and pressure buildup can
develop from an Eulerian mesh that is too small for the analysis.
Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes can be used in the same calculation and can be coupled using a coupling
surface. The surface acts as a boundary to the flow of material in the Eulerian mesh, while the stresses in
the Eulerian material exerts forces on the surface causing the Lagrangian mesh to distort.
Main Index
Feature List
The complete features of MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) Phase I are:
1. MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) solves nonlinear (material, contact and/or geometric)
static and transient dynamic structural finite element problems.
2. MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) supports the following elements/bodies:
3. MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) supports the following loads and boundary conditions:
4. MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) supports isotropic, orthotropic, and anisotropic
material properties. Nonlinear elastic-plastic materials can be defined by specifying piecewise
linear stress-strain curves, material failure can be specified.
5. Physical properties can be associated with MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) elements
such as the cross-sectional properties of the beam element, the area of the beam and rod elements,
the thickness of shell, plane stress, and membrane elements, spring parameters, and masses.
6. Laminated composite shell elements are supported in MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700)
through the PCOMP card of the materials capability. Each layer has its own material, thickness,
and orientation and may represent linear or nonlinear material behavior. Failure index
calculations are also supported.
7. Analysis jobs consisting of complex loading time histories are available. All loading must be
applied in a single subcase. The applicable subcase for a particular analysis may be chosen from
many subcases if so desired.
Main Index
Chapter 1 Introduction 27
How SOL 700 Solves Explicit Problems
8. MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) jobs are submitted using text-based input decks that
may be generated manually with a text editor, or by a variety of pre/post processing programs such
as MD Patran. The input file is read in and a number of output files, such as the .f06, .log, f04,
.dytr.dat, .dytr.d3hsp, .dytr.d3plot files are generated.
9. Results can be requested in several output formats such as .dytr.d3plot,
.dytr.d3thdt, .f06 files. These files are typically read back into the pre/postprocessing
programs for the purpose of evaluating the results with plots such as deformed shape plots,
contour stress/strain plots, or X-Y history plots. MD Nastran native output files such
as .xdb, .op2, and punch will be supported in the MD Nastran 2006r2 release.
10. Nodal displacements, velocities and accelerations, element stresses, element strains, element
plastic strains, nodal reaction forces, contact interface force values, and element strain energy
are output when applicable. These may be visualized with results visualization tools such as MD
Patran. Composite element results are returned for individual layers of the composite,
as requested.
11. Crash, impact is supported by the Phase I release. Dynamic loading described by time histories as
well as static loading is also supported.
Main Index
The example below shows the files that are generated in the working directory:
Input file:
filename.bdf
filename.dytr.dat
filename.dytr.str
Output file:
filename.dytr.d3hsp
filename.dytr.out
filename.dytr_prep.d3hsp
filename.dytr_prep.out
filename.f06
filename.dytr.d3thdt
binout000
Main Index
Chapter 1 Introduction 29
This Users Guide
The MD Patran library includes three key books which will be of assistance in running SOL 700:
MD Patran Users Guide - gives the essential information needed to immediately begin using
MD Patran for SOL 700 projects. Understanding and using the information in this guide requires
no prior experience with CAE or finite element analysis.
MD Patran Reference Manual - gives complete descriptions of basic functions in MD Patran,
geometry modeling, finite element modeling, material models, element properties, loads and
boundary conditions, analysis, and results. It is the counterpart to the MD Nastran
Reference Manual.
MD Nastran Preference Guide - gives specific information that relates to using MD Patran with
MD Nastran as the intended analysis code. All application forms and required input are tailored
to MD Nastran.
Main Index
Main Index
Main Index
Output Requests
32
35
51
52
55
Control Information
Model data starting with the BEGIN BULK option and terminated by the ENDDATA option
Bulk
Data
Case
Control
Executive Control
Main Index
Element and
Material Properties
Fixed Displ,
Etc.
Load Incrementation,
Applied Loads,
Applied Displacements
Etc.
Input Conventions
MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear performs all data conversion internally so that the system does not abort
because of data errors made by you. The program reads all input data options alphanumerically and
converts them to integer, floating point, or keywords, as necessary. MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear issues
error messages and displays the illegal option image if it cannot interpret the option data field according
to the specifications given in the manual. When such errors occur, the program attempts to scan the
remainder of the data file and ends the run with a FATAL ERROR message. For SOL 700, certain entries
generate Warning or Severe Warning messages and, in some cases, the run is terminated immediately
after the message is written.
Two input format conventions can be used: fixed and free format. You can mix fixed and free format
options within a file.
The syntax rules for fixed fields are as follows:
Give floating point numbers with or without an exponent. If you give an exponent, it must be
preceded by the character E or D and must be right-justified (no embedded blanks). If data is
double precision, a D must be used.
standard fixed-format control. This syntax rule allows you to mix fixed-field and free-field
options in the data file because the number of options you need to input any data list are the same
in both cases.
Separate data items on a option with a comma (,). The comma can be surrounded by any number
of blanks. Within the data item itself, no embedded blanks can appear.
Give keywords exactly as they are written in the manual.
Enter data as uppercase or lowercase text.
Limit to 8 columns per field for small field format whether using fixed-field or free-field. Large
field is 16 columns; see the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more details.
Section Descriptions
Executive Control
This group of entries provides overall job control for the problem and sets up initial switches to control
the flow of the program through the desired analysis. This set of input must be terminated with a CEND
parameter. See Executive Control Statements in Chapter 3 of the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide
for additional descriptions on input formats.
Main Index
Case Control
This group of options provides the loads and constraints. Case Control options also include blocks which
allow changes in the initial model specifications. Case Control options can also specify print-out and
postprocessing options. See Case Control Commands in Chapter 4 of the MD Nastran Quick Reference
Guide for additional descriptions on input formats.
Bulk Data Entries
This set of data options enters the loading, geometry, and material data of the model and provides nodal
point data, such as boundary conditions. This group of options must be terminated with the ENDDATA
option. See Bulk Data Entries in Chapter 8 of the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for additional
descriptions on input formats. Multiple BEGIN entries and superelements are not allowed.
Some users may have existing models that have been developed and analyzed using MD Nastran
Solution Sequences mentioned above. These models may be run through MD Nastran Explicit
Nonlinear (SOL 700) by changing the SOLUTION procedure input to MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear
(SOL 700) input.
The following is an example of the change required to run existing models through SOL 700. The first
line shows an existing MD Nastran SOL 129 Executive Control Statement and the second shows its
revision for MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700):
SOL 129
SOL 700,129
By changing the Solution Sequence, there is no guarantee that the job will run. A successful run depends
on the nature of the problem and the extent that the input entries are supported for a SOL 700 analysis.
SOL 700 supports only the input entries that are relevant for an explicit simulation (see Section 2 for
supported entries for details). All other entries that are unique to a certain Solution Sequence, are ignored
and warning messages will be printed out in the output files as the user information. You are advised to
check your models for accuracy and completeness before starting the simulation. In many occasions, it
is wise to check the model in the preprocessor for poor modeling to flag out the skewed or small
elements. The CPU time in the explicit analysis is directly controlled by the smallest element dimensions
in the model. Small or poor elements may not abort a dynamic analysis but they certainly cause an
explicit simulation to run infinitely longer.
It is recommended that proper material models with well-defined properties are prescribed in the model
to accurately predict the material behavior as the model undergoes severe deformations and failure. For
example, defining a suitable material failure criteria for the model, ensures that the distorted elements
actually fail and are taken out of the calculation once they reach their failure limits. Otherwise, the
smallest length in the distorted elements causes the time step to fall infinitely low, resulting in the
premature termination of the job.
Main Index
Main Index
Patran
Support
ACCELERATION
BCONTACT
BEGIN BULK
DEFAULT
DISPLACEMENT
DLOAD
ECHO
ENDTIME
Y (new)
GROUNDCHECK
IC
INCLUDE
LABEL
LINE
LOAD
LOADSET
MAXLINES
MPC
NLPARM
Item
Patran
Support
NLSTRESS
Y (changed to STRESS)
PAGE
Y (Nastran only)
PARAM
SET
SET OUTPUT(PLOT)
SKIP
SPC
STRAIN
STRESS
SUBCASE
PRESSURE
Note:
Main Index
SUBTITLE
SURFACE
TITLE
TSTEP
Y (same as TSTEPNL)
TSTEPNL
VELOCITY
WEIGHTCHECK
Y (Nastran only)
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
ACCMETR
ABINFL
Y (new)
AIRBAG
AXIC
AXIF
AXSLOT
BARRIER
Y (new)
BAROR
BCBODY
BCBOX
BCGRID
BCHANGE
BCMATL
BCONP
BCPROP
BCSEG
BCTABLE
Y (revised)
BEAMOR
BJOIN
BLSEG
BSURF
CBAR
CBEAM
CBELT
Y
N
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
CBEND
CBUSH
CBUTT
CCONEAX
CCRSFIL
CDAMP1
CDAMP2
CDAMP1D
CDAMP2D
CELAS1
CELAS2
CELAS1D
CELAS2D
CFILLET
CFLUID
CGAP
CHACAB
CHACBR
CHEXA
Y (8 nodes only)
CMARKB2
Y (new)
CMARKN1
Y (new)
COMBWLD
CONM2
CONROD
CONSPOT
N
Y
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
CORD1C
CORD1R
CORD1RX
CORD1S
CORD2C
CORD2R
CORD2RX
CORD2S
CORD3G
CORD3R
CORD3RX
COUOPT
Y (new)
COUP1FL
Y (new)
COUPINT
Y (new)
COUPLE
Y (new)
CYLINDR
Y (new)
CPENTA
Y (6 nodes only)
CQUAD4
CQUAD8
Y (4 nodes only)
CQUADR
CQUADX
CREEP
CROD
CSHEAR
CSHP
Y (new)
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
CSPOT
CSPR
CTETRA
Y (4 or 10 nodes only)
CTQUAD
CTRIA3
CTRIA6
Y (3 nodes only)
CTRIAR
CTRIAX
CTRIAX6
CTTRIA
CTUBE
CVISC
CWELD
D2R0000
D2RAUTO
D2RINER
DAMPGBL
DAMPMAS
DAMPSTF
DAREA
DBEXSSS
DETSPH
Y (new)
DLOAD
DYCHANG
DYDELEM
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
DYPARAM
DYRELAX
DYRIGSW
DYTERMT
DYTIMHS
ENDDATA
ENDDYNA
EOSGAM
EOSGRUN
Y (new)
EOSIG
Y (new)
EOSJW
Y (new)
EOSMG
Y (new)
EOSPOL
EOSTAB
EOSTABC
EOSTAIT
Y (new)
FAILMPS
Y (new)
FFCONTR
Y (new)
FLOW
Y (new)
FLOWDEF
Y (new)
FLOWSPH
Y (new)
FLOWT
Y (new)
FORCE
FORCE1
FORCE2
Y
N
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
FORCEAX
GBAG
GBAGCOU
Y (new)
GENEL
GRAV
GRDSET
GRIA
GRID
HEATLOS
Y (new)
HGSUPPR
HTRCONV
Y (new)
HTRRAD
Y (new)
HYDSTAT
Y (new)
INCLUDE
INFLCG
Y (new)
INFLFRC
INFLGAS
Y (new)
INFLHB
Y (new)
INFLTNK
Y (new)
INFLTR
Y (new)
INITGAS
Y (new)
IPSTRAIN
ISTRESS
ISTRSBE
ISTRSSH
Item
ISTRSSO
Fatal
Error
ISTRSTS
Main Index
Patran
Support
LEAKAGE
Y (new)
LOAD
LSEQ
MAT1
MAT2
MAT3
MAT8
MATDxxx
MATDERO
MATDEUL
Y (new)
MATEP
MATF
MATG
MATHE
MATHED
MATHP
MATORT
MATRIG
MATS1
MATVE
MATVORT
MATVP
MESH
Y (new)
Y
Y
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
MFLUID
MOMAX
MOMENT
MOMENT2
MPC
MPCAX
NLPARM
NLRGAP
NOLINi
NTHICK
PANEL
PBAR
PBARL
PBCOMP
PBEAM
PBEAM71
PBEAMD
PBEAML
PBELTD
PBEND
PBSPOT
PBUSH
PCOMP
PCOMPA
PCOMPG
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
PDAMP
PDAMP5
PELAS
PELAS1
PELAST
PERMEAB
Y (new)
PERMGBG
Y (new)
PEULER
Y (new)
PEULER1
Y (new)
PGAP
PHBDY
PINTC
PINTS
PLOAD
PLOAD1
PLOAD2
PLOAD4
PLOADX1
PLPLANE
PLSOLID
PMARKER
Y (new)
PMINC
Y (new)
PORFCPL
Y (new)
PORFGBG
Y (new)
PORFLOW
Y (new)
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
PORFLWT
Y (new)
PORHOLE
Y (new)
PORHYDS
Y (new)
PRESTRS
PMASS
PRESPT
PROD
PSHEAR
PSHELL
PSHELL1
PSHELLD
PSOLID
PSOLIDD
PSPH
Y (new)
PSPRMAT
PTSHELL
PTUBE
PVISC
RBAR
RBE1
RBE2
RBE2A
RBE2D
RBE2F
RBE3
Y
Y
Y
Y
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
RBE3D
RBJOINT
RBJSTIFF
RCONN
RESTART
RFORCE
RLOADi
RROD
RSPLINE
RTRPLT
SBPRET
SBRETR
SBSENSR
SBSLPR
SLOAD
SEQROUT
Y (new)
SHREL
Y (new)
SHRPOL
Y (new)
SPC
SPC1
SPCADD
SPCAX
SPCD
SPCD2
SPHDEF
Y (new)
Item
SPHERE
Y (new)
SPHSYM
Y (new)
SUPAX
Fatal
Error
SURFINI
Main Index
Patran
Support
SPWRS
Y (new)
TABLED1
TABLED2
TABLED3
TABLEDR
TABLES1
TEMP
TEMPD
TIC
TICD
TIC3
TICEL
Y (new)
TICEUL1
Y (new)
TICREG
Y (new)
TICVAL
Y (new)
TIMNAT
TIMNVH
TIMSML
TLRE1
TLOAD1
TLOAD2
Item
Main Index
Fatal
Error
Patran
Support
TODYNA
TSTEP
Y (changed to TSTEPNL)
TSTEPNL
UGASC
Y (new)
WALL
WALLGEO
Y (new)
YLDHY
Y (new)
YLDJC
Y (new)
YLDMC
Y (new)
YLDMSS
Y (new)
YLDPOL
Y (new)
YLDRPL
Y (new)
YLDSG
Y (new)
YLDTM
Y (new)
YLDVN
Y (new)
YLDZA
Y (new)
Main Index
Main Index
Using MD Patran, you can run a MD Nastran analysis or you may generate the MD Nastran Input
File to run externally. For information on generating the MD Nastran Input file from within MD Patran,
see Analysis Form in Chapter 3 of the MD Patran MD Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1:
Structural Analysis.
Output Requests
The SOL 700 default output file is the d3plot file which is a binary file including the displacements,
stresses and strain output results. The file d3plot can be postprocessed with a number of commercially
available tools such as MD Patran, ETA/Femb, Hypermesh, CEI/Ensight and LS-POST.
In addition to d3plot, other output files are optionally available for output request.
File
Main Index
Generic
Reference Name
Input (ASCII)
dat or bdf
Output/d3hsp (ASCII)
d3hsp
Filename.dytr.d3hsp
d3plot
Filename.dytr.d3plot
d3thdt
Filename.dytr.d3thdt
ARC
Filename.dytr.ARC
binout
Filename.dytr.binout
ssstat
Filename.dytr.ssstat
File
Generic
Reference Name
d3dump
Filename.dytr.d3dump
log
Filename.dytr.log
f06
Filename.f06
op2
Filename.op2
xdb
Filename.xdb
pch
Filename.pch
Input File
The input file contains all the input data and must be present in order to run MD Nastran SOL 700. It is
a text file with up to 80 characters on each line. The primary input file may reference one or more
include files.
Output (d3hsp) File
The output (d3hsp) file is a text file suitable for printing purposes or viewing with a standard editor. It
contains messages produced by explicit solver in SOL 700, which contains summary of model input,
calculation status at every 100 cycles and error messages This file is normally also included in the f06
file. The quantities that are placed on this file are controlled by PARM statements.
d3plot
MD Nastran can create any number of output files containing results at times during the analysis. The
d3plot files are binary files generated by explicit solver in SOL 700. They contain a complete
description of the geometry and connectivity of the analysis model and the requested results. MD Patran
can read d3plot files for postprocessing.
ARC
MD Nastran outputs the fluid structure interaction (FSI) results in the *ARC file. The ARC files are binary
files and are consistant with Dytran output. To postporcess the FSI results by Patran, both d3plot and
ARC files have to be read.
binout
The binout file is the file generated by SOL 700 and is consistent with the LS-DYNA native binout file.
It includes the time history results in binary format.
Main Index
ssstat File
The sstat file is generated by SOL 700 and contains the information of the subsystem. The
DYPARAM,LSDYNA,DATABASE,SSTATM and DBEXSSS bulk data entries can be activated to generate
the sstat file. The information of the sstat file is useful for FBO-RD chaining analysis.
Time-History (d3thdt) Files
SOL 700 can also create any number of time-history files containing results for particular grid points and
elements during the calculation. They are also binary files. Time-history files only contain results, no
geometry or connectivity.
Restart Files
SOL 700 supports the three kinds of restart. These are named simple, minor (or small) and full. Simple
restarts are jobs that for some reason did not finish (for example the computer went down) and involve
no changes in the original Nastran input deck. They can use either the running restart file
(jid.dytr.runrsf) or the d3dump file (jid.dytr.d3dumpxx where xx is a numerical value such as
00, 01, 02 ...). Minor restarts involve simple changes to the Nastran input deck such as deleting contact
surfaces, changing the run time or output time intervals, switching rigid bodies to deformable or visa
versa. These require a Nastran input deck with the executive control, case control and only the changes
as well as the jid.dytr.d3dumpxx file. The full restart normally involves massive changes to the
Nastran deck where the complete executive control, case control and bulk data are input as well as
restarting with the jid.dytr.d3dumpxx file.
Error File
SOL 700 produces an f06 file containing a summary of all warnings and errors issued during reading
and subsequent data processing. SOL 700 has five levels of messages below:
1. Informative messages.
An example of a Level 1 message is a message that indicates that a new processor has begun
execution. These message provide job information.
2. Nonfatal warning message of something that could affect the results.
An example of a Level 2 message is one indicating that the aspect ratio is greater than 15. This
may or may not be a serious problem.
3. Serious warnings.
An example of a Level 3 message is a warning about a highly distorted element.
4. Fatal error (all occurrences will be found before aborting).
An example of a Level 4 message is the warning undefined node used in rigid element.
5. Immediately fatal errors.
An example of a Level 5 message is Unable to open file message. The job is
immediately aborted.
Main Index
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling
MD Natran R3 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) Users Guide
Main Index
Modeling
J
Coordinate Systems
Nodes
Elements
Modeling in MD Patran
Postprocessing
58
61
62
63
67
81
85
85
85
79
Coordinate Systems
The basic coordinate system in MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear is a right-handed rectangular coordinate
system as shown in Figure 3-1.
Z
Figure 3-1
Rectangular
CORD1C
CORD2C
Cylindrical
CORD1S
CORD2S
Spherical
The CORD1R, CORD1C, and CORD1S entries define coordinate systems by referencing three defined
grid points. The CORD2R, CORD2C, and CORD2S entries define coordinate systems by specifying the
location of three points.
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 59
Coordinate Systems
G4
G3
Xelem
G1
G2
The counter clockwise node numbering determines the positive z-direction and is the top surface of the
shell element and the bottom surface is the negative z-direction.
By default, shell stresses/strains written to d3plots are in the basic coordinate system and shell
stresses/strains written to elout (time history element output) are in the element local
coordinate system.
The local coordinate system of CBAR/CBEAM is explained in the Remarks of PBAR and PBEAM entries
respectively in the quick reference guide. By default, stresses/resultants for beams are written to d3plot
and elout (time history element output) in the element coordinate system.
The output of solid elements in d3plot and elout (time history element output) is always with respect
to the basic coordinate system.
Main Index
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 61
Nodes
Nodes
Model geometry is defined in MD Nastran with grid points. A grid point is a point on or in the structural
continuum which is used to define a finite element. A simple model may have only a handful of grid
points; a complex model may have many hundreds of thousands. The structures grid points displace with
the loaded structure. Each grid point of the structural model has six possible components of displacement:
three translations (in the x-, y-, or z-directions) and three rotations (about the x-, y-, or z-axes). These
components of displacement are called degrees of freedom (DOFs).
Degrees of Freedom
The degrees of freedom in MD Nastran Nonlinear are always referred to as:
1
x-displacement
y-displacement
z-displacement
MD Nastran only activates those degrees of freedom needed at a node. Thus, some of the degrees of
freedom listed above may not be used at all nodes in a model, because each element type only uses those
degrees of freedom which are relevant. For example, two-dimensional solid (continuum)
stress/displacement elements only use degrees of freedom 1 and 2. The degrees of freedom actually used
at any node are thus the envelope of those variables needed in each element that uses the node.
Main Index
Elements
Once the geometry (grid points) of the structural model has been established, the grid points are used to
define the finite elements.
MD Nastran has an extensive library of finite elements covering a wide range of physical behavior. Some
of these elements and their names are shown in figure below. The C in front of each element name stands
for connection.
Point Element (not a finite element, but can be included in the finite element model)
CTRIA3
CQUAD4
CHEXA
Main Index
CPENTA
CTETRA
Chapter 3: Modeling 63
Modeling in MD Patran
Rigid Bar (infinitely stiff without causing numerical difficulties in the mathematical model)
RBAR
Structural elements are defined on Bulk Data connection entries that identify the grid points to which the
element is connected. The mnemonics for all such entries have a prefix of the letter C, followed by an
indication of the type of element, such as CBAR and CROD. The order of the grid point identification
defines the positive direction of the axis of a one-dimensional element and the positive surface of a plate
element. The connection entries include additional orientation information when required. Some
elements allow for offsets between its connecting grid points and the reference plane of the element.
The coordinate systems associated with element offsets are defined in terms of the grid point
coordinate systems. For most elements, each connection entry references a property definition entry.
If many elements have the same properties, this system of referencing eliminates a large number of
duplicate entries.
Details for each element type are described in Chapter 6: Elements.
Modeling in MD Patran
In MD Patran, geometric models are the foundation on which most finite element models are built.
Geometric curves, surfaces, or solids provide the base for creating nodes, elements, and loads and
boundary conditions; the geometric model also serves as the structure to which material properties, as
well as element properties, may be assigned even before any mesh is actually generated.
Main Index
The Geometry form controls all processes in the Geometry application. The top portion of the form
contains three keywords, Action, Object, and Method; these remain the same throughout all activities.
The rest of the entries will vary depending on the requirements posed by the specified action, object,
and method.
Action
Object
Identifies the geometric entity upon which the action is performed, for
example, Solid. In this case, if the Action is Create, then the command
requests that a solid be created.
Method
Specifies the procedure which perform the action. Taking the above
example one step further, if the Method is Surface, a solid is created by one
of the techniques that utilize surfaces.
There are hundreds of action, object, method combinations available for creating geometric entities in
MD Patran. For complete descriptions on creating geometry models, see the MD Patran Reference
Manual, Part 2: Geometry.
Utilizing External Geometry (CAD) Files
MD Patran can make use of geometry created in databases outside of MD Patran by either accessing
geometric data directly from one of several CAD systems, or importing geometry using special files.
Geometry access, performed through the unique Direct Geometry Access (DGA) feature, does not
require any translation. MD Patran accesses the original geometry and uses the geometric definitions of
all entities.
On the other hand, when geometry is imported, MD Patran first evaluates the mathematical definition of
entities in their originating CAD system, and then formulates the information to be appropriate for MD
Patran operations.
Imported geometry comes to MD Patran via IGES, Express Neutral files, or MD Patran Neutral files.
IGES (Initial Graphic Exchange Specification) is an ANSI standard formatted file that makes it possible
to exchange data among most commercial CAD systems. Express Neutral files are intermediate files
created during a Unigraphics or CV CAD model access. MD Patran Neutral files are specially formatted
for the purpose of providing a means of importing and exporting model data.
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 65
Modeling in MD Patran
Geometry received into the database, whether through direct access or import, is treated as if it had been
built in MD Patran; meshing, load and boundary condition assignments, element and material properties
definitions are all performed as if on MD Patrans own native geometry.
Main Index
Paver
The Paver is an automated surface meshing technique that you can use with any arbitrary surface region,
including trimmed surfaces, composite surfaces, and irregular surface regions. Unlike the IsoMesh
approach, the Paver technique creates a mesh by first subdividing the surface boundaries into mesh
points, and then operates on these boundaries to construct interior elements.
TetMesh
Arbitrary solid mesher generates tetrahedral elements within MD Patran solids defined by an arbitrary
number of faces or volumes formed by collection of triangular element shells. This method is based on
MSC plastering technology.
2-1/2D Mesher
Transforms a planar 2-D mesh to produce a 3-D mesh of solid elements, using sweep and
extrude operations.
Caution:
In all finite element simulations, the size and shape of the elements is one aspect that
controls the accuracy. In explicit simulations, small elements will also result in the need
to reduce the time step or increase the mass scaling. See Chapter 4: Special Modeling
Techniques.
Like the Geometry Application, the top portion of the Finite Element form contains three keywords,
Action, Object, and Method; these remain the same throughout all activities. Finite Element (FE)
Meshing, Node and Element Editing, Nodal Equivalencing, ID Optimization, Model Verification, FE
Show, Modify and Delete, and ID Renumber, are all accessible by setting the Action/Object/Method
combination on the Finite Elements form.
For complete descriptions on creating geometry models, see the MD Patran Reference Manual, Part 3:
Finite Element Modeling.
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 67
Example using MD Patran
Y
X
Beam Length = 40 in
The beam is 40 inches in length and is made of steel with the following properties:
Density = 0.000783 lbm/in3
Elastic Modulus = 2.1E9 psi
Yield Stress = 1.4E7 psi
Poissons ratio = 0.3
The example is designed to make the user familiar with the following objectives:
1 How to define a Contact Body and Contact Table.
2 How to define the initial velocity for the tapered beam.
3 How to define elastoplastic material properties using MAT24 material model.
Main Index
Solution Type
MD Nastran can simulate many different types of structural response. In general an analysis type can be
either static or dynamic. In a static analysis, loads and boundary conditions are applied to a model and
the response is assumed to remain constant over time. In dynamic analysis the response changes over
time. In MD Nastran, both static and dynamic analysis may simulate linear response or nonlinear
response. SOL 700 incorporates the formulations and functionality to simulate nonlinear dynamic
structural responses. The specific procedure MD Nastran uses is specified on the Executive Control
Statement by the ID entry.
References
SOL 700,ID in the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide. In this release, ID = 129 indicates
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 69
Example using MD Patran
c
d
b
Main Index
e. Enter
Action:
Create
Density
Object:
Isotropic (lsdyna)
Poisson Ratio
= 0.3
Yield Strength
= 1.4E7
f. Click OK
g. Click Apply
Implementation:
Curve Type
Bilinear
= 0.000783
c
g
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 71
Example using MD Patran
h.
Click OK
b. Select beam
i.
j.
Click FEM
d. Loads/Boundary Conditions
k.
Action:
Create
l.
Object:
Initial Velocity
m. Click OK
Method: Nodal
n.
Click Apply
e. Enter
New Set Name initial_velocity
f. Click Input Data
g. Enter
Trans Veloc = <0 0 10000>
g
j
k
l
f
i
n
Main Index
g.
Enter
b. Select rigid_plate
Translations:
<0 0 0>
Rotations:
<0 0 0>
d. Loads/Boundary Conditions h.
Click OK
Action:
Create
i.
Object:
Displacement
j.
Method:
Nodal
k.
Click ADD
l.
Click OK
e. Enter
New Set Name
fix_plate
m. Click Apply
b
j
k
h
f
i
c
m
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 73
Example using MD Patran
Defining the Contact Between the Beam and the Rigid Plate
Post both group beam and rigid_plate and define a contact between the plate and the beam.
a. Loads/Boundary Conditions:
f.
Click OK
Action:
Create
g.
Click Apply
Object:
Contact
h.
Type:
Element Uniform
i.
Option:
Deformable Body
j.
k.
l.
Click OK
m. Click Apply
e
k
h
c
Main Index
Action:
Analyze
Object:
Entire Model
g. Enter
e
b
Note:
Main Index
Only when Contact Table in Solution Parameter is clicked in MD Patran is the Bulk Data
Input BCTABLE written to the input deck. Otherwise, BCONTACT - ALLBODY is written in
the Case Control section of the input file.
Chapter 3: Modeling 75
Example using MD Patran
Click Apply
m. Click Cancel
k. Click OK
Main Index
Analyze
Object:
Entire Model
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 77
Example using MD Patran
Analyze
Object:
Entire Model
Main Index
Time: 14:52:07
..
..
$ Deform Body Contact LBC set: beam
BCBODY
4
3D
DEFORM 4
BSURF
4
1
2
3
8
9
10
11
Main Index
0
4
12
165
173
166
174
167
175
5
13
6
14
7
15
Chapter 3: Modeling 79
Input and Output Files Created During the Simulation
tapered_beam.dytr.dat
tapered_beam.dytr.str
Output file:
tapered_beam.dytr.d3hsp
tapered_beam.dytr.out
tapered_beam.dytr_prep.d3hsp
tapered_beam.dytr_prep.out
tapered_beam.f06
Main Index
tapered_beam.dytr.d3plot
tapered_beam.dytr.d3thdt
t e r m i n a t i o n
T i m i n g
i n f o r m a
t i o n
Processor
Hostname
CPU(seconds)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------#
1
RWC-DYTRAN
9.4844E+00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------T o t a l s
9.4844E+00
Start time
02/14/2005 15:15:31
End time
02/14/2005 15:15:40
Elapsed time
9 seconds (
N o r m a l
Main Index
0 hours
t e r m i n a t i o n
0 minutes
9 seconds)
Chapter 3: Modeling 81
Postprocessing
Postprocessing
The MD Nastran output the results in the binary native file d3plot and d3thdt for X-Y plots. The
MD Nastran native output files *.op2 and *xdb will be supported in the future releases.
Read in the results by attaching the d3plot file where the analysis results are stored.
a. Analysis:
d. Click OK
Action:
Access Results
Object:
Attach d3plot
e. Click Apply
b
e
Main Index
Lets have a Quick Plot of the Deformed Shape of the last cycle.
a. Results:
e.
Action: Create
Object: Quick Plot
b. Select Results Cases
Select Displacement
f.
g.
Scale Interpretation
i.
Click Apply
d. Position ...((NON-LAYERED))
Quantity:
von Mises
a
f
g
c
d
e
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 83
Postprocessing
a. Results:
f.
Action:
Create
Object:
Deformation
h.
i.
Animation Graphics
Click 3D
Scale Interpretation
j.
Number of Frames 52
k.
Click Apply
a
e
c
g
Main Index
a. Results:
c. Position ...((NON-LAYERED))
Action:
Create
Object:
Fringe
Stress Components
b
c
d
e
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 85
Running a Batch Job
Main Index
the results can give you clues as to what is happening to the model during the simulation and which
elements are controlling the timestep. See Chapter 4: Special Modeling Techniques to control small
timesteps.
Microsoft
Main Index
Chapter 3: Modeling 87
How to Tell if the Analysis Ran Successfully
On Windows XP SP2
After you install or upgrade to Windows XP SP2, the RPC protocol does not permit anonymous requests
to the RPC Endpoint Mapper but requires client requests be authenticated.
To workaround this problem, do the following:
From a command prompt, run gpedit.msc.
Select Computer Configuration,
expand Administrative Templates,
expand System,
click Remote Procedure Call,
double click RPC Endpoint Mapper Client Authentication.
Change the value to Enabled.
Main Index
Main Index
Main Index
Artificial Viscosity
Hourglass Damping
Mass Scaling
90
91
95
97
107
Artificial Viscosity
Two types of artificial viscosity are used in SOL 700; bulk viscosity and hourglass viscosity are used to
control the numerical process. The parameters for bulk viscosity are material parameters. The hourglass
viscosity parameters are defined per property.
Bulk Viscosity
Artificial bulk viscosity is used to control the formation of shock waves. Shock waves are the propagation
of discontinuities in velocity. The simplest example of a shock wave is a square wave. An ideal impact
between two flat surfaces generates a square wave. Materials that stiffen upon deformation can produce
a shock wave from a smooth wave profile. A finite element model of a continuous body cannot
numerically represent this propagating discontinuity. When a time integration scheme without
algorithmic damping (such as the explicit central difference method) is used to integrate the response,
severe oscillations in amplitude trail the shock front. These oscillations can be traced to the limitations
imposed by the finite frequency spectrum of the finite element mesh.
To control the oscillations trailing the shock front, artificial bulk viscosity is introduced. Artificial bulk
viscosity is designed to increase the pressure in the shock front as a function of the strain rate. The effect
on the shock wave is to keep it smeared over approximately five elements. Reducing the coefficients in
an attempt to steepen the wave front may result in undesirable oscillations trailing the shock, a condition
sometimes referred to as overshoot.
An artificial viscosity term Q is added to the pressure. An artificial viscosity term can be considered
as a modification to the pressure p , which is replaced by:
p* = p + Q
The definition of the artificial viscosity term that modifies the pressure:
V
2
2 V
Q = max C Q d --- V
--- , 0 + max C L d c --- , 0
V V
V
where
CQ
= constant = 1.5
CL
= constant = 0.06
The following parameters can be used in the SOL 700 to define the linear and quadratic bulk
viscosity coefficients:
Main Index
Hourglass Damping
The solid and shell elements in SOL 700 have only one integration point at the center of the element. This
makes the program very efficient since each element requires relatively little processing, but it also
introduces the problem of hourglassing.
For simplicity, consider the two-dimensional membrane action of a CQUAD4 element.
The element has four grid points, each with two degrees of freedom. There are, therefore, a total of eight
degrees of freedom and eight modes of deformation. There are three rigid body modes, two translational
modes, and one rotational mode.
With a single integration point, two direct and one shear stress are calculated at the center of the element.
This means that only three modes of deformation have stiffness associated with them.
Two modes of deformation remain, that correspond to the linear stress terms. With a single integration
point, these have no stiffness associated with them and are called the zero energy or hourglass modes.
When no measures are taken to stop these modes from occurring, they rapidly spread through the mesh
and degrade the accuracy of the calculation (see Figure 4-1), reduce the time step, and ultimately cause
the analysis to abort when the length of the side of an element becomes zero.
Main Index
Similar zero energy modes exist for the bending deformation of CQUAD4 elements, in CHEXA and
CPENTA elements. CTRIA3 and CTETRA elements do not suffer from hourglassing, since no zero energy
modes exist in these elements.
Figure 4-1
Main Index
Figure 4-2
The following parameters are used in MD Nastran SOL 700 to define viscous and stiffness methods
of hourglassing:
PARAM,DYHRGIHQ
PARAM,DYHRGQH
Where QH is the default hourglass coefficient. Values of QH that exceed 0.15 may cause instabilities.
The recommended default applies to all options except for Belytschko-Bindeman (type 6) of hourglass
control. The stiffness forms, however, can stiffen the response especially if deformations are large and
therefore should be used with care. For the shell and membrane elements QH is taken as the membrane
Main Index
hourglass coefficient, the bending as QB, and warping as QW. These coefficients can be specified
independently but in SOL 700 the default is set at QH=QB=QW which is adequate (see
PARAM,DYBULKL and PARAM,DYBULKQ1 below). For type 6 solid element hourglass control, see
note 4 below.
Below are some guidelines to use the different formulations for the hourglass viscosity:
1. Viscous hourglass control is recommended for problems deforming with high velocities. Stiffness
control is often preferable for lower velocities, especially if the number of time steps are large.
For solid elements the exact volume integration provides some advantage for highly distorted
elements.
2. For automotive crash, the stiffness form of the hourglass control with a coefficient of 0.05 is
preferred by many users.
3. Bulk viscosity is necessary to propagate shock waves in solid materials and therefore applies only
to solid elements. Generally, the default values are okay except in problems where pressures are
very high, larger values may be desirable. In low density foams, it may be necessary to reduce the
viscosity values since the viscous stress can be significant. It is not advisable to reduce it by more
than an order of magnitude.
4. Type 6 hourglass control is for 2-D and 3-D solid elements only. Based on elastic constants and
an assumed strain field, it produces accurate coarse mesh bending results for elastic material when
hourglass coefficient QH=1.0. For plasticity models with a yield stress tangent modulus that is
much smaller than the elastic modulus, a smaller value of QH (0.001 to 0.1) may produce better
results. For any material, keep in mind that the stiffness is based on the elastic constants, so if the
material softens, a QH value smaller than 1.0 may work better.
5. In part, the computational efficiency of the Belytschko-Lin-Tsay and the under integrated
Hughes-Liu shell elements are derived from their use of one-point quadrature in the plane of the
element. To suppress the hourglass deformation modes that accompany one-point quadrature,
hourglass viscous or stiffness based stresses are added to the physical stresses at the local
element level.
PARAM,DYBULKL, value (Linear coefficient CL, Default = 0.06)
The linear bulk viscosity coefficient CL. The defaults are: CL=QB=QH. See remark 4 above.
PARAM,DYBULKQ1, value (Quadratic coefficient, default = 1.5)
PARAM,DYBULKQW,value (Hourglass coefficient for warping). The default is QW=QB
Main Index
Mass Scaling
The explicit dynamics procedure of SOL 700 uses relatively small time steps dictated by the shortest
natural period of the mesh: the analysis cost is in direct proportion to the size of the mesh. There are two
types of problems where the cost effectiveness of the analysis can be increased:
If a mesh consists of a few, very small (or stiff) elements, the smallest (or stiffest) element
determines the time step for all elements of the mesh. This may result in a very small stable
time step.
Speedup of those problems can be achieved by using mass scaling. Mass scaling is based on adding
numerical mass to an element so that its time step never becomes less than the minimum allowable time
step defined by the user. One can also employ mass scaling in a selective manner by artificially increasing
material density of the parts needed for mass-scaling. This manual form of mass scaling is done
independently of the automatic mass scaling invoked with PARAM,DYTSTEPDT2MS. Note that mass
scaling can be risky in areas where either inertia effects are relevant or contact with other parts is expected
to occur.
out the elements whose time steps exceed a user-defined minimum time step.
See what the impact would be of specifying this new minimum time step. Select the value of
minimum time step such that hardly any elements would be scaled in the area of interest (for
example, as much as possible outside the impact region in a crash simulation)
Main Index
Since you do not know in advance which elements will become too distorted, you should first
run the analysis as far as possible without mass scaling. You should gauge and monitor the time
step of all elements.
If the problem ends up with a too small stable time step, the analysis finishes prematurely. See
which elements are so severely distorted and decide what a reasonable minimum time step might
be without affecting elements in the area of interest. See the guidelines of the previous section.
Rerun the analysis specifying mass scaling if the region of highly distorted elements is relatively
significantly different inertia effects, and subsequently, different global structural response. In
order to avoid this, no more mass is added if the numerically added mass exceeds a certain
percentage (PARAM, DYTERMNENDMAS).
How to define Mass Scaling in SOL 700
The following PARAM entries can be used to define mass scaling in SOL 700:
PARAM,DYTSTEPDT2MS,value (Default=0.0,
Main Index
FFT Process
Figure 4-3
Main Index
To define a time domain NVH simulation, refer to the new entries of TIMNVH, TIMSML, and TIMNAT in
the QRG and see the chassis example in SOL 700 User Guide. A simple example is listed below.
Model
To build a model, a plate was constructed with 231 grid points and 200 quadratic elements. A fixed
boundary condition was applied along one end. All shell elements were Belytschko-Wong-Chiang
formulation. The impact loading at the corner of the plate was modeled by defining the load time history
as shown in Figure 4-4. The simulation time is 1.024 seconds.
Main Index
Figure 4-4
Input
The loading was applied at node 231 by using FORCE and TABLE1 entries. Using TIMNVH, TIMNAT,
and PARAM, S700NVH1, dynamic properties of the plate were obtained. There were three steps to
acquire the dynamic properties as follows:
Step 1: Find modal properties using TIMNVH entry in the first trial
Step 2: Check the obtained modal properties and select required natural frequencies
Step 3: Re-run with selected natural frequencies
Main Index
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (100) and Time
Increment (10.24 ms) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest element
dimension during the simulation.
TIMNVH entry is for Time NVH analysis.
TIMNVH,
1.0,
500.,
3,
0.00005,
2,+
The range of natural frequencies to obtain is from 1.0 Hz to 500 Hz and only z-translational degrees of
freedom is considered (3). The sampling rate is 0.00005 seconds. The peaking criterion is two, which
means a peak is selected if the number of increasing and decreasing amplitude around a peak is over 2.
+,
0,
3,
1,
0.015,
0,
3,
13,
.0030,+
Acceleration is selected for the response (0) and translational eigenvectors are only requested as ASCII
format (3). Eignevalues are normalized by 1.0 (1) and 0.015 is selected as CLOSE value which means if
there are two modes which distance is smaller than 0.015 Hz, it is assumed to be the same mode. ACII
Main Index
file format of natural frequencies and eigenvalues are asked (0) and translational time histories of zdirection are requested (3). Frequency-amplitude data of z-direction are asked (13) and a peak which
amplitude is less than 0.0030the maximum amplitude is ignored (.0030)
+,11,21,116,126,221,231
The grid points 11, 21, 116, 126, 221 and 231 are only considered for Time Domain NVH analysis.
Bulk data entry that defines grid points and elements.
CQUAD4
1
1
1
..
$ Nodes of the Entire Model
GRID
1
0.
..
23
0.
0.
22
85
Time:
.001
Main Index
0.
0.
-1.
106
0.
.001
1.
.002
0.
ADAPT
10
PARAM, S700NVH is for the re-run of Time NVH analysis. Using 1 as option Time Domain NVH
Results
There are three types of new results file from Time Domain NVH analysis.
1. mode.out: the natural frequencies and eigenvalues selected are restored.
2. ampl-freq-00000116-3.txt : amplitude-frequency output of DOF =3 at grid point 116.
3. time-hist-00000116-3.txt: time history output of DOF =3 at grid point 116.
From the ampl-freq-*** files, the frequency-amplitude plots are obtained.
Main Index
1.00E+04
node 11
nd
mode 88.
node 21
node 116
node 126
node 221
1.00E+03
Amplitude (acceleration)
node 231
1.00E+02
1.00E+01
1.00E+00
1.00E-01
1.00E-02
0
100
200
300
Frequency (Hz)
Main Index
400
500
In mode.out file,
Total Number of Modes
MODES
EIGV
1st Mode
EIGV
Node Number
1
18
Natural Frequency
1
2.050821E+01
11-9.13892833E-06 3.86241316E-06 3.19331321E-01
21 2.14690732E-05-1.14613790E-05 9.95118635E-01
116-9.93770531E-06 2.13863912E-06 3.30875181E-01
126 7.27358928E-06-2.94809676E-06 1.00000000E+00
221-1.23613298E-05-3.06943202E-06 3.20993777E-01
231 1.35196599E-05 6.87379272E-06 9.99026322E-01
2
8.789234E+01
11-5.69607103E-06 1.65922185E-06-6.09298304E-01
21 5.33656071E-06-7.67633319E-06-9.90453563E-01
116-3.47585317E-06 8.00428604E-07 1.97687095E-02
126 5.34868995E-06-3.96739670E-06-7.95414322E-03
221-4.07797686E-06-2.98546031E-06 5.90684541E-01
231 3.21720171E-06 7.30456344E-06 1.00000000E+00
Comparison of natural frequencies between SOL 103 and SOL 700 (Hz)
Mode
SOL103
SOL 700
Diff(%)
2.0508E+01
2.0864E+01
1.74
8.7894E+01
8.8639E+01
0.85
1.2891E+02
1.2966E+02
0.58
2.8516E+02
2.8771E+02
0.89
3.6036E+02
3.6269E+02
0.65
Main Index
Mode
1
Main Index
SOL 103
SOL 700
Mode
SOL 103
SOL 700
6 points sampling
12 points sampling
Main Index
Perform prestress run to calculate an initially stressed model and write out the initial
state to a file that can be used for a subsequent explicit SOL 700 run
ISTRSBE
ISTRSSH
Initialize stresses, history variables and the effective plastic strain for shell elements
ISTRSTS
Initialize stresses, history variables and the effective plastic strain for thick
shell elements.
ISTRSSO
Caution must be exercised to use the appropriate element formulation to get consistent results during
prestress analysis. Implicit and explicit element formulations might differ from each other resulting in
different displacement or stress values. For this purpose, the following study is done to identify the
best element formulations in MD Nastran Nonlinear Explicit (SOL 700) implicit solver that match
closest to those in MD Nastran. It is therefore recommended that the users follow the guideline below for
prestress simulation.
Main Index
Model
Material: Isotropic & elastic (E=1000., v=0.3 and density=1.)
1. Plate Model:
Size: 1x1
Thickness: 0.01
Element size: 0.2x0.2
a. Boundary Condition Fixed at all edges
b. loading condition:
case 1. Z- Translational Loading at the every grid point: 1.E-2
case 2. X-Rotational Loading at the every grid point: 1.E-2
case 3. Pressure at the top surface 1E-2
Main Index
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
c. CTRIA
Loading and boundary conditions are the same as CQUAD4
d. CSHEAR
Not tested yet.
2. Solid Model
Cube Size: 1x1x1
a. CHEXA Element size: 0.2x0.2x0.2
Main Index
b. loading condition
case 1. Z- Translational Loading on the every grid point at the top: 1.E-2
case 2. Pressure at the top surface 1E-2
c. CPENTA The same loading and boundary conditions as the Hexa case
d. TETRA
The same loading and boundary conditions as the Hexa case
Main Index
LS-DYNA Model:
The following entries were used for the linear analysis of the shells:
*CONTROL_SHELL
,1
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_AUTO
0
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_GENERAL
1,0.1,,0,0,0,0
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_SOLUTION
2,5,,0.01,0.01
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_SOLVER
, , , ,1,100.
*CONTROL_TERMINATION
1.0000
Similarly for solid model:
*CONTROL_SOLID
1,2
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_AUTO
0
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_GENERAL
1,0.1,,0,0,0,0
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_SOLUTION
2,5,,0.01,0.01
*CONTROL_IMPLICIT_SOLVER
, , , ,1,100.
LS-DYNA Element formulations used in the study:
CQUAD4 : ELFORM= 1,2,6,10,16,18,20
CTRIA: ELFORM= 1,2,6,10,16,17,18,20,21
HEXA: ELFORM= 1,2,6,18
TETRA: ELFORM= 1,2,4,10,16,18
PENTA: ELFORM= 1,2,15,18
Results:
The results for the linear and nonlinear static analyses are shown in Table 4-1. Even though many
elements showed close results (within 10% differences), several cases had a large variance of more than
10%. These are highlighted in red.
Main Index
Table 4-1
Nastran
CTRIA
LOADING
FORCE
PRESSURE
MOMENT
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
PRESSURE
MOMENT
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
PRESSURE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
PRESSURE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
PRESSURE
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
Output
Displacement
SOL101
SOL106
%Diff (linear and SOL101) %Diff (n
1.040E+01
8.400E-02
3.08
4.140E-01
2.680E-02
2.63
3.400E+00 Not converged
4.68
1.040E+01
8.400E-02
2.02
1.040E+01
8.400E-02
2.02
1.040E+01
8.400E-02
3.65
1.040E+01
8.400E-02
17.12
1.040E+01
8.400E-02
3.56
1.040E+01
8.400E-02
4.23
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
7.66
3.860E-01
2.680E-02
7.44
3.470E+00 Not converged
2.51
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
60.47
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
60.47
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
60.47
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
60.47
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
60.47
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
1.22
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
7.66
9.660E+00
7.870E-02
7.66
6.500E-02
6.290E-02
1.29
9.950E-04
9.960E-04
0.02
6.500E-02
6.290E-02
43.94
6.500E-02
6.290E-02
1.18
6.500E-02
6.290E-02
56.31
6.050E-02
5.890E-02
0.05
9.930E-04
9.930E-04
0.02
6.050E-02
5.890E-02
0.05
6.050E-02
5.890E-02
0.05
6.050E-02
5.890E-02
33.54
6.050E-02
5.890E-02
0.05
6.050E-02
5.890E-02
0.05
7.060E-02
6.820E-02
1.98
9.960E-04
9.970E-04
0.18
7.060E-02
6.820E-02
1.98
7.060E-02
6.820E-02
1.98
7.060E-02
6.820E-02
1.98
Main Index
Main Index
Main Index
Main Index
Constraint Definition
116
Lagrangian Loading
120
123
130
Constraint Definition
The motion of part or all of a mesh can be prescribed by application of constraints.
Single-Point Constraints
A single-point constraint is used to prescribe the motion of a translational or rotational degree of freedom.
The constraint is effective throughout the analysis and is used to specify boundary conditions or planes
of symmetry.
A single-point constraint is defined by an SPCn entry. The SPC entry defines the constraints on one grid
point, while the SPC1 defines the constraints to be applied to a set of grid points. Several sets of SPC
entries can be defined in the Bulk Data Section, but only those selected in the Case Control Section using
the SPC = n command are incorporated in the analysis.
Single-point constraints can also be defined using the GRIDt entry. These constraints are present for the
entire analysis and do not need to be selected in Case Control. This is valid only for SPC and SPC1.
Since Sol 700 is an explicit code, there is no matrix decomposition. Therefore, the problems of singular
matrices that occur with some implicit codes do not exist. All, or part of the Lagrangian mesh can be
entirely unconstrained and can undergo rigid body motion. SOL 700 correctly calculates the motion of
the mesh. Similarly, the redundant degrees of freedom, such as the in-plane rotation of shell elements, do
not need to be constrained since they do not affect the solution. The only constraints that are needed are
those representing the boundary conditions of the model and those necessary for any planes of symmetry.
The following SPC types are supported in MD Nastran SOL 700.
SPC
SPC1
SPCADD
SPCD (at present, only velocity is available)
SPCD2
Multi-Point Constraints
MPCs are special element types which define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The
following MPC types which are supported for MD Nastran SOL 700:
MPC
RBAR
RBE2
RBE2A
RBE2D
RBE2F
RBE3
Main Index
RBE3D
RBJOINT
REJSTIFF
RCONN
Description
Defines a multipoint constraint equation.
MPC
References
MPC in the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
three-dimensional cases.
Main Index
Contact problems involve a variety of different geometric and kinematic situations. Some contact
problems involve small relative sliding between the contacting surfaces, while others involve large
sliding or penetration followed by perforation and failure. Some contact problems involve contact over
large areas, while others involve contact between discrete points. The general Contact Body approach in
SOL 600 is also adopted by MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) to model contact and can be used
to handle most contact problem definitions.
Contact Bodies
There are two types of contact bodies in MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear deformable and rigid.
Deformable bodies are simply a collection of finite elements as shown below.
Figure 5-1
Deformable Body
Main Index
Rigid Walls
A rigid wall is a plane through which specified slave grid points cannot penetrate. The rigid wall provides
a convenient way of defining rigid targets in impact analyses.
Any number of rigid walls can be specified using WALL entries. The orientation of each wall is defined
by the coordinates of a point on the wall and a vector that is perpendicular to the wall and points towards
the model.
At each time step, a check is made to determine whether the slave grid points have penetrated the wall.
These slave points are defined using a Case Control SET entry, and there can be any number of them.
Since a check is made for every slave point at each time step, you should specify only those points as
slave points that are expected to contact the wall in order to ensure the most efficient solution.
If a slave point is found to have penetrated the wall, it is moved back towards the wall so that its
momentum is conserved. If the slave point subsequently moves away from the wall, it is allowed to do so.
Slave points cannot have any other constraint. They can, however, be part of other contact.
Contact Detection
During the incremental procedure, each potential contact node is first checked to see whether it is near a
contact segment. The contact segments are either edges of other 2- D deformable bodies, faces of 3-D
deformable bodies, or segments from rigid bodies. By default, each node could contact any other segment
including segments on the body that it belongs to. This allows a body to contact itself. To simplify the
computation, it is possible to use the BCTABLE entry to indicate that a particular body will or will not
contact another body. This is often used to indicate that a body will not contact itself. During the iteration
process, the motion of the node is checked to see whether it has penetrated a surface by determining
whether it has crossed a segment.
For more detailed discussion on the Contact, refer to Chapter 8: Contact Impact Algorithm of this guide
and see Chapter 12 in the SOL 600 Users Guide.
Main Index
Lagrangian Loading
This section covers the different ways that the analysis model can be loaded. The facilities available are:
Concentrated Loads and Moments
FORCE, FORCE2, or DAREA Fixed-Direction Concentrated Loads
Pressure Loads
Initial Conditions
Concentrated loads and moments can be applied to any grid point using the DAREA, FORCE, FORCE2,
entries in combination with a TLOADn entry.
The types of concentrated load that can be applied are discussed in the following section.
Main Index
On a rigid body, the concentrated load or enforced motion is specified by defining the load at the rigid
body center of gravity. To do so, set the TYPE field of the TLOAD1 or TLOAD2 entries to 13 and 12,
respectively. The G field in the FORCE entry references the property number of the rigid body.
Pressure Loads
Pressure loads are applied to the faces of solid elements and to shell elements. Pressure loads are defined
using the PLOAD or PLOAD4 entry in combination with a TLOADn entry.
TLOAD2 also references a set of PLOAD and/or PLOAD4 entries. Each entry selects the face of the
element to be loaded by its grid points and defines the scale factor to be applied to the curve of pressure
versus time. The actual pressure acting on the element p el is given as follows:
p el ( t ) = A p ( t )
where
The direction of positive pressure is calculated according to the right-hand rule using the sequence of grid
points on the PLOAD entry. For PLOAD4 entries, the pressure is inwards for solid elements and in the
direction of the element normal vector for shell elements.
G4
G3
G1
G3
G1
G2
G2
The RFORCE entry defines enforced motion due to a centrifugal acceleration field. This motion affects
all structural elements present in the problem. The GRAV defines an enforced motion due to a
gravitational acceleration field. This motion affects all Lagrangian elements.
Grid points with enforced motion cannot be:
Attached to a rigid body.
A slave point for a rigid wall.
To specify the motion of a rigid body, the enforced motion of the rigid-body center of gravity must be
defined. To do so, set the TYPE field of the TLOAD1 and TLOAD2 entries to 12. The G field on the
DAREA, FORCE entry references the property number of the rigid body.
Main Index
Initial Conditions
The initial velocity of grid points can be defined using TIC, TIC3, and TICD entries. This allows the initial
state of the model to be set prior to running the analysis. It is important to recognize the difference
between initial velocities and enforced velocities. Enforced velocities specify the motion of grid points
throughout the transient analysis. Initial velocities, on the other hand, specify the velocity of grid points
at the beginning of the analysis. Thereafter, the velocities are determined by the calculation.
Where TIC and TIC3 set only the initial grid-point velocity, the TICD entry can be used to set the initial
value of any valid grid point variable. It can also refer to a local coordinate system by including the CID1
and/or CID2 entry in the list.
Main Index
Flow Boundary
A flow boundary defines the physical properties of material flowing in or out of Eulerian elements and
the location of the flow. The FLOW entry is referenced by a TLOAD1. The TYPE field on the TLOAD1
must be set to 4.
The FLOW entry references a set of segments, specified by BCSEG entries, through which the material
flows. The subsequent fields allow you to specify the x, y, or z velocity, the pressure, and the density or
specific internal energy of the flowing material. If only the pressure is defined, this gives a pressure
boundary. Any variables not specified take the value in the element that the material that is flowing into
or out of the flow.
Rigid Wall
The BARRIER entry defines a wall that is equivalent to a Lagrangian rigid wall. This is a barrier to
material transport in an Eulerian mesh. The barrier is defined by a set of faces generated from a BCSEG
entry through which no material can flow.
This is the default condition for any exterior faces of the Eulerian mesh that do not have a FLOW
boundary specified. However, the BARRIER entry can be used to specify rigid walls within an
Eulerian mesh.
Main Index
Eulerian Mesh
BARRIER Boundary
Initial Conditions
The initial conditions of Eulerian elements can be defined using the TICEL or TICEUL1 entry or by using
the option initeul= in the sol700.pth file. This allows the initial state of the model to be set prior to
running the analysis. It is important to recognize the difference between initial conditions and enforced
conditions. Enforced conditions specify the loading and constraints of material throughout the transient
analysis. Initial conditions, on the other hand, specify the state of the material only at the beginning of
the analysis. Thereafter, the material state is determined by the calculation.
TICEL
The TICEL entry defines transient initial conditions for elements. Any valid element variable can be given
an initial value.
INITEUL
The INITEUL entry imports an Euler archive into a follow-up run and maps it onto the defined Euler
elements. If the follow-up run uses a coupling surface, then in the first run, this coupling surface can be
left out provided that physics in the Euler have not reached the coupling surface at the end of the first run.
In the follow-up run, a coarser mesh can be used to reduce CPU time.
TICEUL1
The TICEUL1 entry defines transient initial conditions for geometrical regions in the Eulerian mesh using
the TICREG entries. The TICEUL1 entry must be used together with the PEULER1 property definition.
Main Index
With the TICREG entry, it is possible to generate initial conditions inside or outside multifaceted surfaces,
analytical cylindrical or spherical geometry shapes and in sets of elements.
Each geometrical region (multifaceted surface, cylinder, sphere, box or set of elements) has a level
number. This allows the creation of regions of arbitrary shape by allowing the regions to overlap. An
element that lies in two or more geometrical regions is assigned to the region that has the highest
level number.
Think of geometrical regions as shapes cut out of opaque paper. Position the region of the lowest level
number on the mesh. Then, place the next higher region on top of the first and continue until all the
regions are in place. When the last region is placed, you have a map indicating to which region each
element in the problem is assigned.
The following figure shows how three different geometrical regions can be used to create regions of
arbitrary shape. The solid line represents the boundary of the mesh. Region one (LEVEL = 1) is the large
dashed rectangle. Region two (LEVEL = 2) is the long narrow rectangle. Region three (LEVEL = 3) is a
circular region. The numbers on the diagram indicate how the elements in different parts of the mesh are
assigned to these three regions.
LEVEL = 1
1
2
1
LEVEL = 2
LEVEL = 3
If two or more regions with the same level number but different initial value sets or materials overlap,
the regions are ambiguously defined resulting in an error.
Multifaceted surfaces that are used in initial value generation must be closed and form a positive volume
and are defined on the SURFINI entry. The SURFINI entry is referred to from the TICREG entry and
together with a TICVAL entry the initial condition for the initialization surface is defined.
Main Index
Example 1:
In the example below, a combination of two multi-faceted surfaces, a cylindrical and a spherical shape
together with a block of elements (all Eulerian elements) are used to define the initial conditions in an
Eulerian rectangular mesh.
The different shapes, initial value sets and levels used are shown below. All elements of the Eulerian
mesh are defined as an ELEMENT shape with void and the lowest level 6 (see input file below). This
means that the part of an element that doesnt fall inside any of the shapes will be initialized as being
void.7.
Plot of the material inside the Eulerian mesh after initialization.
Input:
TICEUL1,101,101
TICREG,1,101,SURF,6,12,204,9.
TICREG,1,101,SURF,7,12,205,10.
TICREG,1,101,CYLINDER,8,12,206,7.
TICREG,1,101,SPHERE,9,12,207,8.
TICREG,1,101,ELEM,444,,,6.
SET1,444,50000,THRU,53375
$
TICVAL,204,,DENSITY,1000.,XVEL,50.
TICVAL,205,,DENSITY,1000.,XVEL,50.
Main Index
TICVAL,206,,DENSITY,1000.,XVEL,50.
TICVAL,207,,DENSITY,1000.,XVEL,50.
$
BCPROP 116
SURFINI 6
6
Inside On
$
BCPROP 117
SURFINI 7
7
Inside On
$
CYLINDR,8,,1.0,.5,.5,2.0,.5,.5,+
+,.075
SPHERE,9,,1.75,.5,.5,.15
On
On
Example 2:
In the example below a multifaceted surface is used with the OUTSIDE option. When the OUTSIDE
option is used on the SURFINI entry, the parts of the Eulerian elements that fall outside the initialization
surface are initialized.
Main Index
Input:
TICEUL1,102,102
TICREG,1,102,SURF,8,12,204,9.
TICREG,2,102,,CYLINDER,7,12,206,7.
TICREG,3,102,,ELEM,445,,,5.
SET1,445,60000,THRU,63375
$
BCPROP 118
SURFINI 8
8
Outside On
$
CYLINDR,7,,1.0,.20,.50,3.0,.40,.50,+
+,.1
On
Any initial condition that you define will act on the material as it is defined within the confines of the
Eulerian mesh.
The user can define a radial velocity field for the material in an Eulerian domain. The definition does not
apply the standard element variables, but a sequence of four definitions that completely specify the radial
velocity field. You need to define the center from where the radial is to emerge (X-CENTER, Y-CENTER,
and Z-CENTER), the velocity in the direction of the radial (R-VEL) and the decay coefficient (DECAY).
Assume the element center at location ( x, y, z ) and the location of where the radial emerges as ( x, y, z ) .
With R , the velocity along the radial and the decay coefficient , the velocity components for the element
(mass) can be computed:
x xr
r = ------------------x xr
and
v = r R ( x x r )
The velocity components resulting from the radial field are added to the velocity components otherwise
defined for the element.
Note that the dimension of RVEL changes with the value of DECAY.
Example 3:
Assume the initialization is with sphere with origin at (0,0,0) and has a radius of 2.
The DECAY coefficient is 3 and the velocity of air at the sphere boundary is 400.
The value of R-VEL is:
400R V E L = -------= 50
3
2
Input:
PEULER1,100,,2ndOrder,101
$
TICEUL1,101,101
TICREG,1,101,SPHERE,1,1,4,2.0
TICREG,2,101,ELEM,2,1,5,1.0
$
SPHERE,1,,0.,0.,0.,2.0
Main Index
TICVAL 4
DENSITY 1.1468-7SIE
3.204+8 ZVEL
20000.
+CONT
+CONT
X-CENTER0.0
Y-CENTER0.0
Z-CENTER0.0
R-VEL
50.
+CONT
+CONT
DECAY
3.0
$
SET1,2,1,THRU,10000
TICVAL,5,,DENSITY,1.1468-7,SIE,3.204+8
Detonation
Eulerian elements that reference a JWL equation of state (EOSJWL) have to be detonated. A DETSPH
entry must be present that defines a spherical detonation wave. You define the location of the detonation
point, the time of detonation, and the speed of the detonation wave. The solver then calculates the
time at which each explosive element detonates. Elements that do not have a JWL equation of state
are unaffected.
Body Forces
If the GRAV entry is specified, the Eulerian material also has body forces acting on the material mass.
The GRAV entry defines acceleration in any direction. All Eulerian material present in the problem
is affected.
Hydrostatic Preset
With PARAM, HYDSTAT, the Euler element densities are initialized in accordance to a hydrostatic
pressure profile. This PARAM requires the use of the GRAV entry.
To impose matching boundary conditions FLOW,,,HYDSTAT and PORHYDS can be used. These two
entries use the following boundary conditions:
The pressure given by hydrostatic pressure profile. This is defined by the HYDSTAT entry
The velocities are set equal to their element values.
If fluid flows in, its density is derived from the hydrostatic pressure.
Main Index
b 1
b1 N t t ds
(5-1)
a Gaussian quadrature rule is used. To locate any point of the surface under consideration, a position
vector, , is defined:
r = f 1 ( , )i 1 + f 2 ( , )i 2 + f 3 ( , ) i 3
(5-2)
where:
4
f i ( , ) =
j x i
(5-3)
j= 1
and
i1 , i2 ,
and
i3
x 1 , x2 ,
and
x3
Nodal quantities are interpolated over the four-node linear surface by the functions:
1
i = --- ( 1 + i ) ( 1 + i )
4
(5-4)
ds
d s = J dd
where
r r
J = ------ ------- = ( E G F 2 ) 1 2
(5-5)
in which:
r r
E = ------ -----
r r
F = ------ ------
r r
G = ------- ------
Main Index
(5-6)
r
1 -----
r
-------
(5-7)
and the global components of the traction vector can now be written:
4
ti = ni
j pj
(5-8)
j =1
where
pj
x3
x2
i3
i1
Figure 5-2
r,
i2
x1
1 1 N t t J ( d ) d
(5-9)
One such integral is computed for each surface segment on which a pressure loading acts. Note that the
Jacobians cancel when (5-7) and (5-6) are put into (5-9). Equation (5-9) is evaluated with one-point
integration analogous to that employed in the volume integrals. The area of an element side is
approximated by 4 J where J = J ( 0, 0 ) .
Main Index
Displacement Constraints
Translational and rotational boundary constraints are imposed either globally or locally by setting the
constrained acceleration components to zero. If nodal single point constraints are employed, the
constraints are imposed in a local system. The user defines the local system by specifying a vector u l in
the direction of the local x-axis, x l , and a local in-plane vector v l . After normalizing u l , the local x l , y l ,
and z l axes are given by:
ul
x l = --------ul
(5-10)
xl vl
z l = -------------------xl vl
(5-11)
yl = zl xl
(5-12)
A transformation matrix
x lt
q =
(5-13)
y lt
t
zl
aI
and
I ,
a I = qa I
(5-14)
I = q I
(5-15)
and the constrained components are zeroed. The modified vectors are then transformed back to the
global system:
t
aI = q aI
I = q I
Main Index
(5-16)
(5-17)
where
Main Index
vm N t N a base d
a base
(5-18)
= m e a base
me
Main Index
Chapter 6: Elements
MD Natran R3 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) Users Guide
Main Index
Elements
J
Elements Overview
Preliminaries
Eulerian Elements
Graded Meshes
136
140
225
226
144
154
163
172
184
197
211
224
219
Elements Overview
The heart of a finite element program lies in its element library which allows you to model a structure for
analysis. MD Nastran has a very comprehensive element library which lets you model 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D
structures. This section gives some basic definitions of the element types available in MD Nastran
Explicit Nonlinear. Please note, these elements differ from those used in other portions of MD Nastran.
Element Types
Each element has five definitive characteristics that determine its behavior:
Class
Number of Nodes
Interpolation
Degrees of Freedom
Integration Method
Class
The type of geometric domain that an element represents determines the class of the element. Listed
below are the classes of elements in the MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear element library.
Beam Elements - a 3-D bar with axial, bending, and torsional stiffness.
Shell Elements - a curved, thin or thick structure with membrane/bending capabilities.
Plate Elements - a flat thin structure carrying in-plane and out-of-plane loads.
Continuum Elements - Solid elements used to model thick sections.
Plane stress - a thin plate with in-plane stresses only. All normal and shear stresses associated
with the out-of-plane direction are assumed to be zero. (All plane strain elements lie in the global
x-y plane.)
Plane strain - a region where there is no out-of-plane motion and the normal and transverse
Main Index
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes for an element define where the displacements are calculated in the analysis.
Elements with only corner nodes are classified as first order elements and the calculation of
displacements at locations within the element are made by linear interpolation. Elements that contain
midside nodes are second order elements and quadratic interpolations are made for calculating
displacements. MD Nastran SOL 700 do not support second order elements.
In MD Nastran, the number of nodes is designated at the end of the element name. For example, a
CQUAD4 has 4 nodes.
Interpolation
Interpolation (shape) function is an assumed function relating the displacements at a point inside an
element to the displacements at the nodes of an element. In MD Nastran, three types of shape functions
are used: linear, quadratic, and cubic.
Degrees of Freedom
Degrees of freedom is the number of unknowns at a node. In the general case, there are six degrees of
freedom at a node in structural analysis (three translations, three rotations). For example there are three
(translations) for 3-D truss element; six (three translations, three rotations) for a 3-D beam element and
only three translations for the 3-D solid elements.
Integration
Numerical integration is a method used for evaluating integrals over an element. Element quantities
such as stresses, strains, and temperatures are calculated at each integration point of the element. Full
integration (quadrature) requires, for every element, 2-D integration points for linear interpolation and 3D points for quadratic interpolation, where scalar d is the number of geometric dimensions of an
element (that is, d = 2 for a quad; d = 3 for a hexahedron). Reduced integration uses a lower number of
integration points than necessary to integrate exactly. For example, for an 8-node quadrilateral, the
number of integration points is reduced from 9 to 4 and, for a 20-node hexahedron, from 27 to 8. For
some elements, an hourglass control method is used to insure an accurate solution.
Table 6-1 summarizes the elements available in MD Nastran SOL 700. This section describes the
characteristics of the elements. For shell elements CTRIA3 and CQUAD4, shell element
PARAM,DYNSHELLFORM is used to control the behavior.
Table 6-1
MD
Nastran
Main Index
CBAR
CBEAM
CBELT
CBEND
Fatal Error
Table 6-1
MD
Nastran
Fatal Error
CBUSH
CBUTT
CCONEAX
CCRSFIL
CDAMP1
CDAMP2
CDAMP1D
CDAMP2D
CELAS1
CELAS2
CELAS1D
CELAS2D
CFILLET
CFLUID
CGAP
CHACAB
CHACBR
CHEXA
Main Index
Y (8 Nodes only)
COMBWLD
CONM2
CONROD
CONSPOT
CPENTA
Y (6 Nodes only)
CQUAD4
CQUAD8
Y (4 Nodes only)
CQUADR
CQUADX
CROD
CSHEAR
CSPOT
CSPR
Y
Y
Table 6-1
MD
Nastran
Main Index
CTETRA
Y (4 and 10 Nodes)
CTRIA3
CTRIA6
Y (3 Nodes only)
Fatal Error
CTRIA3R
CTRIAX
CTRIAX6
CTQUAD
CTTRIA
CTUBE
CVISC
CWELD
Preliminaries
Consider the body shown in Figure 6-1. We are interested in time-dependent deformation in which a point
in b initially at X ( = 1, 2, 3 ) in a fixed rectangular Cartesian coordinate system moves to a point x i
( i = 1, 2, 3 ) in the same coordinate system. Since a Lagrangian formulation is considered, the deformation
can be expressed in terms of the convected coordinates X , and time t
x i = x i ( X , t )
At time
t = 0,
(6-1)
we have the initial conditions
x i ( X , 0 ) = X
(6-2)
x i ( X , 0 ) = V i ( X )
(6-3)
where
Vi
x3
X3
n
x2
X2
t = 0
b
B
B0
x1
Figure 6-1
Main Index
Notation
X1
Governing Equations
We seek a solution to the momentum equation
i j, j + f i = xi
(6-4)
on boundary
(6-5)
b 1 ,
x i ( X , t ) = D i ( t )
on boundary
(6-6)
b 2 ,
( i+j i j )n i = 0
(6-7)
along an interior boundary b 3 when X i+ = x i- . Here i j is the Cauchy stress, is the current density, f is
the body force density, x is acceleration, the comma denotes covariant differentiation, and n j is a unit
outward normal to a boundary element of b .
Mass conservation is trivially stated
V = 0
where
(6-8)
is the relative volume, i.e., the determinant of the deformation gradient matrix,
F ij ,
x i
F ij = -------X j
and
(6-9)
E = V s i j ij ( p + q ) V
(6-10)
is integrated in time and is used for equation of state evaluations and a global energy balance. In Equation
(6-10), s i j and p represent the deviatoric stresses and pressure,
s i j = i j + ( p + q ) ij
(6-11)
1
1
p = --- ij i j q = --- kk q
3
3
(6-12)
respectively,
i j
Main Index
i j
= 1
if
i = j;
otherwise
is the strain rate tensor. The strain rates and bulk viscosity are discussed later.
i j = 0 )
and
We can write:
( xi i j, j fi )x i d +
( i j n j t i ) x i ds
(6-13)
b1
( i+j i j )n j x i ds = 0
b3
( ij x i ), jd
i j n j x i ds +
b 1
b 2 ,
( i+j i j ) n j x i ds
(6-14)
b 3
(6-15)
xi x i d + i j xi, j d f i x i d
t i x i ds = 0
(6-16)
b 1
x i ( X ,t ) = x i ( X ( , , ) ,t ) =
j ( , , )x i ( t )
j
(6-17)
j =1
where
x ij
( , , ) , k
is the number of
with
m = 0
(6-18)
m=1
and write
m
xi i d +
m = 1 m
Main Index
ijm im,j d
f i im d
b1
t i im ds
= 0
(6-19)
where
im = ( 1 , 2 , , k ) im
(6-20)
N t N a d +
m = 1 m
n
where
B t d
N t b d
b 1
is an interpolation matrix,
N t t ds
= 0
= N
x3
ay
x1
x
ay
az
fz
(6-23)
fx
fy
= Na
b =
Main Index
(6-22)
(6-21)
tx
t =
ty
tz
(6-24)
x i ( X , t ) = x i ( X ( , , ), t ) =
j ( , , )x i ( t )
j
(6-25)
j =1
1
j = --- ( 1 + j ) ( 1 + j ) ( 1 + j )
8
(6-26)
( 1, 1, 1 )
and
x ij
5
8
Node
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-1
1
1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
-1
1
1
1
1
2
3
Figure 6-2
1 0 0 2 0 0 0
N ( , , ) =
0 1 0 0 2 8 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 8
Main Index
(6-27)
(6-28)
B =
------ 0 0
x
0 ------ 0
y
0 0 ----z N
------ ------ 0
y x
0 ----- -----z y
----- 0 -----x
z
(6-29)
In order to achieve a diagonal mass matrix the rows are summed giving the k th diagonal term as
8
m kk =
i d
i =1
k d
(6-30)
x y z
--------i = --------i ------- + --------i ------- + --------i ------
x y z
(6-31)
x i y i z
--------i
i
-------
i
-------
Main Index
x----
x-----
x----
y----
y-----
y----
z----
z-----
z----
i
-------x
i
-------y
i
-------z
--------i
x
= J
--------i
y
i
-------z
(6-32)
Inverting the Jacobian matrix, J , we can solve for the desired terms
--------i
x
i
-------y
i
-------z
= J 1
--------i
i
-------
i
-------
(6-33)
Volume Integration
Volume integration is carried out with Gaussian quadrature. If
volume, and n is the number of integration points, then
g d
1 1 1
1
g J d d d
(6-34)
is approximated by
n
g jkl Jj kl wj w k w l
(6-35)
j = 1k = 1l = 1
where
w j, w k , w l
g j kl = g ( j, k, l )
and
(6-36)
n = 1
wi = wj = wk = 2
(6-37)
1 = 1 = 1 = 0
g dv
= 8 g ( 0 ,0 ,0 ) J ( 0 ,0 ,0 )
Note that
8 J ( 0 ,0 ,0 )
(6-38)
Perhaps the biggest advantage to one-point integration is a substantial savings in computer time. An antisymmetry property of the strain matrix
Main Index
--------- = --------7x i
x i
--------- = --------5x i
x i
--------2- = --------8x i
x i
--------- = --------6x i
x i
(6-39)
at = = = 0 reduces the amount of effort required to compute this matrix by more than 25 times
over an 8-point integration. This cost savings extends to strain and element nodal force calculations
where the number of multiplies is reduced by a factor of 16. Because only one constitutive evaluation is
needed, the time spent determining stresses is reduced by a factor of eight. Operation counts for the
constant stress hexahedron are given in Table 6-2. Included are counts for the Flanagan and Belytschko
[1981] hexahedron and the hexahedron used by Wilkins [1974] in his integral finite difference method,
which was also implemented [Hallquist 1979].
.
Table 6-2
Belytschko
[1981]
FDM
94
357
843
Strain rates
87
56
Force
117
195
270
Subtotal
298
708
1,113
Hourglass control
130
620
680
Total
428
1328
1,793
Hourglass Control
The biggest disadvantage to one-point integration is the need to control the zero energy modes, which
arise, called hourglassing modes. Undesirable hourglass modes tend to have periods that are typically
much shorter than the periods of the structural response, and they are often observed to be oscillatory.
However, hourglass modes that have periods that are comparable to the structural response periods may
be a stable kinematic component of the global deformation modes and must be admissible. One way of
resisting undesirable hourglassing is with a viscous damping or small elastic stiffness capable of stopping
the formation of the anomalous modes but having a negligible affect on the stable global modes. Two of
the early three-dimensional algorithms for controlling the hourglass modes were developed by Kosloff
and Frazier [1974] and Wilkins et al. [1974].
Main Index
Since the hourglass deformation modes are orthogonal to the strain calculations, work done by the
hourglass resistance is neglected in the energy equation. This may lead to a slight loss of energy;
however, hourglass control is always recommended for the under integrated solid elements. The energy
dissipated by the hourglass forces reacting against the formations of the hourglass modes is tracked and
reported in the output files MATSUM and GLSTAT. This is only provided if the PARM,DYENERGYGE
is included.
It is easy to understand the reasons for the formation of the hourglass modes. Consider the following
strain rate calculations for the 8-node solid element
8
k
1
k
i j = --- -------- x jk + -------- x ik
x
x j
2
k = 1 i
(6-40)
(6-41)
i j = 0
(6-42)
due to the asymmetries in (6-39). It is easy to prove the orthogonality of the hourglass shape vectors,
which are listed in Table 6-3 and shown in Figure 6-2 with the derivatives of the shape functions:
8
k=1
k
-------- k = 0
x i
Table 6-3
= 1 ,2 ,3 ,4
i = 1 ,2 ,3
(6-43)
= 2
= 3
= 4
j1
j2
-1
-1
-1
j3
-1
-1
j4
-1
-1
-1
j5
-1
-1
-1
j6
-1
-1
j7
-1
j8
-1
-1
The hourglass modes of an 8-node element with one integration point are shown [Flanagan and
Belytschko 1981] (Figure 6-3). A total of twelve modes exist.
Main Index
Figure 6-3
1k
2k
3k
4k
Hourglass Modes
hi =
x ik k = 0
(6-44)
k=1
are nonzero if hourglass modes are present. The 12 hourglass-resisting force vectors,
f ik = a h h i k
f ik
are
(6-45)
where
c
a h = Q hg e2 3 --4
(6-46)
in which e is the element volume, c is the material sound speed, and Q h g is a user-defined constant
usually set to a value between .05 and .15. This is defined by DYHRGQH PARAM. The hourglass resisting
forces of (6-45) are not orthogonal to rigid body rotations; however, the approach of Flanagan and
Belytschko [1981] is orthogonal. This is controlled by using the DYHRGIHQ PARAM.
Material subroutines add as little as 60 operations for the bilinear elastic-plastic routine to ten times as
much for multi-surface plasticity and reactive flow models. Unvectorized material models will increase
that share of the cost a factor of four or more.
Main Index
Instead of resisting components of the bilinear velocity field that are orthogonal to the strain calculation,
Flanagan and Belytschko resist components of the velocity field that are not part of a fully linear field.
They call this field, defined below, the hourglass velocity field
HG
LIN
x ik
= x i x ik
(6-47)
where
LIN
x ik
= x i + x i ,j ( x jk x j )
(6-48)
1
x i = --8
x i = --8
x ik
k=1
x i
(6-49)
k=1
Flanagan and Belytschko construct geometry-dependent hourglass shape vectors that are orthogonal to
the fully linear velocity field and the rigid body field. With these vectors they resist the hourglass velocity
deformations. Defining hourglass shape vectors in terms of the base vectors as
8
ak = ak k ,i
x in an
(6-50)
n =1
and setting
8
gi a =
x ik k = 0
(6-51)
k= 1
where
ah
(6-52)
The hourglass forces given by (6-45) and (6-52) are identical if the, hexahedron element is a
parallelepiped. The default hourglass control method for solid element is given by (6-45); however, we
recommend the Flanagan-Belytschko approach for problems that have large rigid body rotations since
the default approach is not orthogonal to rigid body rotations.
A cost comparison in Table 6-2 shows that the default hourglass viscosity requires approximately 130
adds or multiplies per hexahedron, compared to 620 and 680 for the algorithms of Flanagan-Belytschko
and Wilkins.
Hourglass stabilization for the 3-D hexahedral element is available. Based on material properties and
element geometry, this stiffness type stabilization is developed by an assumed strain method [Belytschko
and Bindeman 1993] such that the element does not lock with nearly incompressible material. This is
activated by using the PARAM,DYHRGIHG,6. When the user-defined hourglass constant Q h g is set to 1.0,
accurate coarse mesh bending stiffness is obtained for elastic material. For nonlinear material, a smaller
value of Q hg is suggested and the default value is set to 0.1.
Main Index
xx
u
= ----------------------- +
x n + 1 2
yy
v
= ----------------------- +
y n + 1 2
zz
w
= ---------------------- +
z n + 1 2
xy
u
- ------------------------------------------+
x n + 1 2 y n + 1 2
= -----------------------------------------------------2
yz
w
v
----------------------- + ---------------------y n + 1 2 z n + 1 2
----------------------------------------------------=
2
zx
u
w ---------------------- + ---------------------z n + 1 2 x n + 1 2
= ----------------------------------------------------2
(6-53)
where modifies the normal strains to ensure that the total volumetric strain increment at each
integration point is identical
vn + 1 2
and
n+12
u
- --------------------- w
----------------------- + ---------------------+
x n + 1 2 y n + 1 2 z n + 1 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------3
(6-54)
u
1-- - --------------------- w n + 1 2
----------------------- + ---------------------dv
+
x
n+12
3
y n + 1 2 z n + 1 2
n
+
1
2
v
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- dv n + 1 2
(6-55)
vn + 1 2
u, v ,
and
x, y ,
and
(xn + xn + 1)
x n + 1 2 = -----------------------------2
(6-56)
(yn + yn + 1)
y n + 1 2 = -----------------------------2
(6-57)
(zn + zn + 1 )
z n + 1 2 = ----------------------------2
(6-58)
To satisfy the condition that rigid body rotations cause zero straining, it is necessary to use the geometry
at the mid-step in the evaluation of the strain increments. The explicity formulation uses the geometry at
step n + 1 to save operations; however, for calculations, which involve rotating parts, the mid-step
geometry should be used especially if the number of revolutions is large.
Main Index
Since the bulk modulus is constant in the plastic and viscoelastic material models, constant pressure solid
elements result. In the thermoelastoplastic material, a constant temperature is assumed over the element.
In the soil and crushable foam material, an average relative volume is computed for the element at time
step n + 1 , and the pressure and bulk modulus associated with this relative volume is used at each
integration point. For equations of state, one pressure evaluation is done per element and is added to the
deviatoric stress tensor at each integration point.
The foregoing procedure requires that the strain-displacement matrix corresponding to equation (6-53)
and consistent with a constant volumetric strain, B , be used in the nodal force calculations [Hughes
1980]. It is easy to show that:
F =
B n + 1 n + 1 dv n + 1 =
vn + 1
B n + 1 n + 1 dv n + 1
(6-59)
vn + 1
B.
(6-60)
N 3 ( r, s , t ) = 1 r s t
N 4 ( r, s , t ) = t
1
2
s
Figure 6-4
Main Index
Four-node tetrahedron
If a tetrahedron element is needed, this element should be used instead of the collapsed solid element
since it is, in general, considerably more stable in addition to being much faster.
(6-61)
1
N 4 ( r, s, t ) = --- ( 1 + t )r
2
1
N 5 ( r, s, t ) = --- ( 1 t )s
2
1
N 6 ( r, s, t ) = --- ( 1 + t )s
2
If a pentahedron element is needed, this element should be used instead of the collapsed solid element
since it is, in general, more stable and significantly faster. Selective-reduced integration is used to prevent
volumetric locking; i.e., a constant pressure over the domain of the element is assumed.
t
4
6
r
2
1
5
Figure 6-5
Main Index
Co-rotational Technique
In any large displacement formulation, the goal is to separate the deformation displacements from the
rigid body displacements, as only the deformation displacements give rise to strains and the associated
generation of strain energy. This separation is usually accomplished by comparing the current
configuration with a reference configuration.
The current configuration is a complete description of the deformed body in its current spatial location
and orientation, giving locations of all points (nodes) comprising the body. The reference configuration
can be either the initial configuration of the body (i.e., nodal locations at time zero) or the configuration
of the body at some other state (time). Often, the reference configuration is chosen to be the previous
configuration, say at time t n = t n + 1 t .
The choice of the reference configuration determines the type of deformations that will be computed:
total deformations result from comparing the current configuration with the initial configuration, while
incremental deformations result from comparing with the previous configuration. In most time stepping
(numerical) Lagrangian formulations, incremental deformations are used because they result in
significant simplifications of other algorithms, chiefly constitutive models.
A direct comparison of the current configuration with the reference configuration does not result in a
determination of the deformation, but rather provides the total (or incremental) displacements. We will
use the unqualified term displacements to mean either the total displacements or the incremental
displacements, depending on the choice of the reference configuration as the initial or the last state. This
is perhaps most obvious if the reference configuration is the initial configuration. The direct comparison
of the current configuration with the reference configuration yields displacements, which contain
components due to deformations and rigid body motions. The task remains of separating the deformation
and rigid body displacements. The deformations are usually found by subtracting from the displacements
an estimate of the rigid body displacements. Exact rigid body displacements are usually only known for
trivial cases where they are prescribed a priori as part of a displacement field. The co-rotational
formulations provide one such estimate of the rigid body displacements.
The co-rotational formulation uses two types of coordinate systems: one system associated with each
element; i.e., element coordinates which deform with the element, and another associated with each node;
i.e., body coordinates embedded in the nodes. (The term body is used to avoid possible confusion from
referring to these coordinates as nodal coordinates. Also, in the more general formulation presented in
[Belytschko et al., 1977], the nodes could optionally be attached to rigid bodies. Thus, the term body
coordinates refers to a system of coordinates in a rigid body, of which a node is a special case.) These
two coordinate systems are shown in the upper portion of Figure 6-6.
Main Index
^
Y
b2
0
e2
e1
^
X
b1
J
I
X
(a) Initial Configuration
^X
J
Y
^Y
b2
e1
e2
X
I
b1
(b) Rigid Rotation Configuration
^
Y
Y
b2
^
X
e2
e1
e1
b1
X
(c) Deformed Configuration
Figure 6-6
Main Index
The element coordinate system is defined to have the local x-axis x originating at node I and terminating
at node J ; the local y-axis y and, in three dimension, the local z-axis z , are constructed normal to x . The
element coordinate system ( x , y , z ) and associated unit vector triad ( e 1, e 2, e 3 ) are updated at every time
step by the same technique used to construct the initial system; thus the unit vector
element since it always points from node I to node J .
e1
The embedded body coordinate system is initially oriented along the principal inertial axes; either the
assembled nodal mass or associated rigid body inertial tensor is used in determining the inertial principal
values and directions. Although the initial orientation of the body axes is arbitrary, the selection of a
principal inertia coordinate system simplifies the rotational equations of motion; i.e., no inertial cross
product terms are present in the rotational equations of motion. Because the body coordinates are fixed
in the node (or rigid body), they rotate and translate with the node and are updated by integrating the
rotational equations of motion, as will be described subsequently.
The unit vectors of the two coordinate systems define rotational transformations between the global
coordinate system and each respective coordinate system. These transformations operate on vectors with
global components A = ( A x, A y, A z ) , body coordinates components A = A x, A y, A z , and element coordinate
components A
Ax
A = Ay =
Az
= A x, A y, A z
b 1x b 2x b 3x A x
b 1y b 2y b 3y A y = [ ] { A }
b 1z b 2z b 3z A
z
(6-62)
where b i x, b i y, b iz are the global components of the body coordinate unit vectors. Similarly for the element
coordinate system:
Ax
A = Ay =
Az
e 1x e 2x e 3x
e 1y e 2y e 3y
e 1z e 2z e 3z
Ax
Ay
Az
= []{A}
(6-63)
where e ix, e iy, e iz are the global components of the element coordinate unit vectors. The inverse
transformations are defined by the matrix transpose: i.e.,
T
{A} = [] {A}
(6-64)
{A} = [] {A }
(6-65)
Main Index
Rigid Rotation
First, consider a rigid body rotation of the beam element about node I , as shown in the center of
Figure 6-6b; i.e., consider node I to be a pinned connection. Because the beam does not deform during
the rigid rotation, the orientation of the unit vector e 1 in the initial and rotated configuration will be the
same with respect to the body coordinates. If the body coordinate components of the initial element unit
vector e 10 were stored, they would be identical to the body coordinate components of the current element
unit vector e 1 .
Deformation Rotation
Next, consider node I to be constrained against rotation; i.e., a clamped connection. Now node J is
moved, as shown in the lower portion of Figure 6-6, causing the beam element to deform. The updated
element unit vector e 1 is constructed and its body coordinate components are compared to the body
coordinate components of the original element unit vector e 10 . Because the body coordinate system did
not rotate, as node I was constrained, the original element unit vector and the current element unit vector
are not co-linear. Indeed, the angle between these two unit vectors is the amount of rotational deformation
at node I ; i.e.,
e 1 e 10 = l e 3
(6-66)
Thus the co-rotational formulation separates the deformation and rigid body deformations by using:
a coordinate system that deforms with the element; i.e., the element coordinates or
a coordinate system that rigidly rotates with the nodes; i.e., the body coordinates.
Then, it compares the current orientation of the element coordinate system with the initial element
coordinate system, using the rigidly rotated body coordinate system, to determine the deformations.
T
d = { IJ, xJI, yI, yJ, zI, zJ }
(6-67)
where
IJ
xJI
= length change
= torsional deformation
yI, yJ, zI, zJ
The superscript
and
Main Index
and
emphasizes that these quantities are defined in the local element coordinate system,
The beam deformations, defined in equation (6-62), are the usual small displacement beam deformations
(see, for example, [Przemieniecki 1986]). Indeed, one advantage of the co-rotational formulation is the
ease with which existing small displacement element formulations can be adapted to a large displacement
formulation having small deformations in the element system. Small deformation theories can be easily
accommodated because the definition of the local element coordinate system is independent of rigid body
rotations and hence deformation displacement can be defined directly.
Calculation of Deformations
The elongation of the beam is calculated directly from the original nodal coordinates
total displacements ( u xI, u yI, u zI ) :
1
2
2
2
+ u yJI
+ u zJI
]
IJ = ------------o [ 2 ( X JI u xJI + Y JI u yJI + Z JI u zJI ) + u xJI
l+l
( X I, Y I, Z I )
and the
(6-68)
where
(6-69)
X JI = X J X I
u xJI = u xJ u xI
etc.
(6-70)
The deformation rotations are calculated using the body coordinate components of the original element
coordinate unit vector along the beam axis; i.e.,
coordinate components of initial unit vector e 10 rotate with the node, in the deformed configuration it
indicates the direction of the beams axis if no deformations had occurred. Thus comparing the initial unit
vector
e 10
e 10
and
e1
e1 :
e 1 e 10 = y e 2 + z e 3
(6-71)
where
axis
axis
The calculation is most conveniently performed by transforming the body components of the initial
element vector into the current element coordinate system:
Main Index
0
0
e 1x
e 1x
e 0 = [ ] T [ ] e 0
1y
1y
0
e0
e 1z
1z
(6-72)
0
= e 1z
e 2 + e 10y e 3 = y e 2 + z e 3
(6-73)
0 0 0
e 1y e 1z
e 1x
Thus,
y = e 10z
(6-74)
0
z = e 1y
(6-75)
The torsional deformation rotation is calculated from the vector cross product of initial unit vectors, from
0
0
each node of the beam, that were normal to the axis of the beam, i.e., e 20I and e 2J
; note that e 30I and e 3J
could also be used. The result from this vector cross product is then projected onto the current axis of the
beam; i.e.,
e1 e2 e 3
0
0
0
0
xJI = e 1 ( e 2I e 2J ) = e 1 d e t e x2I
e y2I
e z02I
0 0
0 0
= e y2
I e z2 J e y2J e z2 I
(6-76)
0
0
0
e x2J
e y2
J e z2J
Note that the body components of e 20I and e 20J are transformed into the current element coordinate system
before performing the indicated vector products.
Currently only the former method, as explained subsequently, is implemented; the direct integration
method is detailed in [Belytschko et al., 1977].
Axial Force
The internal axial force is calculated from the elongation of the beam , as given by equation (6-68), and
an axial stiffness:
f xJ = K a
(6-77)
where:
Ka = A E l0
A
Main Index
is Youngs Modulus
l0
Bending Moments
The bending moments are related to the deformation rotations by
K yb 4 + y 2 y yI
m yI
= -------------
1 + y 2 4 +
m yJ
y
y yJ
(6-78)
K z 4 + z 2 z zI
m zI
-------------=
1
+
z 2 z 4 + z zJ
m zJ
(6-79)
x z
x y
EI yy
b
K y = ---------l0
(6-80)
EI zz
b
K z = --------l0
(6-81)
z 2 dy dz
(6-82)
y 2 dy dz
(6-83)
I yy =
I zz =
12 E I yy
y = ----------------2G As l
Hence
12E I zz
z = ---------------GA s l 2
G
(6-84)
As
Torsional Moment
The torsional moment is calculated from the torsional deformation rotation as
t
m
xJ = K xJI
(6-85)
where
GJ
K t = -----l0
J =
Main Index
y z dy dz
(6-86)
(6-87)
The above forces are conjugate to the deformation displacements given previously in equation (6-67);
i.e.,
T
d = { IJ, xJI, yI, yJ, zI, zJ }
(6-88)
where
i nt
T
{d } { f} = W
(6-89)
,m
,m
,m
,m
}
f = { f xJ, m
xJ
yI
yJ
zI
zJ
(6-90)
f xI = f xJ
m
xI = m xJ
+m
yI
yJ
f zI = ----------------------l0
f zI = f zJ
+m
zI
zJ
f yJ = ----------------------0
l
f yI = f yJ
(6-91)
j+1
bi
db i t 2 d 2 b i
j
= b i + t -------- + -------- ---------dt
2 dt 2
(6-92)
where the superscripts refer to the time step and the subscripts refer to the three unit vectors comprising
the body coordinate triad. The time derivatives in the above equation are replaced by their equivalent
forms from vector analysis:
j
db i
-------- = b i
dt
(6-93)
d 2 bi
----------- = ( b i ) + ( i b i )
dt 2
(6-94)
where and are vectors of angular velocity and acceleration, respectively, obtained from the
rotational equations of motion. With the above relations substituted into equation (6-92), the update
formula for the unit vectors becomes
j+1
bi
Main Index
j
t2
= b i + t ( b i ) + -------- { [ ( b i ) + ( i b i ) ] }
2
(6-95)
To obtain the formulation for the updated components of the unit vectors, the body coordinate system is
temporarily considered to be fixed and then the dot product of equation (6-95) is formed with the unit
vector to be updated. For example, to update the x component of b 3 , the dot product of equation (6-95),
with i = 3 , is formed with b 1 , which can be simplified to the relation
j+1
b x3
j+1
j
j
t2 j j
= t y + -------- ( x z + y )
2
(6-96)
j+1
j
j
t2 j j
= t x + -------- ( y z + x )
2
(6-97)
j+1
j
j
t2 j j
= t z + -------- ( x y + z )
2
(6-98)
= b 1 b y3
Similarly,
j+1
= b2 b3
j+1
= b1 b2
b y3
b x2
j+1
b3
and
b z3
j+1 2
j+1
j+1
b3
j+1 2
j+1
b x1
(6-99)
1,
orthogonality yields
b x3 + b y1 b y3
= ------------------------------------------j+1
b z3
The component
b x1
are small during a time step so that the quadratic terms in the
(6-100)
j+1 j+1
j+1
j+1
1 ( b x3 ) ( b y3 )
j+1
b1
j+1
b x1
j+1 2
(6-101)
1 ( b y1 ) ( b z1 )
(6-102)
The updated components of b 1 and b 3 are defined relative to the body coordinates at time step j . To
complete the update and define the transformation matrix, equation (6-62), at time step j + 1 , the updated
unit vectors b 1 and b 3 are transformed to the global coordinate system, using equation (6-62) with [ ]
defined at step j , and their vector cross product is used to form b 2 .
Main Index
element formulation.
It includes finite transverse shear strains. The added computations needed to retain this strain
component, compare to those for the assumption of no transverse shear strain, are insignificant.
Geometry
The Hughes-Liu beam element is based on a degeneration of the isoparametric 8-node solid element, an
approach originated by Ahmad et al., [1970]. Recall the solid element isoparametric mapping of the
biunit cube
x ( , , ) = N a ( , , )x a
(6-103)
( 1 + a ) ( 1 + a ) ( 1 + a )
N a ( , , ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------8
(6-104)
where
Na
( , , )
xa
a , a , a
In the beam geometry, determines the location along the axis of the beam and the coordinate pair ( , )
defines a point on the cross section. To degenerate the 8-node brick geometry into the 2-node beam
geometry, the four nodes at = 1 and at = 1 are combined into a single node with three translational
and three rotational degrees of freedom. Orthogonal, inextensible nodal fibers are defined at each node
for treating the rotational degrees of freedom. Figure 6-7 shows a schematic of the bi-unit cube and the
beam element. The mapping of the bi-unit cube into the beam element is separated into three parts:
x ( , , ) = x ( ) + X ( , , ) = x ( ) + X ( , ) + X ( , )
(6-105)
where x denotes a position vector to a point on the reference axis of the beam, and X and X are position
vectors at point x on the axis that define the fiber directions through that point. In particular,
Main Index
x ( ) = N a ( )x a
(6-106)
X ( , ) = N a ( ) X a ( )
(6-107)
X ( , ) = N a ( ) X a ( )
(6-108)
Bi-unit Cube
Beam Element
Nodal Fibers
Top Surface
+1
X
-1
Bottom Surface
Figure 6-7
With this description, arbitrary points on the reference line x are interpolated by the one- dimensional
shape function N ( ) operating on the global position of the two beam nodes that define the reference axis,
i.e., x a . Points off the reference axis are further interpolated by using a one-dimensional shape function
along the fiber directions; i.e., X a ( ) and X a ( ) where
Main Index
X a ( ) = z ( )X a
(6-109)
+ + N ( )z z ( ) = N + ( )z a
a
(6-110)
(1 + )
N + ( ) = -----------------2
(6-111)
(1 )
N - ( ) = -----------------2
(6-112)
X a ( ) = z ( )X a
(6-113)
+ + N () z z ( ) = N + ( ) z a
a
(6-114)
(1 + )
N + ( ) = ----------------2
(6-115)
(1 )
N - ( ) = ----------------2
(6-116)
where
z ( )
and
z ( )
The Hughes-Liu beam formulation uses four position vectors, in addition to , to locate the reference
+ and x - located on the
axis and define the initial fiber directions. Consider the two position vectors x a
a
top and bottom surfaces, respectively, at node a . Then
1
+ ( 1 + ) ]x +
x a = --- [ ( 1 )x a
a
2
(6-117)
( x +a x - a )
X a = --------------------------x +a x - a
(6-118)
+ = 1
--- ( 1 ) x +a x a
z a
2
(6-119)
1
+ xz a
= --- ( 1 + ) x a
a
2
(6-120)
1
+ (1 + )] x+
x a = --- [ ( 1 )x a
a
2
(6-121)
+ x- )
( x a
a
X a = ---------------------------+ xx a
a
(6-122)
+ = 1
+ x--- ( 1 ) x a
z a
a
2
(6-123)
1
+ xz a
= --- ( 1 + ) x a
a
2
(6-124)
where
is the Euclidean norm. The reference surface may be located at the midsurface of the beam or
offset at the outer surfaces. This capability is useful in several practical situations involving contact
surfaces, connection of beam elements to solid elements, and offsetting elements such as for beam
stiffeners in stiffened shells. The reference surfaces are located within the beam element by specifying
Main Index
the value of the parameters and , (see lower portion of Figure 6-7). When these parameters take on
the values 1 or +1 , the reference axis is located on the outer surfaces of the beam. If they are set to zero,
the reference axis is at the center.
The same parametric representation used to describe the geometry of the beam elements is used to
interpolate the beam element displacements; i.e., an isoparametric representation. Again, the
displacements are separated into the reference axis displacements and rotations associated with the
fiber directions:
u ( , , ) = u ( ) + U ( , , ) = u ( ) + U ( , ) + U ( , )
(6-125)
u ( ) = N a ( )u a
(6-126)
U ( , ) = N a ( ) U a ( )
(6-127)
U ( , ) = N a ( )U a ( )
(6-128)
U a ( ) = z a ( )U a
(6-129)
U a ( ) = z a ( )U a
(6-130)
where u is the displacement of a generic point, u is the displacement of a point on the reference surface,
and U is the fiber displacement rotations. The motion of the fibers can be interpreted as either
displacements or rotations as will be discussed.
Hughes and Liu introduced the notation that follows, and the associated schematic shown in Figure 6-8,
to describe the current deformed configuration with respect to the reference configuration:
y = y+Y
(6-131)
y = x+u
(6-132)
ya = xa + ua
(6-133)
Y = X+U
(6-134)
Ya = Xa + Ua
(6-135)
Y a = X a + U a
(6-136)
Y a = X a + U a
(6-137)
In the above relations, and in Figure 6-8, the x quantities refer to the reference configuration, the y
quantities refer to the updated (deformed) configuration and the u quantities are the displacements. The
notation consistently uses a superscript bar ( ) to indicate reference surface quantities, a superscript caret
( )
to indicate unit vector quantities, lower case letter for translational displacements, and upper case
letters for fiber displacements. Thus to update to the deformed configuration, two vector quantities are
needed: the reference surface displacement u and the associated nodal fiber displacement U . The nodal
fiber displacements are defined in the fiber coordinate system, described in the next subsection.
Main Index
u
Parallel Construction
Reference axis in
undeformed geometry
y
u
Figure 6-8
y
Deformed Configuration
Reference Surface
U
1
U
2
U
3
0
Y 3 Y 2
Y 3 0
Y 1
Y 2 Y 1 0
U
1
U
2
U
3
0 Y 3 Y 2
Y 3 0 Y 1
Y 2 Y 1 0
= h
= h
(6-138)
(6-139)
Equations (6-138) and (6-139) are used to transform the incremental fiber tip displacements to rotational
increments in the equations of motion. The second-order accurate rotational update formulation due to
Hughes and Winget [1980] is used to update the fiber vectors:
Main Index
n+1
n
Y i
= R i j ( )Y j
(6-140)
n
n+1
Y i
= R i j ( )Y i
(6-141)
then
n+1 n
U a = Y a Y a
(6-142)
n+1 n
U a = Y a Y a
(6-143)
where
( 2 ik + S i k ) S j k
R ij ( ) = i j + --------------------------------------------2D
(6-144)
S i j = e ikj k
(6-145)
1
2
2
2
2D = 2 + --- ( 1 + 2 + 3 )
2
(6-146)
Here
i j
e ikj
y2 y 1
e 1 = ---------------------y2 y 1
(6-147)
Y 1 + Y 2
e 2 = ----------------------------
Y 1 + Y 2
(6-148)
(6-149)
(6-150)
is defined. This coordinate system rigidly rotates with the deformations of the element.
The transformation of vectors from the global to the local coordinate system can now be defined in terms
of the basis vectors as
A =
Main Index
Ax
Ay
Az
e 1x
e 2x
e 3x
e 1y
e 2y
e 3y
e 1z
e 2z
e 3z
Ax
Ay = [ q ] { A }
Az
(6-151)
where e ix, e iy, e iz are the global components of the local coordinate unit vectors,
coordinates, and A is the same vector in the global coordinate system.
(6-152)
where u i are the incremental displacements and y j are the deformed coordinates. The incremental strain
and spin tensors are defined as the symmetric and skew-symmetric parts, respectively, of G i j :
1
i j = --- ( G ij + G ji )
2
(6-153)
1
ij = --- ( G i j G j i )
2
(6-154)
The incremental spin tensor ij is used as an approximation to the rotational contribution of the
Jaumann rate of the stress tensor. Here the Jaumann rate update is approximated as
n
i j = inj + inp pj + jp
pi
(6-155)
where the superscripts on the stress tensor refer to the updated ( n + 1 ) and reference ( n ) configurations.
This update of the stress tensor is applied before the constitutive evaluation, and the stress and strain are
stored in the global coordinate system.
Stress Update
To evaluate the constitutive relation, the stresses and strain increments are rotated from the global to the
local coordinate system using the transformation defined previously in (6-151).
ln
i j = q ik kn q j n
(6-156)
i j = q i k kn q jn
(6-157)
where the superscript l indicates components in the local coordinate system. The stress is
incrementally updated:
n+1
l
i j
Main Index
l
ij
1
n + --2
l
i j
(6-158)
i j
n+1
= q ki kn
(6-159)
q nj
fa
Ba d
T
(6-160)
where f ain t are the internal forces at node a and B a is the strain-displacement matrix in the global
coordinate system associated with the displacements at node a . The B matrix relates six global strain
components to eighteen incremental displacements [three translational displacements per node and the
six incremental fiber tip displacements of (6-142)]. It is convenient to partition the B matrix:
B = [ B 1, B 2 ]
(6-161)
Each B a sub matrix is further partitioned into a portion due to strain and spin with the following sub
matrix definitions:
Ba =
B1
B4
0
0
B7
B2
B3
B2
B1
B3
B3
B5
B8
B6
B9
B5
B4
B8
B7
B2
B6
B5
B9
B8
B1
B6
B4
B9
B7
(6-162)
where
Bi =
N a
N a, i = ---------y i
for i = 1,2,3
( N a z a )
( N aa ) ,( i 3 ) = ----------------------y i 3
for i = 4,5,6
( N a z a )
( N a z a ) ,( i 6 ) = ----------------------y i 6
for i = 7,8,9
Main Index
(6-163)
(6-164)
is assembled into the global right hand side internal force vector.
(6-138)):
T =
I
0
0
h
where
Main Index
is a
(6-165)
33
identity matrix.
Co-rotational Coordinates
The midsurface of the quadrilateral shell element, or reference surface, is defined by the location of the
elements four corner nodes. An embedded element coordinate system (see Figure 6-9) that deforms with
the element is defined in terms of these nodal coordinates. Then the procedure for constructing
the co-rotational coordinate system begins by calculating a unit vector normal to the main diagonal of
the element:
s3
e 3 = ---------s3
s3
(6-166)
2
2
2
s 31
+ s 32
+ s 33
(6-167)
s 3 = r 31 r 42
Main Index
(6-168)
( )
s3
3
4
e
r42
r31
2
s1
1
e
Figure 6-9
r21
x
2
It is desired to establish the local x axis x approximately along the element edge between nodes 1 and 2.
This definition is convenient for interpreting the element stresses, which are defined in the local x y
coordinate system. The procedure for constructing this unit vector is to define a vector s 1 that is nearly
parallel to the vector r 21 .
s 1 = r 21 ( r 21 e 3 ) e 3
(6-169)
s1
e 1 = ---------s1
(6-170)
The remaining unit vector is obtained from the vector cross product
e 2 = e 3 e 1
(6-171)
If the four nodes of the element are coplanar, then the unit vectors
of the shell and
e 3
and
e 2
is in the fiber direction. As the element deforms, an angle may develop between the
e 1
e 3 .
where f is the unit vector in the fiber direction and the magnitude of depends on the magnitude of the
strains. According to Belytschko et al., for most engineering applications, acceptable values of are on
the order of 10-2 and if the condition presented in equation (6-172) is met, then the difference between
the rotation of the co-rotational coordinates e and the material rotation should be small.
Main Index
The global components of this co-rotational triad define a transformation matrix between the global and
local element coordinate systems. This transformation operates on vectors with global components
A = ( A x, A y, A z )
Ax
{ A } = Ay =
Az
e 1x e 2x e 3x
e 1y e 2y e 3y
e 1z e 2z e 3z
Ax
Ay
Az
A = ( A x, A y, A z ) ,
= [ ] { A } = [ q ]T { A }
(6-173)
where e ix, e iy, e iz are the global components of the element coordinate unit vectors. The inverse
transformation is defined by the matrix transpose; i.e.,
{A} = []T{A}
(6-174)
(6-175)
where v m is the velocity of the mid-surface, is the angular velocity vector, and z is the distance along
the fiber direction (thickness) of the shell element. The corresponding co-rotational components of the
velocity strain (rate of deformation) are given by
1 i j
- + --------
d i j = --- ------
2 x j x i
(6-176)
Substitution of equation (6-175) into the above yields the following velocity-strain relations:
Main Index
v x
- + z --------y
d x = --------x
x
(6-177)
y x
d y = --------- z -------
y
y
(6-178)
x y y x
y
x
y
x
(6-179)
m
z
2d yz = --------- x
y
(6-180)
m
z
2d xz = ---------+ y
x
(6-181)
The above velocity-strain relations need to be evaluated at the quadrature points within the shell.
Standard bilinear nodal interpolation is used to define the mid-surface velocity, angular velocity, and the
elements coordinates (isoparametric representation). These interpolations relations are given by
m = N I ( , ) I
(6-182)
m = N I ( , ) I
(6-183)
x m = N I ( , )x I
(6-184)
where the subscript I is summed over all the nodes of the element and the nodal velocities are
obtained by differentiating the nodal coordinates with respect to time, i.e., I = x I . The bilinear
shape functions are
1
N 1 = --- ( 1 ) ( 1 )
4
(6-185)
1
N 2 = --- ( 1 + ) ( 1 )
4
(6-186)
1
N 3 = --- ( 1 + ) ( 1 + )
4
(6-187)
1
N 4 = --- ( 1 ) ( 1 + )
4
(6-188)
The velocity-strains at the center of the element (i.e., at = 0 , and = 0 ) are obtained by substitution
of the above relations into the previously defined velocity-strain displacement relations, equations
(6-177) through (6-181). After some algebra, this yields
Main Index
d x = B 1I xI + z B 1I yI
(6-189)
d y = B 2I yI z B 2I xI
(6-190)
2d xy = B 2I xI + B 1I yI + z ( B 2I yI B 1 I xI )
(6-191)
2d xz = B 1I zI + N I yI
(6-192)
2d yz = B 2I zI N I xI
(6-193)
where
N I
B 1I = -------x
(6-194)
N I
B 2I = -------y
(6-195)
B aI
= 0,
and
dz
R = z dz
m
(6-196)
(6-197)
where the superscript, R , indicates a resultant force or moment, and the Greek subscripts emphasize the
limited range of the indices for plane stress plasticity.
The above element midplane force and moment resultants are related to the local nodal forces and
moments by invoking the principle of virtual power and integrating with a one-point quadrature. The
relations obtained in this manner are
Main Index
R
R
f xI = A B 1I f xx + B 2I f xy
(6-198)
R
R
f yI = A B 2I f yy + B 1I f xy
(6-199)
R
R
f zI = A B 1I f xz + B 2I f yz
(6-200)
R
R R
m
xI = A B 2I m yy + B 1I m xy --- f yz
4
(6-201)
R
R R
m
yI = A B 1I m xx + B 2I m xy --- f xz
4
(6-202)
= 0
m
zI
(6-203)
where A is the area of the element, and is the shear factor from the Mindlin theory. In the BelytschkoLin-Tsay formulation, is used as a penalty parameter to enforce the Kirchhoff normality condition as
the shell becomes thin.
The above local nodal forces and moments are then transformed to the global coordinate system using
the transformation relations given previously as equation (6-173). The global nodal forces and moments
are then appropriately summed over all the nodes and the global equations of motion are solved for the
next increment in nodal accelerations.
(6-204)
where
h =
+1
1
+1
1
(6-205)
is the basis vector that generates the deformation mode that is neglected by one-point quadrature. In
equation (6-204) and the reminder of this subsection, the Greek subscripts have a range of 2; e.g.,
x aI = ( x 1I, x 2I ) = ( x I, y I ) .
The hourglass shape vector then operates on the generalized displacements, in a manner similar to
equations (6-189) through (6-193), to produce the generalized hourglass strain rates
q B = I I
(6-206)
B
q = I zI
(6-207)
q M = I I
(6-208)
where the superscripts B and M denote bending and membrane modes, respectively. The corresponding
hourglass stress rates are then given by
Main Index
r E t3 A
B
B
Q = ------------------ B I B I q
192
(6-209)
r w Gt 3 A
B
B
Q = ----------------------- B I B I q
3
3
12
(6-210)
rm E t A
M
Q = ---------------- B I B I q M
8
(6-211)
r , r w ,
and
rm
Finally, the hourglass stresses, which are updated from the stress rates in the usual way; i.e.,
Qn + 1 = Qn + t Q
(6-212)
(6-213)
f H = Q B
I 3
3I
(6-214)
f H = Q M
I
I
(6-215)
where the superscript H emphasizes that these are internal force contributions from the hourglass
deformations. These hourglass forces are added directly to the previously determined local internal forces
due to deformations equations (6-198) through (6-203). These force vectors are orthogonalized with
respect to rigid body motion.
0 s
p = p + p
(6-216)
where the stabilization strain field, which is obtained from the assumed strain fields of Pian and Sumihara
[1984], is given in terms of the hourglass velocity field as
s
p = W m q m + zW b q b
Main Index
(6-217)
Here,
and
Wm
Wb
Wm =
f ( , )
f ( , )
f 2 ( , )
f ( , )
f 3 ( , )
f 6 ( , )
p1
4p
(6-218)
5p
Wb =
play the role of stabilization strain velocity operators for membrane and bending:
f 4 ( , )
f 1 ( , )
f 5 ( , )
f 2 ( , )
f 6 ( , )
f 3 ( , )
(6-219)
where the terms f i ( , ) i = 1, 2, , 6 , are rather complicated and the reader is referred to the reference
[Englemann and Whirley, 1991].
To obtain the transverse shear assumed strain field, the procedure given in [Bathe and Dvorkin, 1984] is
used. The transverse shear strain field can again be decomposed into the one point strain field plus the
stabilization field:
0 s
s = s + s
(6-220)
(6-221)
Ws =
2
s
g
4
3
s
g
2
3
s
g
1
Ws
is given by
f ( , ) g g g g
1
s
f 2 ( ,
1
s
g
4
s
1
f ( , )
and
(6-222)
gs
In their formulation, the hourglass forces are related to the hourglass velocity field through an
incremental hourglass constitutive equation derived from an additive decomposition of the stress into a
one-point stress, plus a stabilization stress. The integration of the stabilization stress gives a resultant
constitutive equation relating hourglass forces to hourglass velocities.
The in-plane and transverse stabilization stresses are updated according to:
ss, n + 1 = ss, n + t c s C s ss
(6-223)
where the tangent matrix is the product of a matrix C , which is constant within the shell domain, and a
scalar c that is constant in the plane but may vary through the thickness.
Main Index
The stabilization stresses can now be used to obtain the hourglass forces:
Qm =
Qb =
Qs =
Main Index
h--T
2
W m ps dA dz
h
--2A
h--T
2
W b ps dA dz
h
--2 A
h--T
2
W s ss dA dz
h
--2A
(6-224)
Displacement-time History
30
29
Y Displacement (104)
24
L
= 12
b
= 1.1
t
= .32
twist = 90 degrees
E
= 29 000 000
= .22
Belystchkno-Tsay
20
16
Hughes-Liu
Belytschko-Wong-Chiang
12
8
4
0
Figure 6-10
10
time (ms)
15
19
The Twisted Beam Problem Fails with the Belytschko-Tsay Shell Element
In order to include warpage in the formulation it is convenient to define nodal fiber vectors as shown in
Figure 6-11. The geometry is interpolated over the surface of the shell from:
x = x m + p = ( x I + p I )N I ( , )
where:
Main Index
h
= -----2
and
(6-225)
p3
p1
p2
h
Figure 6-11
p 1, p 2 ,
and
p3
where
is the Thickness
(6-226)
d yy = b yI v yI + ( b yI v yI + b yI p yI )
(6-227)
c
c
1
d xy = --- b xI v yI + b yI v xI + ( b xI v yI + b xI p yI + b yI v xI + b yI p xI )
2
(6-228)
d xx = b xI v xI + ( b xI v xI + b xI p xI )
bc
yI
bi I
p y 2 p y 4
p y 3 p y 1
p y 4 p y 2
p y 1 p y 3
p x 2 p x 4
p x 3 p x 1
p x 4 p x 2
p x 1 p x 3
(6-229)
For a flat geometry the normal vectors are identical and no coupling can occur. Two methods are used by
c
Belytschko for computing b i I and the reader is referred to his papers for the details. Both methods have
been tested and comparable results were obtained.
The transverse shear strain components are given as
xz = N I ( , ) y I
(6-230)
yz = N I ( , ) x I
(6-231)
x I = ( e n e x ) n + ( e n e x ) n
Main Index
(6-232)
y I = ( e n e y ) n + ( e n e y ) n
The rotation
(6-233)
I
I
1 I
1-
n = --- ( nI + nJ ) + -----( zJ zJ )
2
L IJ
(6-234)
where the subscript n refers to the normal component of side I as seen in Figure 6-12 and L IJ is the length
of side IJ .
y
K
r
LK
en
e
y
en
i
J
K
Figure 6-12
Main Index
e
X
Co-rotational Coordinates
The mid-surface of the triangular shell element, or reference surface, is defined by the location of the
elements three nodes. An embedded element coordinate system (see Figure 6-13) that deforms with the
element is defined in terms of these nodal coordinates. The procedure for constructing the co-rotational
coordinate system is simpler than the corresponding procedure for the quadrilateral, because the three
nodes of the triangular element are guaranteed coplanar.
z
y
3
e 3
e 2
e 1
Figure 6-13
Main Index
x
2
C0
Shell Element
The local x-axis, x , is directed from node 1 to 2. The elements normal axis, z , is defined by the vector
cross product of a vector along x with a vector constructed from node 1 to node 3. The local y-axis, y ,
is defined by a unit vector cross product of e 3 with e 1 , which are the unit vectors in the z directions,
respectively. As in the case of the quadrilateral element, this triad of co-rotational unit vectors defines
a transformation between the global and local element coordinate systems (see equations (6-173)
and (6-174)).
Velocity-Strain Relations
As in the Belytschko-Lin-Tsay quadrilateral shell element, the displacement of any point in the shell is
partitioned into a mid-surface displacement (nodal translations) and a displacement associated with
rotations of the elements fibers (nodal rotations). The Kennedy-Belytschko-Lin triangular shell element
also uses the Mindlin [Mindlin 1951] theory of plates and shells to partition the velocity of any point in
the shell (recall equation (6-175)):
= v m z e 3
(6-235)
where m is the velocity of the mid-surface, is the angular velocity vector, and z is the distance along
the fiber direction (thickness) of the shell element. The corresponding co-rotational components of the
velocity strain (rate of deformation) were given previously in equations (6-189) through (6-193).
Standard linear nodal interpolation is used to define the midsurface velocity, angular velocity, and the
elements coordinates (isoparametric representation). These interpolation functions are the area
coordinates used in triangular element formulations. Substitution of the nodally interpolated velocity
fields into the velocity-strain relations (see Belytschko et al., for details), leads to strain rate-velocity
relations of the form
d = B v
where
(6-236)
d
are the velocity strains (strain rates), the elements of B are derivatives of the nodal interpolation
d x
d y
2 d xy
Main Index
1
= ---------x 2 y 3
y 3
y 3
0
x 3 x 2
x 3 x 2
y
0
x
0
x
0
3
y 3
0
x 2
x 2
x1
y1
x2
y2
x3
y3
(6-237)
or
M
d = B M
(6-238)
2 xy
1
---------=
x x 2
x 2 y 3 3
y 3
y 3
0
x 3 x 2
0
x
3
y
y 3
0
x
0
x
0
x 2
x1
y1
x2
y2
x3
y3
(6-239)
or
def
M = B M
(6-240)
The local element velocity strains are then obtained by combining the above two relations:
dx
d y
2d xy
dx
d y
2d xy
2 xy
M
= d z
(6-241)
2d yz
1 = ------------6 x 2 y 3
y 3
y 3 ( 2x 2 + x 3 )
y 3 ( x 2 2 x 2 )
2
2
x 2 x 3
y 32
2
y 3 ( x 2 + x 3 )
y 3 ( 3 x 2 x 3 )
x 3 ( x 3 2 x 2 )
x 2 y 3
3x 2 y 3
x 2 ( 2x 3 x 2 )
(6-242)
Main Index
x1
y1
x2
y2
x3
y3
def
or
S
def
d = BS
(6-243)
All of the above velocity-strain relations have been simplified by using one-point quadrature.
In the above relations, the angular velocities
def
obtained by subtracting the portion of the angular velocity due to rigid body rotation; i.e.,
def
ri g
(6-244)
The two components of the rigid body angular velocity are given by
z1 z2
rig
y = ---------------------x 2
(6-245)
( z3 z1 )x 2 ( z2 z1 )x 3
xrig = ------------------------------------------------------------------------x 2 y 3
(6-246)
The first of the above two relations is obtained by considering the angular velocity of the local x-axis
about the local y-axis. Referring to Figure 6-14, by construction nodes 1 and 2 lie on the local x-axis and
the distance between the nodes is x 2 ; i.e., the x distance from node 2 to the local coordinate origin at
node 1. Thus, the difference in the nodal z velocities divided by the distance between the nodes is an
average measure of the rigid body rotation rate about the local y-axis.
z
y
3
z
y
x
1
Figure 6-14
Main Index
Element Configurations with Node 3 Aligned with Node 1 (left) and Node 3
Aligned with Node 2 (right)
The second relation is conceptually identical, but is implemented in a slightly different manner due to the
arbitrary location of node 3 in the local coordinate system. Consider the two local element configurations
shown in Figure 6-14. For the left-most configuration, where node 3 is the local y-axis, the rigid body
rotation rate about the local x-axis is given by
rig
z3 z1
x lef t = ---------------------y 3
(6-247)
and for the rightmost configuration the same rotation rate is given by
rig
z3 z2
x ri ght = ---------------------y 3
(6-248)
Although both of these relations yield the average rigid body rotation rate, the selection of the correct
relation depends on the configuration of the element; i.e., on the location of node 3. Since every element
in the mesh could have a configuration that is different in general from either of the two configurations
shown in Figure 6-14, a more robust relation is needed to determine the average rigid body rotation rate
about the local x-axis. In most typical grids, node 3 will be located somewhere between the two
configurations shown in Figure 6-14. Thus, a linear interpolation between these two rigid body rotation
rates was devised using the distance x 3 as the interpolant:
x 3 rig
rig
rig
x----3-
x = x left 1 ---x + x right x
2
2
(6-249)
Substitution of equations (6-247) and (6-248) into equation (6-249) and simplifying produces the relations
given previously as equation (6-246).
dz
(6-250)
R = z dz
m
(6-251)
where the superscript R indicates a resultant force or moment and the Greek subscripts emphasize the
limited range of the indices for plane stress plasticity.
The above element midplane force and moment resultant are related to the local nodal forces and
moments by invoking the principle of virtual power and performing a one-point quadrature. The relations
obtained in this manner are
Main Index
f x1
f y1
f x2
f y2
f x3
f y3
T
= A BM
R
f xx
R
f yy
R
f xy
m
x1
R
m
y1
m xx
m x2
T
R
= AB M m
yy
m
y2
R
m
xy
m
x3
m
y3
where
(6-252)
T
+ AB S
R
f xz
R
f yz
(6-253)
( 2 A = x 2 y 3 ) .
( f z3, f z2, f z 1 ) ,
+m
+m
+ y f = 0
m
x1
x2
x3
3 z3
(6-254)
+m
+m
x f x f = 0
m
y1
y2
y3
3 z3
2 z2
(6-255)
(6-256)
z1
+f
z2
+f
z3
= 0
which represent moment equilibrium about the local x-axis, moment equilibrium about the local y-axis,
and force equilibrium in the local z-direction, respectively.
Main Index
Element Coordinates
Figure 6-15a shows the element coordinate system, ( x , y , z ) originating at Node 1, for the Marchertas-
Belytschko triangular shell. The element coordinate system is associated with a triad of unit vectors
( e 1, e 2, e 3 ) the components of which form a transformation matrix between the global and local coordinate
systems for vector quantities. The nodal or body coordinate system unit vectors b 1, b 2, b 3 are defined at
each node and are used to define the rotational deformations in the element, see Co-rotational Technique.
The unit normal to the shell element
e 3 = l 21 l 31
e3
where l 21 and l 31 are unit vectors originating at Node 1 and pointing towards Nodes 2 and 3, respectively
(see Figure 6-15b).
Main Index
e2
z
e3
e1
1
b2
b3
2
b1
l 31
e3
1
l 21
2
(b) Construction of Element Coordinates
Figure 6-15
Main Index
Next a unit vector, g , see Figure 6-15b, is assumed to be in the plane of the triangular element with its
origin at Node 1 and forming an angle with the element side between Nodes 1 and 2, i.e., the vector
l 21 . The direction cosines of this unit vector are represented by the symbols ( g x, g y, g z ) . Since g is the unit
vector, its direction cosines will satisfy the equation:
(6-258)
g x2 + g y2 + g z2 = 1
Also, since
and
e3
are orthogonal unit vectors, their vector dot product must satisfy the equation
(6-259)
e 3x g x + e 3y g y + e 3z g z = 0
where
and
l 21
l 21 .
Solving this system of three simultaneous equation; i.e., equations (6-258), (6-259), and (6-260), for the
direction cosines of the unit vector g yields
g x = l 21x cos + ( e 3y l 21z e 3z l 21y ) sin
g y = l 21y cos + ( e 3z l 21x e 3x l 21z ) sin
(6-261)
These equations provide the direction cosines for any vector in the plane of the triangular element that is
oriented at an angle from the element side between Nodes 1 and 2. Thus the unit vector components
of e 1 , and e 2 are obtained by setting = 2 and = ( + ) 2 in (6-261), respectively. The angle
is obtained from the vector dot product of the unit vectors l 21 and l 31 ,
cos = l 21 l 31
(6-262)
Displacement Interpolation
As with the other large displacement and small deformation co-rotational element formulations, the nodal
displacements are separated into rigid body and deformation displacements,
u = u ri gi d + u def
(6-263)
where the rigid body displacements are defined by the motion of the local element coordinate system,
i.e., the co-rotational coordinates, and the deformation displacement are defined with respect to the corotational coordinates. The deformation displacement are defined by
Main Index
def
u x
u y
---
u z
x
=
m
y --
---
f
z
(6-264)
where
{ } T = { 12 23 31 }
(6-265)
(6-266)
are the local nodal rotation with respect to the co-rotational coordinates.
m
x , y
The matrices
and z are the membrane and flexural interpolation functions, respectively. The
elements membrane deformation is defined in terms of the edge elongations. Marchertas and Belytschko
adapted this idea from Argyris et. al., [1964], where incremental displacements are used, by modifying
the relations for total displacements,
2
2 ( x j i u j ix + y ji u ji y + z j i u j iz ) + u j ix + u j iy + u j iz
i j = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
l i j + l ij
where
x ji = x j x i ,
(6-267)
etc.
f
The non-conforming shape functions used for interpolating the flexural deformations, z were originally
derived by Bazeley, Cheung, Irons, and Zienkiewicz [1965], called the BCIZ element. Explicit
expressions for
are quite tedious and are not given here. The interested reader is referred to Appendix
e3 = T e3
where
and
(6-268)
are the current transformations between the global coordinate system and the element
(local) and body coordinate system, respectively. The vector e 30 is the original element unit normal
expressed in the body coordinate system. The vector cross product between this current-original unit
normal and the current unit normal,
0
e3 e3 = x e 1 + y e 2
Main Index
(6-269)
x = e 30y
(6-270)
0
y = e 3x
(6-271)
Strain-Displacement Relations
Marchertas-Belytschko impose the usual Kirchhoff assumptions that normals to the midplane of the
element remain straight and normal, to obtain
2 uz
u x
e xx = -------- z ---------x
x 2
(6-272)
2 uz
u
e yy = --------y z ---------y
y 2
(6-273)
2 uz
u x u y
2e xy = -------- + -------- 2z -----------y
x
x y
(6-274)
where it is understood that all quantities refer to the local element coordinate system.
Substitution of equation (6-264) into the above strain-displacement relations yields
f
{ } = [Em] { } z [E ] { }
(6-275)
where
{ } t = { xx, yy, 2 xy }
(6-276)
with
m
xi
---------x
[Em] =
m
yi
---------y
m
m
yi
xi
---------+ ---------y
x
and
Main Index
(6-277)
2 zi
-----------x 2
f
2 zi
------------y 2
[E ] =
(6-278)
2 zi
2 ------------x y
[ E m ] t dV
(6-279)
where
T
f = { f 12 f 23 f 31}
(6-280)
T = { xx yy xy }
(6-281)
where the side forces and stresses are understood to all be in the local convected coordinate system.
Similarly, the local moments are given by
T = z [ E f] t dv
m
(6-282)
where
m
T = {m
m
1x 1y m 2x m 2y m 3x m 3y }
(6-283)
The through-the-thickness integration portions of the above local force and moment integrals are usually
performed with a 3- or 5-point trapezoidal integration. A three-point in-plane integration is also used; it
is, in part, this three-point in-plane integration that increases the operation count for this element over the
C 0 shell, which used one-point inplane integration with hourglass stabilization.
The remaining transverse nodal forces are obtained from element equilibrium considerations. Moment
equilibrium requires
f 2z
f 3z
1- x 3 y 3
= -----2
A x y
2
2
where
(6-284)
f 1z = f 2z f 3z
Main Index
+m
+m
m
1x
2x
3x
+m
+m
m
1y
2y
3y
(6-285)
The corresponding global components of the nodal forces are obtained from the following transformation
fi x
fi y
f iz
x + u ij x
f ij i j
---=
y + u ij y
l ij i j
z ij + u i jz
x ik + u i kx
f ik
---+
l y ik + u i ky
ik
z i k + u ikz
e3 x
+
f
i z e3 y
e 3z
(6-286)
Finally, the local moments are transformed to the body coordinates using the relation
m ix
m iy
mi z
Main Index
T
=
m
ix
m
iy
m
iz
(6-287)
element formulation. This compatibility allows many of the efficient and effective techniques
developed for brick elements to be used with this shell element;
It includes finite transverse shear strains;
A through-the-thickness thinning option (see [Hughes and Carnoy 1981]) is also available when
Geometry
The Hughes-Liu shell element is based on a degeneration of the standard 8-node brick element
formulation, an approach originated by Ahmad et al. [1970]. Recall from the discussion of the solid
elements the isoparametric mapping of the bi-unit cube:
x ( , , ) = N a ( , , )x a
(6-288)
( 1 + a ) ( 1 + a ) ( 1 + a )
N a ( , , ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------8
(6-289)
where x is an arbitrary point in the element, ( , , ) are the parametric coordinates, x a are the global
nodal coordinates of node a , and N a are the element shape functions evaluated at node a , i.e., ( a, a, a )
are ( , , ) evaluated at node a .
In the shell geometry, planes of constant will define the lamina or layers of the shell and fibers are
defined by through-the-thickness lines when both and are constant (usually only defined at the nodes
and thus referred to as nodal fibers). To degenerate the 8-node brick geometry into the 4-node shell
geometry, the nodal pairs in the direction (through the shell thickness) are combined into a single node,
for the translation degrees of freedom, and an inextensible nodal fiber for the rotational degrees of
freedom. Figure 6-16 shows a schematic of the bi-unit cube and the shell element.
The mapping of the bi-unit cube into the shell element is separated into two parts
x ( , , ) = x ( , ) + X ( , , )
Main Index
(6-290)
where x denotes a position vector to a point on the reference surface of the shell and X is a position
vector, based at point x on the reference, that defines the fiber direction through that point. In particular,
if we consider one of the four nodes which define the reference surface, then
x ( , ) = N a ( , )x a
(6-291)
X ( , , ) = N a ( , )X a ( )
(6-292)
Bi-unit Cube
Shell Element
Nodal Fiber
z+
Top Surface
+1
x+
x
0
Reference Surface
x
-1
Bottom Surface
Figure 6-16
Main Index
Mapping of the Bi-unit Cube into the Hughes-Liu Shell Element and Nodal
Fiber Nomenclature
With this description, arbitrary points on the reference surface x are interpolated by the two-dimensional
shape function N ( , ) operating on the global position of the four shell nodes that define the reference
surfaces; i.e., x a . Points off the reference surface are further interpolated by using a one-dimensional
shape function along the fiber direction, i.e., X a ( ) , where
X a ( ) = z a ( )X a
+
(6-293)
-
z a ( ) = N + ( )z a + N - ( ) z a
(6-294)
(1 + )
N + ( ) = ----------------2
(6-295)
(1 )
N - ( ) = ----------------2
(6-296)
As shown in the lower portion of Figure 6-16, X a is a unit vector in the fiber direction and z ( ) is a
thickness function. (Thickness changes (see [Hughes and Carnoy 1981]) are accounted for by explicitly
adjusting the fiber lengths at the completion of a time step based on the amount of straining in the fiber
direction. Updates of the fiber lengths always lag one time step behind other kinematical quantities.)
The reference surface may be located at the mid-surface of the shell or at either of the shells outer
surfaces. This capability is useful in several practical situations involving contact surfaces, connection of
shell elements to solid elements, and offsetting elements such as stiffeners in stiffened shells. The
reference surface is located within the shell element by specifying the value of the parameter (see lower
portion of Figure 6-16). When = 1, 0, +1 , the reference surface is located at the bottom, middle, and
top surface of the shell, respectively.
The Hughes-Liu formulation uses two position vectors, in addition to , to locate the reference surface
and define the initial fiber direction. The two position vectors x a+ and x a- are located on the top and bottom
surfaces, respectively, at node a . From these data the following are obtained:
1
x a = --- [ ( 1 ) x a- + ( 1 + ) ] x a+
2
(6-297)
( x a+ x a- )
X a = ----------------------ha
(6-298)
1
z a+ = --- ( 1 )h a
2
(6-299)
1
z a- = --- ( 1 + )h a
2
(6-300)
ha =
where
Main Index
x a+ x a.
(6-301)
Kinematics
The same parametric representation used to describe the geometry of the shell element (i.e., reference
surface and fiber vector interpolation) are used to interpolate the shell element displacement; i.e., an
isoparametric representation. Again, the displacements are separated into the reference surface
displacements and rotations associated with the fiber direction:
u ( , , ) = u ( , ) + U ( , , )
(6-302)
u ( , ) = N a ( , )u a
(6-303)
U ( , , ) = N a ( , )U a ( )
(6-304)
Ua ( ) = za ( ) Ua
(6-305)
where u is the displacement of a generic point; u is the displacement of a point on the reference surface,
and U is the fiber displacement rotations; the motion of the fibers can be interpreted as either
displacements or rotations as will be discussed.
Hughes and Liu introduce the notation that follows, and the associated schematic shown in Figure 6-17,
to describe the current deformed configuration with respect to the reference configuration:
y = y+Y
(6-306)
y = x+u
(6-307)
ya = xa + ua
(6-308)
Y = X+U
(6-309)
Ya = Xa + Ua
(6-310)
Ya = Xa + Ua
(6-311)
u
X
Parallel Construction
Initial Configuration
Reference Surface
y
Y
y
Deformed Configuration
Reference Surface
Figure 6-17
Main Index
In the above relations, and in Figure 6-17, the x quantities refer to the reference configuration, the y
quantities refer to the updated (deformed) configuration and the u quantities are the displacements. The
notation consistently uses a superscript bar ( ) to indicate reference surface quantities, a superscript caret
( )
to indicate unit vector quantities, lower case letters for translational displacements, and upper case
letters indicating fiber displacements. To update to the deformed configuration, two vector quantities are
needed: the reference surface displacement u and the associated nodal fiber displacement U . The nodal
fiber displacements are defined in the fiber coordinate system, described in the next subsection.
( b 1 , b2 , b3 )
comprising the
orthonormal fiber basis in the reference configuration (where the fiber unit vector is now
( b1 , b 2 , b 3 )
Y = b3
) and
indicating the incrementally updated current configuration of the fiber vectors. The reference
and
2 ,
equations of motion, to the fiber vectors ( b 1 and b 2 ) as shown in Figure 6-18. The linearized relationship
between the components of
f f f
U1 , U2 , U3
given by
f
U
1
f
U
2
U
3
1
0
0
0
1
0
(6-312)
Although the above Hughes-Liu relation for updating the fiber vector enables a reduction in the number
of nodal degrees of freedom from six to five, it is not implemented in SOL 700 because it is not applicable
to beam elements.
Main Index
Fiber
b3
f
b 3 = Y
f
b1
b2
f
b2
b1
Figure 6-18
In SOL 700, three rotational increments are used, defined with reference to the global coordinate axes:
U
1
U
2
U
3
Y3
Y2
Y3
0
Y1
Y2
Y1
0
(6-313)
Equation (6-313) is adequate for updating the stiffness matrix, but for finite rotations the error is
significant. A more accurate second-order technique is used in SOL 700 for updating the unit
fiber vectors:
n
n+1
Yi
= R ij ( ) Y j
(6-314)
where
1 ( 2 ik + S i k ) S j k
R ij ( ) = i j + --- -------------------------------------------2
D
(6-315)
S i j = e ikj k
(6-316)
2
2
2
1
2D = 2 + --- ( 1 + 2 + 3 )
2
(6-317)
Here, i j is the Kronecker delta and e ij k is the permutation tensor. This rotational update is often referred
to as the Hughes-Winget formula [Hughes and Winget 1980]. An exact rotational update using Euler
angles or Euler parameters could easily be substituted in equation (6-314), but it is doubtful that the extra
effort would be justified.
Main Index
integration points; the analogy is that of lamina in a fibrous composite material. The orthonormal lamina
basis (Figure 6-19), with one direction e 3 normal to the lamina of the shell, is constructed at every
integration point in the shell.
= con
stant
co
ns
tan
t
e 3
e 2
e 1
Figure 6-19
The lamina basis is constructed by forming two unit vectors locally tangent to the lamina:
y ,
e 1 = -----------y ,
(6-318)
y ,
e 2 = ------------y ,
(6-319)
where, as before, y is the position vector in the current configuration. The normal to the lamina at the
integration point is constructed from the vector cross product of these local tangents:
e 3 = e 1 e 2
(6-320)
(6-321)
is defined, because
to
e 1
and
e 3 .
e 2 ,
although tangent to both the lamina and lines of constant , may not be normal
The transformation of vectors from the global to lamina coordinate system can now be defined in terms
of the lamina basis vectors as
A =
Main Index
Ax
Ay
Az
e 1x
e 2x
e 3x
e 1y
e 2y
e 3y
e 1z
e 2z
e 3z
Ax
Ay = [ q ] { A }
Az
(6-322)
where e ix, e iy, e iz are the global components of the lamina coordinate unit vectors;
lamina coordinates, and A is the same vector in the global coordinate system.
is a vector in the
(6-323)
where u i are the incremental displacements and y j are the deformed coordinates. The incremental
strain and spin tensors are defined as the symmetric and skew-symmetric parts, respectively, of G i j :
1
i j = --- ( G ij + G ji )
2
(6-324)
1
ij = --- ( G i j G j i )
2
(6-325)
The incremental spin tensor ij is used as an approximation to the rotational contribution of the
Jaumann rate of the stress tensor; SOL 700 implicit uses the more accurate Hughes-Winget
transformation matrix equation (6-314) with the incremental spin tensor for the rotational update. The
Jaumann rate update is approximated as:
n
inj + 1 = inj + inp pj + jp
pi
(6-326)
where the superscripts on the stress refer to the updated ( n + 1 ) and reference ( n ) configurations. The
Jaumann rate update of the stress tensor is applied in the global configuration before the constitutive
evaluation is performed. In the Hughes-Liu shell the stresses and history variables are stored in the global
coordinate system.
Stress Update
To evaluate the constitutive relation, the stresses and strain increments are rotated from the global to the
lamina coordinate system using the transformation defined previously in equation (6-322).
n+1
ilj
n+1
= q i k kn
q jn
n+12
ilj
n+12
= q i k kn
qj n
Main Index
(6-327)
(6-328)
ilj
n+12
n+1
= ijl
+ ijl
(6-329)
ij
n+1
= q ki kn
(6-330)
q nj
fa
T a Ba d
(6-331)
where f aint are the internal forces at node a , B a is the strain-displacement matrix in the lamina
coordinate system associated with the displacements at node a , and T a is the transformation matrix
relating the global and lamina components of the strain-displacement matrix. Because the B matrix
relates six strain components to twenty-four displacements (six degrees of freedom at four nodes), it is
convenient to partition the B matrix into four groups of six:
B = [ B 1, B 2, B 3, B 4 ]
Each
(6-332)
Ba
Ba =
Ba
(6-333)
Ba
Ba =
Ba =
Main Index
B1
B4
B2
B5
B2
B1
B5
B4
B3
B2
B6
B5
B3
B1
B6
B4
(6-334)
B2
B1
B5
B4
B3
B2
B6
B5
B3
B1
B6
B4
(6-335)
where
N a
N a ,i = ---------ly i
Bi =
( Na za )
( N a z a ), i 3 = ------------------l
y i 3
for i = 1, 2, 3
(6-336)
for i = 4, 5, 6
e.g.,
The superscript bar indicates the B s are evaluated at the center of the lamina
The strain-displacement matrix uses the B-Bar ( B ) approach advocated by Hughes
y l = qy .
( 0, 0, ) .
[1980]. In the SOL 700 implementations, this entails replacing certain rows of the B matrix and
the strain increments with their counterparts evaluated at the center of the element. In particular,
the strain-displacement matrix is modified to produce constant shear and spin increments
throughout the lamina.
The resulting B -matrix is a 8 x 24 matrix. Although there are six strain and three rotations
increments, the B -matrix has been modified to account for the fact that
integration of equation (6-331).
Main Index
33
However, these disadvantages can be more than offset by the increased reliability and accuracy.
Figure 6-20
There are two version of the Hughes-Liu shell with selectively reduced integration. The first closely
follows the intent of the original paper, and therefore no assumptions are made to reduce costs, which are
outlined in operation counts in Table 6-4. This is activated by using DYSHELLFORM = 6. These
operation counts can be compared with those in Table 6-5 for the Hughes-Liu shell with uniformly
reduced integration. The second formulation, which reduces the number of operation by more than a
factor of two, is referred to as the co-rotational Hughes-Liu shell. This is activated by using
DYSHELLFORM = 7. This shell is considerably cheaper due to the following simplifications:
Strains rates are not centered. The strain displacement matrix is only computed at time n + 1
Main Index
n+12
The stresses are stored in the local shell system following the Belytschko-Tsay shell.
The transformations of the stresses between the local and global coordinate systems are
thus avoided.
The Jaumann rate rotation is not performed, thereby avoiding even more computations. This
does not necessarily preclude the use of the shell in large deformations.
To study the effects of these simplifying assumptions, we can compare results with those obtained with
the full Hughes-Liu shell. Thus far, we have been able to get comparable results.
LEVEL L1 - Do over each element group,
gather data, midstep geometry calculations
LEVEL 2 - For each thickness integration point
center of element calculations for
selective reduced integration
LEVEL 2 - Completion
LEVEL L1 - Completion
Figure 6-21
An Inner Loop, Level 3, is added for the Hughes-Liu Shell with Selectively
Reduced Integration
Table 6-4
204
318
Main Index
( 0, 0, )
316
33
47
Table 6-4
Operation Counts for the Hughes-Liu Shell with Selectively Reduced Integration
(continued)
Rotate strain increments into lamina coordinates
Calculate rows 3 through 8 of B matrix
66
919
n+12
configuration
75
370
75
55
Constitutive model
model dependent
69
Rotate stress to
configuration
75
358
Stresses in
n+1
n+1
lamina system
Stress divergence
75
245
TOTAL
Table 6-5
Operation Counts for the SOL 700 Implementation of the Uniformly Reduced
Hughes-Liu Shell
LEVEL L1 - Once per element
Calculate displacement increments
24
53
Calculate
238
33
75
81
Constitutive model
Rotate stress to
n+1
Stress divergence
Main Index
284
model dependent
global coordinates
69
125
Table 6-5
Operation Counts for the SOL 700 Implementation of the Uniformly Reduced
Hughes-Liu Shell (continued)
LEVEL L1 - Cleanup
Finish stress divergence
Hourglass control
60
356
TOTAL
N t N d m
M =
(6-337)
but cannot be used effectively in explicit calculations where matrix inversions are not feasible. In SOL
700 only three and four-node shell elements are used with linear interpolation functions; consequently,
we compute the translational masses from the consistent mass matrix by row summing, leading to the
following mass at element node a :
M di sp
a d
(6-338)
The rotational masses are computed by scaling the translational mass at the node by the factor
M rot
= M disp
(6-339)
where
= ma x { 1, 2 }
(6-340)
1
1 = z a 2 + ------ [ z a ] 2
12
(6-341)
V
2 = -----8h
(6-342)
( z a+ + z a- )
z a = --------------------2
(6-343)
[ z a ] = z a+ z a-
(6-344)
and
Main Index
and
(6-345)
= Y i j Y
(6-346)
Using the interpolation functions through the integration points the strains in the fiber directions are
extrapolated to the nodal points if 2 x 2 selectively reduced integration is employed. The nodal fiber
lengths can now be updated:
n+1
ha
= ha ( 1 + a )
(6-347)
(i)
x
= C 11 ( x + z x ) + C 12 ( y + z y ) = C 11 x + C 12 y + z ( C 11 x + C 12 y )
(i)
y
= C 12 x + C 22 y + z ( C 12 x + C 22 y )
(i)
xy
(i)
(i)
(i )
C 44 ( xy
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
Main Index
(i)
x
(i )
(i)
(i)
(6-348)
+ z xy )
(i)
(i )
(i)
zx
(i )
is known. Then
(i)
= ( z z x ) ( C 11 x + C 12 y ) + C 11 x ( z x ) + C 12 y ( z x )
(6-349)
M xx
NL ( i )
= x C 11
i = 1
z
zi
i1
NL ( i )
z 2 dz + y C 12
i = 1
z
zi
i1
z 2 dz
(6-350)
or
NL
M xx
1
= --- x
3
NL
(i) 3
C 11 ( z i
3
zi 1 )
+ y
i =1
(i)
C 12 ( z i
zi 1 )
(6-351)
i =1
y = 0
and
x = E ,
then
z zx
x = ------------- = ( z z x ) x
(6-352)
and
(i) 3
1
3
M xx = --- ( x E x ( z i z i 1 ) )
3
3M xx
x = -------------------------------------------(i) 3
3
E
x ( zi z i 1 )
(6-353)
(6-354)
(i )
3M xx E x ( z z x )
= ----------------------------------------------NL
(i) 3
Ex ( zi
(6-355)
3
zi 1 )
i =1
Now considering the first equilibrium equation, one can write the following:
(j)
xz
3 Q xz E x ( z z x )
---------- = --------x- = ----------------------------------------------NL
z
x
(i) 3
3
E x ( zi zi 1 )
(6-356)
i= 1
(j)
xz
(j) z2
3Q xz E x ---- zz x
2
- + Cj
= ----------------------------------------------NL
(i) 3
E x ( zi
(6-357)
3
zi 1 )
i =1
where Q xz is the shear force and C j is the constant of integration. This constant is obtained from the
transverse shear stress continuity requirement at the interface of each layer.
Main Index
Let
NL
(i)
--3- E x ( z i
( E I )x =
zi 1 )
(6-358)
i =1
Then
2
( i ) zi 1
- z i 1 z x
3 Q xz E x --------- 2
(i 1)
C j = -------------------------------------------------------------- + xz
( EI ) x
(6-359)
and
(i)
(i)
Q xz E x z i 1
z2
+ ------------------ ----------- z i 1 z x ---- + zz x
2
2
( EI ) x
(i 1)
xz = xz
(6-360)
3 Q xz C 11
z z
- ----------------o z x ( z z o )
xz = -----------------------------------------------NL
2
(i) 3
3
C11 ( z i + z i 1 )
(6-361)
i= 1
xz = xz
(i)
3 Q xz C 11
z zo
---------------- z x ( z z o ) ,z i 1 z z i
-----------------------------------------------NL
2
(j) 3
3
C 11 ( z j z j 1 )
(6-362)
j =1
(i 1)
Here xz
is the stress in previous layer at the interface with the current layer. The shear stress can also
be expressed as follows:
(i )
3 Q xz C 11
xz = -----------------------------------------------f
NL
(j) 3
C 11 ( z j
(i)
x+
z 2 zi 1
---------------------- z x ( z z i 1 )
2
(6-363)
3
zj 1 )
j =1
where
f
(i)
x
NL
zj + zj + 1
(j)
1
= -------C h ---------------------- z x
( i ) 11 j
2
C 11 j = 1
and
hj = zj zj 1
Main Index
(6-364)
To find Q xz , the shear force, assume that the strain energy expressed through average shear modules, C 66 ,
is equal to the strain energy expressed through the derived expressions as follows:
2
1 xz
1 Q xz
U = --- ------------ = --- -------- dz
2 C 66
2 C 66 h
(6-365)
2
C 11 ( i ) ( z z i 1 )
9h
1
-------- = --------------------------------------------------------- -------- f x + --------------------------- z x ( z z i 1 )
2 C
2
NL
C 66
66
(i) 3
3
C
(
z
z
)
11 i i 1
dz
j =1
NL
9h
= --------------------------------------------------------2NL
(i) 3
C 11 ( z i
zi 1 )
(i)
( C 11 ) 2
---------------(i)
C
66
i =1
z
zi
(i)
x+
z zi 1
---------------------- z x ( z z i 1 )
2
dz
i1
(6-366)
j =1
NL
9h
1
= ------ --------------------------------------------------------2-
60 NL
C11( i ) ( z i3 z i3 1 )
(i)
( C 11 ) 2 h
(i)
(i)
-------------------( i ) { f x [ 60f x
C 66
+ 20 h i ( z i + 2 z i 1 3z x ) ] +
j =1
2
then
Q xz = xz h = C 66 xz h
to calculate
NL
(i)
C11
use
zx
xz
z = 0
i zi 1
z---------------------- zx ( zi zi 1 )
= 0
(6-367)
i =1
where
NL
(i )
C 11 h i ( z i + z i + 1 )
=1
z x = i---------------------------------------------------NL
i =1
Algorithm:
Main Index
(i)
C 11 h i
(6-368)
The following algorithm is used in the implementation of the transverse shear treatment.
1. Calculate
zx
2. Calculate
f (xi )
according to (6-368)
3. Calculate
1
--3
according to (6-364)
NL
(i)
C11 ( z i
zi 1 )
i =1
4. Calculate
NL
1
( i ) ( z 3 z 3 )
h --- C 11
i
i
1
3
i=1
5. Calculate
C 66
6. Calculate
Q xz = C xz h
7. Calculate
xz
(i)
1
xz = --3
NL
(i )
(i)
C 11 ( z i z i 1 ) Q xz C 11 f
(i)
x+
z zi 1
---------------------- z x ( z z i 1 ) , z i 1 z z i
2
i =1
Steps 1-5 are performed at the initialization stage. Step 6 is performed in the shell formulation subroutine,
and Step 7 is performed in the stress calculation inside the constitutive subroutine.
Main Index
One of the simplest elements is the pin-jointed truss element shown in Figure 6-22. This element has three
degrees of freedom at each node and carries an axial force. The displacements and velocities measured
in the local system are interpolated along the axis according to
x
u = u 1 + --- ( u 2 u 1 )
L
(6-369)
x
u = u 1 + --- ( u 2 u 1 )
L
(6-370)
where at
x = 0 , u = u1 ,
and at
x = L , u = u2 .
N1
u1
A
L
N2
u2
Figure 6-22
Truss Element
(6-371)
(6-372)
Et
according to
Nn + 1 = Nn A Et + n + 1 2
Two constitutive models are implemented for the truss element: elastic and elastic-plastic with
kinematic hardening.
Main Index
(6-373)
Co-rotational Coordinates
The mid-surface of the quadrilateral membrane element is defined by the location of the elements four
corner nodes. An embedded element coordinate system (Figure 6-9) that deforms with the element is
defined in terms of these nodal coordinates. The co-rotational coordinate system follows the development
in equations (6-166) to (6-171).
1 i j
- + --------
d i j = --- ------2 x j x i
(6-374)
The above velocity-strain relations are evaluated only at the center of the shell. Standard bilinear nodal
interpolation is used to define the mid-surface velocity, angular velocity, and the elements coordinates
(isoparametric representation). These interpolation relations are given by
v m = N I ( , )v I
(6-375)
x m = N I ( , )x I
(6-376)
where the subscript I is summed over all the elements nodes and the nodal velocities are obtained by
differentiating the nodal coordinates with respect to time, i.e., I = x I . The bilinear shape functions are
defined in (6-185).
The velocity strains at the center of the element, i.e., at
Technique, giving:
d x = B 1I xI
Main Index
(6-377)
d y = B 2I yI
(6-378)
2d xy = B 2I v xI + B 1I v yI
(6-379)
where
N I
B 1I = -------x
(6-380)
N I
B 2I = -------y
(6-381)
(6-382)
where the superscript R indicates a resultant force and the Greek subscripts emphasize the limited range
of the indices for plane stress plasticity.
The above element centered force resultants are related to the local nodal forces by
R
R
f xI = A ( B 1I f xx + B 2I f xy )
(6-383)
R
R
f yI = A ( B 2I f yy + B 1I f xy )
(6-384)
where
The above local nodal forces are then transformed to the global coordinate system using the
transformation relations given in equation (6-173).
Main Index
f
= f + f
(6-385)
i+1
()
in the local element coordinates; i.e., along the axis of the element. In the default case(i.e., no orientation
vector is used), the global components of the discrete element force are obtained by using the elements
direction cosines:
Fx
nx
l x
f F y = l l y = f n y = f n
Fz
lz
nz
(6-386)
where:
x2 x1
ly
l = ly = y2 y1
z2 z1
lz
(6-387)
is the length
l =
l x + l y2 + l z
(6-388)
and ( x i, y i, zi ) are the global coordinates of the nodes of the spring element. The forces in Equation (6-386)
are added to the first node and subtracted from the second node.
Main Index
For a node tied to ground we use the same approach but for the ( x 2, y 2, z 2 ) coordinates in equation (6-366),
the initial coordinates of node 1, i.e., ( x 0, y 0, z 0 ) are used instead; therefore,
x0 x1
Fx
f
F y = -l y 0 y 1
Fz
z0 z1
nx
= f ny
nz
(6-389)
The increment in the element force is determined from the user specified force-displacement relation.
Currently, nine types of force-displacement/velocity relationships may be specified:
Linear elastic
Linear viscous
Nonlinear elastic
Nonlinear viscous
Elasto-plastic with isotropic hardening
General nonlinear
Linear viscoelastic
Inelastic tension and compression only
Muscle model
Orientation Vectors
An orientation vector,
m1
m = m2
m3
(6-390)
can be defined to control the direction the spring acts. If orientation vectors are used, it is strongly
recommended that the nodes of the discrete element be coincident and remain approximately so
throughout the calculation. If the spring or damper is of finite length, rotational constraints will appear
in the model that can substantially affect the results. If finite length springs are needed with directional
vectors, then the discrete beam elements, CROD, should be used with the coordinate system flagged for
the finite length case.
We will first consider the portion of the displacement that lies in the direction of the vector. The
displacement of the spring is updated based on the change of length given by
I = I I0
Main Index
(6-391)
I = m1 ( x 2 x 1 ) + m 2 ( y 2 y 1 ) + m 3 ( z 2 z 1 )
(6-392)
(6-393)
The latter case is not intuitively obvious and can affect the sign of the force in unexpected ways if the
user is not familiar with the relevant equations. The nodal forces are then given by
Fx
m1
Fy = f m2
Fz
m3
(6-394)
The orientation vector can be either permanently fixed in space as defined in the input or acting in a
direction determined by two moving nodes which must not be coincident but may be independent of the
nodes of the spring. In the latter case, we recompute the direction every cycle according to:
m1
m2
m3
n
x2 x1
1
= ---n- y 2 y 1n
l
zn zn
1
2
(6-395)
For the case where we consider motion in the plane perpendicular to the orientation vector we consider
only the displacements in the plane, l p , given by,
= l m(m l)
(6-396)
We update the displacement of the spring based on the change of length in the plane given by
l
(6-397)
= l l0
where
l0
is the initial length in the direction of the vector and l is the current length given for a node to
node spring by
l
Main Index
= m1 ( x2 x1 ) + m2 ( y2 y1 ) + m3 ( z2 z1 )
(6-398)
= m1 ( x0 x1 ) + m2 ( y0 y1 ) + m3 ( z0 z1 )
(6-399)
where
p
m1
p
m2
p
m3
lx
1
p
= ---------------------------------------------------- l
2
2
2
y
p
p
p
p
lx + ly + lz
lz
(6-400)
After computing the displacements, the nodal forces are then given by
p
Fx
m1
p
=
f
F
y
m2
Fz
p
m3
(6-401)
V 0
(6-402)
where
kd
V0
For example, if it is known that a component shows a dynamic crush force at 15m/s equal to 2.5 times
the static crush force, use k d = 1.5 and V 0 = 15 .
Main Index
f1 + f2
a common = -------------------m1 + m2
(6-403)
An error termination will occur if a rigid body node is used in a spring definition where compression is
limited.
Main Index
f = K l
(6-404)
where K is the elements stiffness and l is the change in length of the element. The linear viscous
element has a similar force-velocity (rate of displacement) relation:
l
f = C ----t
where
Main Index
(6-405)
is a viscous damping parameter and
Eulerian Elements
Element Definition
In the Eulerian solver, the mesh is defined by grid points and solid elements. The elements are
specified as being (partially) filled with certain materials or with nothing (VOID), and initial conditions
are defined.
As the calculation proceeds, the material moves relative to the Eulerian mesh. The mass, momentum, and
energy of the material is transported from element to element depending on the direction and velocity of
the material flow. The solver then calculates the impulse and work done on each of the faces of every
Eulerian element.
Eulerian elements can only be solid but have a general connectivity and therefore are defined in exactly
the same way as Lagrangian elements.
Solid Elements
There are three types of Euler elements, a six-sided CHEXA with eight grid points defining the corners,
a CPENTA with six grid points, and a CTETRA with four grid points. The connectivity of the element
is defined in exactly the same manner as a Lagrangian element, that is, with a CHEXA, CPENTA, or
CTETRA entry. However, in order to differentiate between Lagrangian and Eulerian solid elements, the
property entry for Euler is PEULERn rather than PSOLID.
Unlike Lagrangian solid elements, the CPENTA and CTETRA elements perform just as well as the
CHEXA element. They can be used, therefore, wherever meshing demands such use.
CHEXA
CPENTA
CTETRA
The PEULERn entry references a MATDEUL material entry that is used to define the material filling the
elements at the start of the calculation. When no material entry is referenced (the field contains a zero),
the element is initially void.
Main Index
Graded Meshes
Nonuniform Euler meshes can easily be created by MD Patran. This is particularly useful when the
elements do not need to be orthogonal. But in orthogonal meshes, the nonuniformity propagates to the
boundaries of the mesh. Even at the boundary, there will be elements that have a small size in at least
one direction. To allow for large element sizes in all three coordinate directions at the boundary, block
structured meshing has to be used. This type of meshing is very effective when modeling the flow over
bodies and is often used in CFD. Usually, the Euler elements are fine near the body and become coarser
as the distance is increased away from the body. By using the graded mesh capability, a block of fine
elements is used in the area of interest and a coarse block is used in other areas. To use this method, the
blocks need to be glued together. This is done by adding PARAM,GRADMESH.
Graded meshes are supported by all Eulerian solvers except by the single material Euler solver with
Strength. Intersection of a coupling surface segment with the interface between a coarse and fine block
is not allowed. Graded meshes are not supported by multiple Euler domains. Figure 1 shows an example
of graded meshes. This mesh is be used in Example 4.14.
Consider a blast wave simulation. Close to the ignition point elements need to be fine, but at some
distance the wave blast becomes larger in radius and it becomes less steep allowing coarser mesh
elements. To reduce the number of elements and the limit the problem size, part of the fine mesh can be
replaced by a coarse mesh. For modeling, only part of the fine mesh is constructed and the coarse
mesh is created such that it covers the whole problem domain. Next, the fine mesh is glued to the coarse
mesh. This gluing is activated by PARAM,GRADED-MESH. The algorithm identifies the elements of the
coarse mesh that are covered by the fine mesh. They are deactivated and removed from Euler archive
output requests.
Main Index
locations a grid point of the fine mesh coincides with a grid point of the coarse mesh. This matching does
not need to be exact, since the solver uses a tolerance to find the coinciding grid points. Visualization of
the results of the complete Euler domain can be done in one session in a post-processor like MD Patran.
Figure 6-23
Gluing Meshes
Gluing of fine and coarse meshes is activated by PARAM,GRADMESH. The algorithm removes coarse
elements that are completely covered by fine elements. Here the criterion for removal is based on the
element volume. The element with the largest volume will be removed. It is also possible to remove the
elements with the lowest element numbers. These two approaches are activated by, respectively, the
MINVOL and ELNUM option of the GRADMESH PARAM.
The gluing algorithm performs the following steps:
The Euler elements are sorted such that the connected elements are grouped together.
For each group of elements, the algorithm determines which elements have to be removed. As
mentioned the criterion for removal is based on the fact if these elements are completely covered
by elements of another group that are smaller or have a larger element number.
Next the groups of elements are connected at boundary faces and at locations where elements
have been removed. Special faces will be created that connect an element of one element group
to an element of another group.
If the fine mesh is fully surrounded by the coarse mesh, the interface between the two meshes consists of
the boundary faces of the fine mesh. The geometry formed by these faces will be used to construct special
faces that connect an element of the coarse mesh to an element of the fine mesh.
Main Index
coarse elements have to be replaced by finer elements. Select a part of this mesh by selecting two
Eulerian grid points.
Create the fine mesh by MESH,BOX, by using for the reference grid point as the first grid point.
The width of the box is given by subtracting the coordinates of the second grid point from the
coordinates of the first. To finish the definition of the fine mesh, the number of elements in each
direction has to be defined. This ensures that the fine mesh fits nicely in the coarse mesh.
Add PARAM,GRADMESH which activates the algorithm that is described above.
If needed a part of fine mesh can be replaced by an even finer mesh, by iterating through the steps above.
To construct graded meshes by MD Patran, a utility called the break up of element can be used.
Main Index
Main Index
Figure 6-24
Hanging Node
Figure 6-25
Lack of Smoothness
Figure 6-26
Main Index
Chapter 7: Materials
MD Natran R3 Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) Users Guide
Main Index
Materials
J
232
325
Elastic
Orthotropic Elastic
Kinematic/Isotropic Elastic-Plastic
Viscoelastic
Blatz-Ko Rubber
Null Hydrodynamics
10
Isotropic-Elastic-Plastic-Hydrodynamic
12
Isotropic-Elastic-Plastic
13
14
15
18
19
20
Rigid
22
24
26
Honeycomb
27
28
Resultant Plasticity
29
30
31
32
34
Fabric
40
Nonlinear Orthotropic
54-55
Main Index
57
58
59
62
Viscous foam
63
64
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
Concrete Damage
72R
Main Index
73
74
76
General Viscoelastic
77
Hyperviscoelastic Rubber
80
Ramberg-Osgood Plasticity
81
83
87
Cellular Rubber
89
Plastic Polymer
93
94
95
97
98
Simplified Johnson-Cook
99
100
Spot weld
112
114
119
121
123
126
Modified Honeycomb
127
Arruda-Boyce rubber
158
Composite Fabric
181
Simplified Rubber
196
B01
Seatbelt
S01
S02
S03
S04
S05
S06
S07
S08
S13
S14
S15
Spring Muscle
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
In the table below, a list of the available material models and the applicable element types are given.
Some materials include strain rate sensitivity, failure, equations of state, and thermal effects and this
is also noted. General applicability of the materials to certain kinds of behavior is suggested in the
last column.
Main Index
Main Index
Strain-Rate Effects
Failure
Equation-of-State
Thermal Effects
Material Title
Bricks
Beams
Thin Shells
Thick Shells
Material Number
Gn General
Cm Composites
Cr Ceramics
Fl Fluids
Fm Foam
Gl Glass
Hy Hydro-dyn
Mt Metal
Pl Plastic
Rb Rubber
Sl Soil/Cone
1 Elastic
Y Y Y Y
Gn, Fl
Cm, Mt
3 Plastic Kinematic/Isotropic
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Cm, Mt, Pl
Fm, Sl
6 Linear Viscoelastic
Y Y Y Y Y Y
7 Blatz-Ko Rubber
9 Null Material
Y Y Y Fl, Hy
Y Y
Mt
Fm, Sl
Y Y Y Y Y
Mt, Pl
Mt, Pl
20 Rigid
Y Y Y Y
22 Composite Damage
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Mt, Pl
26 Honeycomb
Cm, Fm, Sl
27 Mooney-Rivlin Rubber
Y Y
Rb, Polyurethane
Y Y
Hy, Mt
Y Mt
Y Y Y Y Hy, Mt
Y Y Y Y
Y Y
Y Rb
Y
Y Y
Cm
Rb
28 Resultant Plasticity
Y Y
Mt
Mt
Rb
Y Y
34 Fabric
40 Nonlinear Orthotropic
Y
Y
Cm, Gl
Y Cm
Gn General
Cm Composites
Cr Ceramics
Fl Fluids
Fm Foam
Gl Glass
Hy Hydro-dyn
Mt Metal
Pl Plastic
Rb Rubber
Sl Soil/Cone
Cm
Cm
Y Y
Fm
Fm
Fm
Y Y Y
Mt
Y Y
72 Concrete Damage
Cm, Cr
Y Y Y
Sl
Y Y Y
Sl
Y Y
Fm
Rb
80 Ramberg-Osgood
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Mt, Pl
83 Fu-Changs Foam
Y Y
Fm
87 Cellular Rubber
Rb
89 Plastic Polymer
Main Index
Strain-Rate Effects
Failure
Equation-of-State
Thermal Effects
Material Title
Bricks
Beams
Thin Shells
Thick Shells
Material Number
Rb
Y
Sl
93
Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y
Y
Y Y
119
121
Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y
Cm
RB
B01 Seatbelt
Main Index
Gn General
Cm Composites
Cr Ceramics
Fl Fluids
Fm Foam
Gl Glass
Hy Hydro-dyn
Mt Metal
Pl Plastic
Rb Rubber
Sl Soil/Cone
Strain-Rate Effects
Failure
Equation-of-State
Thermal Effects
Material Title
Bricks
Beams
Thin Shells
Thick Shells
Material Number
Strain-Rate Effects
Failure
Equation-of-State
Thermal Effects
Material Title
Bricks
Beams
Thin Shells
Thick Shells
Material Number
Gn General
Cm Composites
Cr Ceramics
Fl Fluids
Fm Foam
Gl Glass
Hy Hydro-dyn
Mt Metal
Pl Plastic
Rb Rubber
Sl Soil/Cone
SW4
Y
Y
n+12
n+12
= 2 G' i j
(7-1)
and pressure
(7-2)
p n + 1 = K ln V n + 1
where G and K are the elastic shear and bulk moduli, respectively, and
ratio of the current volume to the initial volume.
For standard MD Nastran solution sequence, this would be the same as using MAT1 to define a linear
elastic material.
Main Index
S = C E = T t Cl T E
where
T =
is
(7-3)
T
l 12
m 12
n 12
l1 m1
m1 n1
n1 l1
l 22
m 22
n 22
l2 m2
m2 n2
n2 l2
l 32
m 32
n 32
l3 m3
m3 n3
n3 l3
2 l 1 l 2 2m 1 m 2 2n 1 n 2 ( l 1 m 2 + l 1 m 1 ) ( m 1 n 2 + m 2 n 1 ) ( n 1 l 2 + n 2 l 1 )
(7-4)
2 l 2 l 3 2m 2 m 3 2n 2 n 3 ( l 2 m 3 + l 3 m 2 ) ( m 2 n 3 + m 3 n 2 ) ( n 2 l 3 + n 3 l 2 )
2 l 3 l 1 2m 3 m 1 2n 3 n 1 ( l 3 m 1 + l 1 m 3 ) ( m 3 n 1 + m 1 n 3 ) ( n 3 l 1 + n 1 l 3 )
li , mi , n i
x' i = l i x 1 + m i x 2 + n i x 3
and
x' i
C l 1 =
(7-5)
for i = 1,2,3
32
12 1
-------- -------- -------E 11 E 22 E 33
13 23 1
-------- -------- -------E 11 E 22 E 33
1
--------G 12
1
--------G 23
1
--------G 31
Cl
(7-6)
Since
i x' j
Cl
and
E ii = E x'
(7-7)
is symmetric
21
12
------- = -------,
E 11
E 22
ect.
(7-8)
Main Index
E 11 ,E 22 ,E 33 ,E 12 ,E 23 ,E 31
(7-9)
x i x j
i j = ----- --------- --------- S k l
o X k X l
(7-10)
After computing S i j , we use Equation (7-10) to obtain the Cauchy stress. This model will predict realistic
behavior for finite displacement and rotations as long as the strains are small.
For standard MD Nastran solution sequences, this would be the same as using MAT9 to define a linear
anisotropic material. For shell elements, you would have used the MAT2 or MAT8 option.
(7-11)
where
ij = S i j ij
(7-12)
p
y = 0 + E p ef
f
(7-13)
i j
is
2 p
ij = ( 1 ) --- E p i j
3
(7-14)
Hence,
inj + 1 = ijn + ( ij
Main Index
n+12
n + 1 2 ) t n + 1 2
+ ink ink + 1 2 + jnk + 1 2 ki
(7-15)
Et
Yield
Stress
l
ln ----
l0
= 0
= 1
Figure 7-1
Kinematic Hardening
Isotropic Hardening
Strain rate is accounted for using the Cowper and Symonds [Jones 1983] model which scales the yield
stress by a strain rate dependent factor
y =
where
1p
p
1 + ----
( 0 + E p eff
)
C
and
p
E p eff
, where
Ep
ef f
y ,
0 ,
Et E
E p = --------------E Et
Main Index
i j ij
and
(7-16)
(7-18)
t
p
ef f =
--3- ij i j
2p p
1/2
(7-19)
dt
The plastic strain rate is the difference between the total and elastic (right superscript) strain rates:
p
e
i j = i j i j
(7-20)
In the implementation of this material model, the deviatoric stresses are updated elastically, as described
for model 1, but repeated here for the sake of clarity:
n
i*j = i j + C ij kl kl
(7-21)
where
i*j
inj
C ij kl
kl
and, if the yield function is satisfied, nothing else is done. If, however, the yield function is violated, an
increment in plastic strain is computed, the stresses are scaled back to the yield surface, and the yield
surface center is updated.
Let
si j
n+1
*
*
1 *
s i j = i j --- kk ij
3
(7-22)
and
ij* = s ij* i j
(7-23)
(7-24)
p
ef
f
y
pn
pn
p
+ --------------------- = ef
= eff
f + ef f
3 G + Ep
(7-25)
Main Index
(7-26)
(7-27)
where
and
33
(7-28)
When the trial stress is within the yield surface, the strain increment is elastic and the stress update is
completed. Otherwise, for the plastic plane stress case, secant iteration is used to solve Equation (7-26)
for the normal strain increment ( 33 ) required to produce a zero normal stress:
i
p
3 G ef
f 33
i
* --------------------------- 33
= 33
(7-29)
indicates the iteration number.
33
(the superscript
i
i1
33
33
i+1
i 1 ---------------------------------i 1
33
= 33
33
i i 1
33
33
(7-30)
where the two starting values are obtained from the initial elastic estimate and by assuming a purely
plastic increment; i.e.,
1
= ( 11 22 )
33
(7-31)
These starting values should bound the actual values of the normal strain increment.
The iteration procedure uses the updated normal stain increment to update first the deviatoric stress and
then the other quantities needed to compute the next estimate of the normal stress in Equation (7-29). The
iterations proceed until the normal stress
convergence of the normal strains:
Main Index
33
i
i1
33
33
------------------------------------< 10 4
i+1
33
(7-32)
After convergence, the stress update is completed using the relationships given in Equations (7-25) and
(7-27).
For SOL SEQ 106, 129, or 600, this material model is the same as using MATS1, with the hardening rule
(HR) set to either Isotropic or Kinematic. These models do not allow between 0 and 1.
(7-33)
where a 0 , a 1 , and a 2 are user-defined constants. Volumetric yielding is determined by a tabulated curve
of pressure versus volumetric strain. Elastic unloading from this curve is assumed to a tensile cutoff as
illustrated in Figure 7-2.
Implementation of this model is straightforward. One history variable, the maximum volumetric strain in
compression, is stored. If the new compressive volumetric strain exceeds the stored value, loading is
indicated. When the yield condition is violated, the updated trial stresses, s i*j , are scaled back using a
simple radial return algorithm:
a + a p + a p 2
0
1
2
s inj + 1 = ----------------------------------------
1
-s
s
2 ij i j
12
s ij*
(7-34)
If the hydrostatic tension exceeds the cutoff value, the pressure is set to the cutoff value and the deviatoric
stress tensor is zeroed.
Main Index
Pressure
V
ln ------
V 0
Volumetric Strain
(Compression)
Tension
Tension Cutoff Value
Figure 7-2
Volumetric Strain Versus Pressure Curve for Soil and Crushable Foam Model
' i j
s i j = 2 ( t ) ---------- d
(7-35)
where
( t ) = G + ( G 0 G )e t
(7-36)
is the shear relaxation modulus. A recursion formula is used to compute the new value of the hereditary
integral at time t n + 1 from its value at time t n . Elastic bulk behavior is assumed:
p = K ln V
Main Index
(7-37)
1
---------------1 2
(7-38)
ij
x k x k
C ij = -------- -------X i X j
(7-39)
after determining
Si j ,
x i x j
i j = ----- --------- -------- S kl
0 X k X l
where
and
(7-40)
are the initial and current density, respectively. The default value of
is 0.463.
(7-41)
where
ij
Sometimes it is advantageous to model contact surfaces via shell elements which are not part of the
structure, but are necessary to define areas of contact within nodal rigid bodies or between nodal rigid
bodies. Beams and shells that use this material type are completely bypassed in the element processing.
The Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio are used only for setting the contact interface stiffnesses, and
it is recommended that reasonable values be input.
Main Index
' i j ;
s i j ;
v ,
are
1
p = --- i j ij
3
' ij = ij --- v
3
v = i j ij
s i j = i j + p i j
s ij
(7-42)
= 2' i j = 2G ' i j
s ij ,
is given by:
s ij = s i j s ip pj s j p pi
First we update
*s n + 1
ij
s inj
to
(7-43)
s inj + 1
elastically
(7-44)
2 G ' i j
where the left superscript, *, denotes a trial stress value. The effective trial stress is defined by
12
3
s * = --- *s inj + 1 *s inj + 1
2
and if
s*
(7-45)
2
1
= --- s ij s i j -----y- 0
2
3
(7-46)
is violated and we scale the trial stresses back to the yield surface; i.e., a radial return
y
s inj + 1 = -----* *s inj + 1 = m * s ijn + 1
s
(7-47)
The plastic strain increment can be found by subtracting the deviatoric part of the strain increment that
is elastic,
n
1
------- ( s n + 1 s iRj ) ,
2 G ij
' i j ,
R
1
ipj = ' i j ------- ( s ijn + 1 s i j n )
2G
i.e.,
(7-48)
Recalling that,
R
n+1
*s ij
s ij n
' i j = ----------------------------2G
(7-49)
Main Index
(7-50)
(7-51)
(7-52)
12
(7-53)
(7-54)
(7-55)
Hence,
s y
1m
p = ------------- s = ----------------3G
3G
(7-56)
(7-57)
(7-58)
Thus,
( 3G + E p ) p = ( s yn )
(7-59)
Main Index
(7-60)
The algorithm for plastic loading can now be outlined in five simple stress. If the effective trial stress
exceeds the yield stress then
1. Solve for the plastic strain increment:
( s yn )
p = ------------------------( 3G + E p )
n+1
= p + p
n+1:
yn + 1
m = ------------s
(7-61)
J2 ,
1
J 2 = --- s ij s i j
2
(7-62)
and the yield stress, y , is a function of the effective plastic strain, efp f , and the plastic hardening modulus,
Ep :
p
y = 0 + E p eff
(7-63)
d eff
p
(7-64)
where:
p
d eff
=
Main Index
2
--- d ijp d ipj
3
(7-65)
and the plastic tangent modulus is defined in terms of the input tangent modulus,
Et ,
as:
E Et
E p = --------------E Et
(7-66)
(7-67)
where K is the bulk modulus. This is perhaps the most cost effective plasticity model. Only one history
variable, efp f , is stored with this model.
This model is not recommended for shell elements. In the plane stress implementation, a one-step radial
return approach is used to scale the Cauchy stress tensor to if the state of stress exceeds the yield surface.
This approach to plasticity leads to inaccurate shell thickness updates and stresses after yielding. This is
the only model in SOL 700 for plane stress that does not default to an iterative approach.
For MD Nastran SOL SEQ 106, 129, and 600, this material model is similar to using the MATS1 option
to define an elastic-plastic material.
(7-68)
or
p
p
ef
f > ma x
(7-69)
p
where p mi n and ma
x are user-defined parameters. Once failure has occurred, pressure may never be
negative and the deviatoric components are set to zero:
si j = 0
(7-70)
for all time. The failed element can only carry loads in compression.
Main Index
y = ( A + B p ) ( 1 + C ln ) ( 1 T m )
where
A, B, C, n,
and
(7-71)
= ---0
0 = 1 s 1
T T room
T = --------------------------------T mel t T room
Constants for a variety of materials are provided in Johnson and Cook [1983].
Due to the nonlinearity in the dependence of flow stress on plastic strain, an accurate value of the flow
stress requires iteration for the increment in plastic strain. However, by using a Taylor series expansion
with linearization about the current time, we can solve for y with sufficient accuracy to avoid iteration.
The strain at fracture is given by
f = [ D 1 + D 2 exp D 3 s ] [ 1 + D 4 ln ] [ 1 + D 5 T ]
where
D i , i = 1 , ,5 ,
p
= -------- eff
(7-72)
-------f
(7-74)
Main Index
if the pressure becomes more tensile than the specified limit, p mi n . Once spall is detected, the deviatoric
stresses are set to zero and the pressure is required to be compressive. If hydrostatic tension is calculated
then the pressure is reset to 0 for that element.
In addition to the above failure criterion, this material model also supports a shell element deletion
criterion based on the maximum stable time step size for the element, t max . Generally, t ma x goes down
as the element becomes more distorted. To assure stability of time integration, the global time step is the
minimum of the t max values calculated for all elements in the model. Using this option allows the
selective deletion of elements whose time step t max has fallen below the specified minimum time step,
t cri t . Elements which are severely distorted often indicate that material has failed and supports little
load, but these same elements may have very small time steps and therefore control the cost of the
analysis. This option allows these highly distorted elements to be deleted from the calculation, and,
therefore, the analysis can proceed at a larger time step, and, thus, at a reduced cost. Deleted elements do
not carry any load, and are deleted from all applicable slide surface definitions. Clearly, this option must
be judiciously used to obtain accurate results at a minimum cost.
Material type 15 is applicable to the high rate deformation of many materials including most metals.
Unlike the Steinberg-Guinan model, the Johnson-Cook model remains valid down to lower strain rates
and even into the quasistatic regime. Typical applications include explosive metal forming, ballistic
penetration, and impact.
This material is similar to the use of the ISOTROPIC option with the Johnson-Cook hardening rule.
where
yp
y ,
is a
(7-75)
p
A parameter, SIGY, in the input governs how the strain to yield is identified. If SIGY is set to zero, the
strain to yield if found by solving for the intersection of the linearly elastic loading equation with the
strain hardening equation:
= E
(7-76)
= l n
Main Index
1 ----------n1
(7-77)
--1n
(7-78)
Strain rate is accounted for using the Cowper and Symonds model which scales the yield stress with
the factor
1/p
1 + ----
C
(7-79)
where is the strain rate. A fully viscoplastic formulation is optional with this model which incorporates
the Cowper and Symonds formulation within the yield surface. An additional cost is incurred but the
improvement is results can be dramatic.
This material model is a subset of what may be specified through the MATEP option for SOL600.
where
2 12
= --- ' ij ' ij
3
(7-80)
and the prime denotes the deviatoric component. The yield stress is defined as
y = 0 ( ) + Ep p
(7-81)
Ep
(7-82)
Both Young's modulus and the tangent modulus may optionally be made functions of strain rate by
specifying a TABLED1 ID giving their values as a function of strain rate. If these TABLED1 ID's are input
as 0, then the constant values specified in the input are used.
Note:
Main Index
All TABLED1s used to define quantities as a function of strain rate must have the same
number of points at the same strain rate values. This requirement is used to allow
vectorized interpolation to enhance the execution speed of this constitutive model.
This model also contains a simple mechanism for modeling material failure. This option is activated by
specifying a TABLED1 ID defining the effective stress at failure as a function of strain rate. For solid
elements, once the effective stress exceeds the failure stress the element is deemed to have failed and is
removed from the solution. For shell elements the entire shell element is deemed to have failed if all
integration points through the thickness have an effective stress that exceeds the failure stress. After
failure the shell element is removed from the solution.
In addition to the above failure criterion, this material model also supports a shell element deletion
criterion based on the maximum stable time step size for the element, t max . Generally, t ma x goes down
as the element becomes more distorted. To assure stability of time integration, the global time step is the
minimum of the t max values calculated for all elements in the model. Using this option allows the
selective deletion of elements whose time step t max has fallen below the specified minimum time step,
t cri t . Elements which are severely distorted often indicate that material has failed and supports little
load, but these same elements may have very small time steps and therefore control the cost of the
analysis. This option allows these highly distorted elements to be deleted from the calculation, and,
therefore, the analysis can proceed at a larger time step, and, thus, at a reduced cost. Deleted elements do
not carry any load, and are deleted from all applicable slide surface definitions. Clearly, this option must
be judiciously used to obtain accurate results at a minimum cost.
This material model is a subset of what may be specified through the MATEP option for SOL600.
Main Index
Inertial properties for rigid materials may be defined in either of two ways. By default, the inertial
properties are calculated from the geometry of the constituent elements of the rigid material and the
density specified for the part ID. Alternatively, the inertial properties and initial velocities for a rigid body
may be directly defined, and this overrides data calculated from the material property definition and
nodal initial velocity definitions.
Young's modulus, E , and Poisson's ratio, , are used for determining sliding interface parameters if the
rigid body interacts in a contact definition. Realistic values for these constants should be defined since
unrealistic values may contribute to numerical problem in contact.
and C 2 are obtained from material strength measurement. is defined by material shear stress-strain
measurements. In plane stress, the strain is given in terms of the stress as
1
1 = ------ ( 1 1 2 )
E1
1
2 = ------ ( 2 2 1 )
E2
(7-83)
1
3
2 12 = --------- 12 + 12
G 12
(7-84)
Main Index
(7-85)
constants
E 2 , G 12 , , and
(7-86)
F comp > 1 . If F comp > 1 , then the material constants E 2 , 1 , and 2
are
(7-87)
F fi ber > 1 .
If
F fi ber > 1 ,
E 1 , E 2 , G 12 , 1 ,
and
are set
(7-88)
where
p
)]
y = [ 0 + f h ( eff
(7-89)
p
f h ( eff
)
(7-90)
is assumed where E p and efp f are given in Equations (7-16) and (7-17), respectively. The parameter
accounts for strain rate effects. For complete generality a table defining the yield stress versus plastic
strain may be defined for various levels of effective strain rate.
In the implementation of this material model, the deviatoric stresses are updated elastically (see material
model 1), the yield function is checked, and if it is satisfied the deviatoric stresses are accepted. If it is
not, an increment in plastic strain is computed:
12
p
ef
f
Main Index
3
--- s * s *
y
2 i j ij
= -----------------------------------------3G + E p
(7-91)
Ep
is the current plastic hardening modulus. The trial deviatoric stress state
y
-s*
s inj + 1 = ----------------------------1 2 ij
3
--- s i*j s ij*
2
s i*j
(7-92)
For shell elements, the above equations apply, but with the addition of an iterative loop to solve for the
normal strain increment, such that the stress component normal to the mid surface of the shell element
approaches zero.
Three options to account for strain rate effects are possible:
Strain rate may be accounted for using the Cowper and Symonds model which scales the yield
1p
= 1 + ----
C
where
(7-93)
For complete generality a TABLED1, defining , which scales the yield stress may be input
instead. In this curve the scale factor versus strain rate is defined.
If different stress versus strain curves can be provided for various strain rates, the option using
Note:
In Figure 7-3, the yield stress at a volumetric strain of zero is nonzero. In the
TABLED1 definition, the time value is the volumetric strain and the function
value is the yield stress.
Main Index
i j
Unloading and
reloading path
Strain
Figure 7-3
i j
Unloading is based on the interpolated
Youngs moduli which must provide an
unloading tangent that exceeds the
loading tangent.
LCB, TABLED1 number for sigma-bb versus either relative volume or volumetric strain (default:
LCB = LCA);
LCC, the TABLED1 number for sigma-cc versus either relative volume or volumetric strain
G cau ,
LCAB, TABLED1 number for sigma-ab versus either relative volume or volumetric strain
Main Index
LCCA, TABLED1 number for sigma-ca versus either relative volume or volumetric strain
The behavior before compaction is orthotropic where the components of the stress tensor are uncoupled;
i.e., an a component of strain will generate resistance in the local a direction with no coupling to the local
b and c directions. The elastic moduli vary linearly with the relative volume from their initial values to
the fully compacted values:
E aa = E aau + ( E E aau )
E bb = E bbu + ( E E bbu )
E cc = E ccu + ( E E ccu )
G ab = G abu + ( G G abu )
(7-94)
G bc = G bcu + ( G G bcu )
G ca = G cau + ( G G cau )
where
1 V min
= ma x min --------------------- , 1 , 0
1 Vf
and
(7-95)
is the elastic shear modulus for the fully compacted honeycomb material
E
G = --------------------2(1 + )
(7-96)
The relative volume V is defined as the ratio of the current volume over the initial volume; typically,
V = 1 at the beginning of a calculation. The relative volume, V min , is the minimum value reached during
the calculation.
The TABLED1s define the magnitude of the average stress as the material changes density (relative
volume). Each curve related to this model must have the same number of points and the same abscissa
values. There are two ways to define these curves: as a function of relative volume V , or as a function of
volumetric strain defined as:
V = 1 V
(7-97)
In the former, the first value in the curve should correspond to a value of relative volume slightly less
than the fully compacted value. In the latter, the first value in the curve should be less than or equal to
zero corresponding to tension and should increase to full compaction.
Note:
Main Index
When defining the curves, care should be taken that the extrapolated values do not lead to
negative yield stresses.
At the beginning of the stress update we transform each elements stresses and strain rates into the local
element coordinate system. For the uncompacted material, the trial stress components are updated using
the elastic interpolated moduli according to:
n+1
aa
n+1
bb
n+1
cc
n+1
ab
n+1
bc
n+1
ca
tri al
tri al
tri al
= aa + E aa aa
n
= bb + E bb bb
n
= cc + E cc cc
tri al
=
tri al
tri al
n
ab
(7-98)
+ E ab ab
= bc + E bc bc
n
= ca + E ca ca
Then we independently check each component of the updated stresses to ensure that they do not exceed
the permissible values determined from the TABLED1s; e.g., if
inj + 1
t rial
> i j ( V min )
(7-99)
then
t rial
ijn + 1
inj + 1 = i j ( V min ) -------------------------tri al
ijn + 1
(7-100)
The parameter is either unity or a value taken from the TABLED1 number, LCSR, that defines
as a function of strain rate. Strain rate is defined here as the Euclidean norm of the deviatoric strain
rate tensor.
For fully compacted material we assume that the material behavior is elastic-perfectly plastic and updated
the stress components according to:
s itjrial = s ijn + 2G ijdev
n+12
(7-101)
(7-102)
We next check to see if the yield stress for the fully compacted material is exceeded by comparing:
12
3
t rial
s eff
= --- s ijtri al s ijtri al
2
Main Index
(7-103)
the effective trial stress, to the yield stress y . If the effective trial stress exceeds the yield stress, we
simply scale back the stress components to the yield surface:
y t rial
-s
s inj + 1 = ----------t rial i j
s eff
(7-104)
We can now update the pressure using the elastic bulk modulus,
K:
n+12
p n + 1 = p n K kk
(7-105)
E
K = -----------------------3 (1 2 )
(7-106)
After completing the stress update, we transform the stresses back to the global configuration.
(7-107)
where
C = .5 A + B
(7-108)
A ( 5 2 ) + B ( 11 5 )
D = ------------------------------------------------------------2 (1 2 )
(7-109)
= Poissons ratio
G = 2(A + B)
I 1 ,I 2 ,I 3
2
I1 = 1 + 2 + 3
2 2
2 2
2 2
I2 = 1 2 + 2 3 + 3 1
(7-110)
2 2 2
I3 = 1 2 3
Recommended values for Poissons ratio are between .490 and .495 or higher. Lower values may lead to
instabilities. In the derivation of the constants C and D incompressibility is assumed.
Main Index
Bending
y
h--2
d
h y
--2
ny =
my =
h--- y d
y
--h2
Figure 7-4
= h y
h2
= ----- y
4
In applying this model to shell elements the resultants are updated incrementally using the midplane
strains m and curvatures :
n = tC m
(7-111)
h3
m = t ------ C
12
(7-112)
where the plane stress constitutive matrix is given in terms of Youngs Modulus
as:
2 m m + m2 + 3m2
m = m xx
xx yy
yy
xy
Defining
2 n n + n 2 + 3n 2
n = n xx
xx yy
yy
xy
(7-114)
2 m m + m2 + 3m2
m = m xx
xx yy
yy
xy
(7-115)
1
1
mn = m xx n xx --- m xx n yy --- n xx m yy + m y n y + 3m xy n xy
2
2
(7-116)
Main Index
(7-117)
In our implementation we update the resultants elastically and check to see if the yield condition
is violated:
f ( m, n ) > n y2
(7-118)
:
n y2
----------------f ( m, n )
(7-119)
where
Ep
(7-120)
f ( m, n ) n y
peflaf st ic = --------------------------------h ( 3 G + Ep )
(7-121)
Kennedy, et. al., report that this model predicts results that may be too stiff; users of this model should
proceed cautiously.
In applying this material model to the Belytschko beam, the flow rule changes to
2 4m
2
4m
y
z
f ( m, n ) = f x2 + ---------- + ---------- n y2 = A 2 y2
3 I yy 3 I zz
(7-122)
have been updated elastically according to Equations (6-77) through (6-79). The yield condition is
checked Equation (7-118), and if it is violated, the resultants are scaled as described above.
This model is frequently applied to beams with nonrectangular cross sections. The accuracy of the results
obtained should be viewed with some healthy suspicion. No workhardening is available with this model.
Main Index
Membrane
ny =
Bending
= h y
my =
Figure 7-5
h--2
d
h y
--2
h--2
d
h y
--2
h2
= ----- y
4
Axial collapse occurs when the compressive axial load reaches the collapse load. The collapse loadversus-collapse deflection is specified in the form of a TABLED1. The points of the TABLED1 are (true
strain, collapse force). Both quantities should be entered as positive for all points, and will be interpreted
as compressive i.e., collapse does not occur in tension. The first point should be the pair (zero, initial
collapse load).
The collapse load may vary with end moment and with deflection. In this case, several load-deflection
curves are defined, each corresponding to a different end moment. Each TABLED1 should have the same
number of point pairs and the same deflection values. The end moment is defined as the average of the
absolute moments at each end of the beam, and is always positive.
It is not possible to make the plastic moment vary with axial load.
M8
M7
M6
M5
M4
Force
M3
M2
M1
Displacement
Figure 7-6
Main Index
For an intermediate value of the end moment, MD Nastran SOL 700 interpolates between the curves to
determine the allowable force.
A co-rotational technique and moment-curvature relations are used to compute the internal forces. The
co-rotational technique will not be treated here as we will focus solely on the internal force update and
computing the tangent stiffness. For this, we use the notation:
E
= Youngs modulus
= Shear modulus
As
ln
ln + 1
I yy
I zz
ei
yI
zI
We emphasize that the local y and z base vectors in the reference configuration always coincide with the
corresponding nodal vectors. The nodal vectors in the current configuration are updated using the
Hughes-Winget formula while the base vectors are computed from the current geometry of the element
and the current nodal vectors.
Internal Forces
Elastic Update
In the local system for a beam connected by nodes I and J, the axial force is updated as
el
el
fa = f a + K a
(7-123)
where
EA
el
K a = ------ln
(7-124)
= l n + 1 l n ..
(7-125)
Main Index
el
mt
el
= mt + Kt t
(7-126)
where
el
Kt
GJ
= -----ln
(7-127)
1 T
t = --- e l ( y I y J + z I z J ) .
2
(7-128)
el
(7-129)
el
el
(7-130)
m y = m y + A y y
m z = m z + A z z
where
1 E I ** 4 + * 2 *
el
-
A * = --------------- ---------
1 + * ln 2 4 +
*
*
(7-131)
12E I **
* = ------------------GA * l n t n
(7-132)
T
T
y = e 3 yI zI y J zJ
(7-133)
T
T
z = e 2 yI zI y J zJ
(7-134)
el
A*
Plastic Correction
After the elastic update the state of force is checked for yielding as follows. As a preliminary note we
emphasize that whenever yielding does not occur the elastic stiffnesses and forces are taken as the new
stiffnesses and forces.
The yield moments in direction i at node I as functions of plastic rotations are denoted mYi I ( iPI ) . This
function is given by the user but also depends on whether a plastic hinge has been created. Whenever the
elastic moment exceeds the plastic moment, the plastic rotations are updated as
P(n + 1)
iI
P(n)
= i I
el
m iI m iI
+ ----------------------------------------------------------------Y
m iI
el
ma x 0.001, A i ( I I ) + ---------P
iI
Main Index
(7-135)
n+1
P (n + 1)
= m iI ( iI
mi I
el
) sgn ( m iI )
(7-136)
el
A
el
i(I I)
-
= A i ( II ) 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------Y
m iI
el
-
ma x 0.001, A i ( I I ) + ---------P
iI
n+1
A i ( II )
where
(7-137)
is a parameter chosen such that the moment-rotation matrix remains positive definite.
The yield moment in torsion is given by mYt ( Pt ) and is provided by the user. If the elastic torsional
moment exceeds this value, the plastic torsional rotation is updated as
P (n + 1)
P(n)
= t
el
mt mt
+ --------------------------------------------------------------Y
m
el
ma x 0.0001, K t + ----------t
P
(7-138)
mt
P(n + 1)
= mt ( t
el
) sgn ( m t )
n+1
Kt
el
Kt
el
-
= K t 1 ------------------------Y
m
el
t
K t + ---------P
where again
(7-139)
Axial collapse is modeled by limiting the axial force by fYa ( , m ) ; i.e., a function of the axial strains and
the magnitude of bending moments. If the axial elastic force exceeds this value it is reduced to yield
n+1
fa
= fa (
n+1
,m
n+1
el
) sgn ( f a )
(7-140)
n+1
Ka
el f a
= ma x 0.05 K a , --------
We neglect the influence of change in bending moments when computing this parameter.
Main Index
(7-141)
Damping
Damping is introduced by adding a viscous term to the internal force on the form
d t
f v = D ----dt y
(7-142)
z
el
Ka
el
Kt
D =
(7-143)
el
Ay
el
Az
where
is a damping parameter.
Transformation
The internal force vector in the global system is obtained through the transformation
n+1
fg
n+1
(7-144)
= Sf t
where
e1 0 e3 l n + 1 e 3 l n + 1 e2 l n + 1
0 e1
S =
e1
e1
e2
e3
0
e3
ln + 1
0
ln + 1
e2
e3
e2
ln + 1
e2 ln + 1
0
e2 l n + 1
(7-145)
e3
n+1
fa
n+1
n+1
fl
mt
(7-146)
n+1
my
n+1
mz
Tangent Stiffness
Derivation
The tangent stiffness is derived from taking the variation of the internal force
n+1
f g
n+1
= Sf l
n+1
+ Sf l
f g
Main Index
= K geo u + K mat u
(7-147)
where
u = xTI TI xTJ Tj
(7-148)
There are two contributions to the tangent stiffness: geometrical and material. The geometrical
contribution is given (approximately) by
n+1
K geo = R ( f l
1 - n+1
I )W ----------------------L
Tf
ln + 1 ln + 1 l
(7-149)
where
R =
R1
R3 ln + 1
R1
R 2
R 3
R1
R1
R3 l n + 1 R 2 ln + 1 R2 ( n + 1 )
0
R3
ln + 1
ln + 1
R2
R 3
R2
0
R2 ln + 1
ln + 1
0
R 3
W = R 1 l n + 1 e 1 eT1 2 R 1 l n + 1 e 1 eT1 2
0 0 e3 e3 e 2
T =
(7-151)
e2
0 0 0
0 0 e3
0 0 0
e3 e2 e2
0 0 0
(7-150)
(7-152)
L = eT1 0 eT1 0
(7-153)
Ri v = ei v .
K mat = SK S T
where
n+1
Ka
n+1
K =
Kt
(7-156)
n+1
Ay
n+1
Az
Main Index
= pi + t
(7-157)
(7-158)
t = 2G ( e S L n )
Here K and G are bulk and shear modulii, and e are volumetric and shear logarithmic strains and
and L are constant material parameters. There is an option to define the bulk and shear modulii as
functions of the martensite fraction according to
K = KA + S ( K S KA )
G = G A + S ( G S GK A )
(7-159)
in case the stiffness of the martensite differs from that of the austenite. Furthermore, the unit vector n is
defined as
n = e ( e + 10 12 )
(7-160)
(7-161)
where
= ( 2G + 9 2 K ) L .
Main Index
(7-162)
AS
F Rs > 0
S = ( 1 S ) ------------------F>0
AS
F Rf
S < 1
SA
F Rs < 0
S = S ------------------F>0
SA
F Rf
S > 0
Here
AS
Rs
AS
Rf
SA
Rs
, and
SA
Rf
(7-163)
= J
(7-164)
di a g ( i )
= log ( J )
e i = log ( i J 1 3 )
where
J = 1 2 3
is the total Jacobian of the deformation. Using Equation (7-161) with S = Sn , a value F tri al of the loading
function can be computed. The discrete counterpart of Equation (7-163) becomes
AS
F tri al R s > 0
AS
AS
F t ria l S min ( ma x ( F n ,R s ) ,R f )
n
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------tri
al
n
(
1
F
F >0
S
S
S
AS
F tri al S R f
n
S < 1
(7-165)
n
F tri al F n > 0 S = ( S + S ) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S
A
F tri a l S R f
n
S < 1
Main Index
= S
, Fn + 1
using Equations (7-157), (7-158), (7-159), (7-164) and S = Sn . When phase transformation occurs
according to a condition to the left, the corresponding equation to the right is solved for S . If the bulk
n + 1
F tri al
as well as
depends on this
ES EA
F tri al = F ntri al 1 + ------------------- S
En
ES EA
= n 1 + ------------------- S
En
where
and
ES
EA
are Youngs modulii for martensite and austenite, respectively. The subscript n is
tn .
(7-166)
AS
f ( S ) = ( 1 S ) S + ( Rf
n
n
F AS + ( n F tri al ) ( 1 S ) ) S +
(7-167)
n n
t rial
( 1 S ) ( F AS F n ) = 0
and
n
n
2
SA
n
f ( S ) = S S + ( F SA R f + ( n F t ria l ) S ) S +
n n
tr ial
S ( F SA F n ) = 0
The solutions to these equations are approximated with two Newton iterations starting in the point
S = 0 ..
Now set
n+1
= min ( 1 ,ma x ( 0 , S + S ) )
and compute
Main Index
n + 1
and
Fn + 1
according to Equations
(7-168)
where I is the fourth order identity tensor. For the variation of martensite fraction, we introduce the
indicator parameters H AS and H SA that should give information of the probability of phase transformation
occurring in the next stress update. Set initially H AS = H SA = 0 and change them according to
AS
F tri al R s > 0
AS = 1
F tri al F n > 0 H
n
S + S 1
SA = 1
F tri al F n > 0 H
n
S + S 0
using the quantities computed in the previous stress update. For the variation of the martensite fraction
we take variations of Equations(7-167) and (7-168) with
tri al
F n
= 2 Gn: e + 3 K
which results in
S = ( 2 Gn: e + 3 K )
where
n
( 1 S ) H AS
S H SA
- + ------------------------------------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.
n
n
AS
t rial
n
SA
t ria l n
R f F A S + ( n F n ) ( 1 S ) F SA R f + ( n F n ) S
As can be seen, we use the value of obtained in the previous stress update since this is easier to
implement and will probably give a good indication of the current value of this parameter.
Main Index
results in
S L dev
- I
+ K ( 1 9 2 K L + 3 ( K S K A ) ( 3 S L ) )i i +
= 2 G 1 --------------------------
e
+ 10 12
2 G ( K S K A ) ( 3 S L ) i n + 6 K ( G S G A ) ( e S L )n i +
S L
2 G ------------------------------------ 2 G L + 2 ( G S G A ) ( e D L )
e + 1 10 12
n n 6K G L ( i n + n i ) }
where I dev is the fourth order deviatoric identity tensor. In general this tangent is not symmetric because
of the terms on the second line in the expression above. We simply use a symmetrization of the tangent
stiffness above in the implementation. Furthermore, we transform the tangent to a tangent closer related
to the one that should be used in the MD Nastran SOL 700 implementation,
S L dev
- I
C = J 1 2G 1 --------------------------+ K ( 1 9 2 K L + 3 ( K S K A ) ( 3 S L ) )i i +
e
+ 10 12
( G ( K S K A ) ( 3 S L ) + 3 K ( G S G A ) ( e S L ) 6 K G L ) ( i n + n i ) +
S L
- 2 G L + 2 ( G S G A ) ( e S L ) n n
2G -------------------------- e + 10 12
U,
Main Index
(7-169)
where the strain invariants can be expressed in terms of the deformation gradient matrix,
Green-St. Venant strain tensor, E ij :
F ij ,
and the
J = F ij
I1 = Ei i
I2 =
(7-170)
1 ij
--- pq E pi E qj
2
The derivative of
U
S i j = --------- E ij
(7-171)
where, S i j , is the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor which is transformed into the Cauchy stress tensor:
x i x j
i j = ----- --------- -------- S kl
o X k X l
where
and
(7-172)
Main Index
support compressive stresses; a material parameter flag is included for this option. A linear elastic liner
is also included which can be used to reduce the tendency for these material/elements to be crushed when
the no-compression option is invoked.
If the airbag material is to be approximated as an isotropic elastic material, then only one Youngs
modulus and Poissons ratio should be defined. The elastic approximation is very efficient because the
local transformations to the material coordinate system may be skipped. If orthotropic constants are
defined, it is very important to consider the orientation of the local material system and use great care in
setting up the finite element mesh.
If the reference configuration of the airbag is taken as the folded configuration, the geometrical accuracy
of the deployed bag will be affected by both the stretching and the compression of elements during the
folding process. Such element distortions are very difficult to avoid in a folded bag. By reading in a
reference configuration, such as the final unstretched configuration of a deployed bag, any distortions in
the initial geometry of the folded bag will have no effect on the final geometry of the inflated bag. This
is because the stresses depend only on the deformation gradient matrix:
x i
F ij = -------X j
(7-173)
where the choice of X j may coincide with the folded or unfold configurations. It is this unfolded
configuration which may be specified here. When the reference geometry is used, then the
no-compression option should be active. With the reference geometry, it is possible to shrink the airbag
and then perform the inflation. Although the elements in the shrunken bag are very small, the time step
can be based on the reference geometry so a very reasonable time step size is obtained. The reference
geometry based time step size is optional in the input.
The parameters fabric leakage coefficient, FLC, fabric area coefficient, FAC, and effective leakage area,
ELA, for the fabric in contact with the structure are optional for the Wang-Nefske and hybrid inflation
models. It is possible for the airbag to be constructed of multiple fabrics having different values of
porosity and permeability. The gas leakage through the airbag fabric then requires an accurate
determination of the areas by part ID available for leakage. The leakage area may change over time due
to stretching of the airbag fabric or blockage when the outer surface of the bag is in contact with the
structure. MD Nastran SOL 700 can check the interaction of the bag with the structure and split the areas
into regions that are blocked and unblocked depending on whether the regions are in contact or not,
respectively. Typically, the parameters, FLC and FAC, must be determined experimentally and their
variation with time and pressure are optional inputs that allow for maximum modeling flexibility.
Main Index
= 2 Y
(7-174)
where
K i = 1, 2
x h y
K 1 = --------------------2
(7-175)
2
x h y
2
--------------------+ p 2 xy
K2 =
R 00, R 45 ,
and
R 90 :
R 00 1 + R 90
a = 2 2 ------------------ -----------------1 + R 00 R 90
(7-176)
c = 2a
h =
R 00 1 + R 90
----------------- -----------------1 + R 00 R 90
The anisotropy parameter p is calculated implicitly. According to Barlat and Lian the
thickness strain ratio, for any angle can be calculated from:
value, width to
2 m Y
R = -------------------------------------- 1
--------- + --------
x y
(7-177)
where is the uniaxial tension in the direction. This expression can be used to iteratively calculate
the value of p . Let = 45 and define a function g as
m
2 m Y
1 R 45
g ( p ) = -------------------------------------- --------
-------+
x y
(7-178)
(7-179)
where yp is the elastic strain to yield and p is the effective plastic strain (logarithmic). If Y is set to
zero, the strain to yield if found by solving for the intersection of the linearly elastic loading equation
with the strain hardening equation:
= E
= k n
Main Index
(7-180)
yp
If
E
= ---
k
yp
1 ----------n1
(7-181)
y
= -----
k
1-n
(7-182)
F ( 22 33 ) + G ( 33 11 ) + H ( 11 22 ) + 2L 23 + 2 M 31 + 2 N 12 1 = 0
where y1, y2 , and y3 are the tensile yield stresses and 12, 23 , and
The constants F, G, H, L, M , and N are related to the yield stress by
1
2L = -------2
23
1
1
1
2F = -------+ ------- -------2
2
2
y2 y3 y1
1
2M = ---------2
y31
1
1
1
+ ------- -------2G = -------2
2
2
y3 y1 y2
1
2N = ---------2
y12
1
1
1
+ ------- -------2H = -------2
2
2
y1 y2 y3
and
Main Index
1
L = M = N = ---------2- .
2 y
y31
(7-183)
are the shear yield stresses.
(7-184)
For the particular case of transverse anisotropy, where properties do not vary in the
following relations hold:
x1 x2
plane, the
1
2 F = 2 G = -------2
y3
2
1
2H = -----2- -------2
y y3
(7-185)
1
2 1
N = -----2- --- -------2
y 2 y3
y
K = -------- ,
y3
y 1 = y 2 = y .
= e = y
(7-186)
where
1 2 2
2
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
F ( ) 11 + 22 + K 33 K 33 ( 11 + 22 ) ( 2 K ) 11 22 + 2 L y ( 23 + 31 ) + 2 2 --- K 12
2
p
y
12
is found from
(7-187)
Now consider the case of plane stress, where 33 = 0 . Also, define the anisotropy input parameter
the ratio of the in-plane plastic strain rate to the out-of-plane plastic strain rate:
p
22
.
R = ------p
33
as
(7-188)
(7-189)
Main Index
2R + 1 2
2R
2
2
11 + 22 ------------- 11 22 + 2 ----------------- 12
R+1
R+1
12
R,
2 I3
(7-191)
where is the shear modulus and I 1, I 2 , and I 3 are the strain invariants. Blatz and Ko [1962] suggested
this form for a 47 percent volume polyurethane foam rubber with a Poissons ratio of 0.25. The second
Piola-Kirchhoff stresses are given as
I2
1
S i j = ( I i j G ij ) ---- + I 3 ---- G ij
I3
I 3
where
(7-192)
x k x k
G i j = -------- -------X i X j
X i X j
G i j = -------- -------x k x k
after determining
Si j ,
x x
i j = ----- --------i- --------j S kl
o X k X l
where
and
(7-193)
fld
min or
workpiece
corresponding to
. This history variable replaces the effective plastic strain in the output.
Plastic strains can still be obtained but one additional history variable must be written into the D3PLOT
database.
The strains on which these calculations are based are integrated in time from the strain rates:
inj + 1 = inj +
1
1
n + --n + --2
2t
and are stored as history variables. The resulting strain measure is logarithmic.
Main Index
(7-194)
mnr = 0
Plane Strain
m jr
80
70
% MAJOR STRAIN
60
50
40
mnr
30
mj r
mnr
20
mjr
10
Draw
-50
-40
-30
Stretch
-20
-10
+10
+20
+30
+40
+50
% MINOR STRAIN
Figure 7-7
i j = i j ij
where
sk
i j
ai r
p0
air = ---------------------1+
Main Index
(7-195)
a ir
where p 0 is the initial foam pressure usually taken as the atmospheric pressure and
volumetric strain
defines the
= V 1 + 0
(7-197)
where V is the relative volume and 0 is the initial volumetric strain which is typically zero. The yield
condition is applied to the principal skeletal stresses which are updated independently of the air pressure.
We first obtain the skeletal stresses:
sk
i j = i j + i j air
(7-198)
i j
skt
i j
sk
= ij + E ij t
(7-199)
where E is Youngs modulus. Since Poissons ratio is zero, the update of each stress component is
uncoupled and 2G = E where G is the shear modulus. The yield condition is applied to the principal
skeletal stresses such that if the magnitude of a principal trial stress component,
stress, y , then
skt
skt
. isk
sk i
= min ( y, i ) -----------skt
i
(7-200)
(7-201)
where a, b , and c are user defined input constants. After scaling the principal stresses they are
transformed back into the global system and the final stress state is computed
i j = iskj ij ai r .
Main Index
then
aa 2
ab
e f2 = -------+ -------- 1
Xt
Sc
> 0 failed ,
< 0 elastic
(7-202)
E a = E b = G ab = ba = ab = 0
then
aa
e c2 = -------- 1
Xc
2
> 0 failed
,
< 0 elastic
(7-203)
E a = ba = ab = 0
then
bb 2
ab 2
e m2 = -------- + -------- 1
Yt
Sc
> 0 failed
,
< 0 elastic
(7-204)
E b = ba = 0. G ab = 0
then
bb
bb 2
Yc 2
ab 2
e d2 = -------- + -------- 1 -------- + -------- 1
2 S c
2S t
Yc
Sc
> 0 failed
< 0 elastic
(7-205)
E b = ba = ab = 0. G ab = 0
X c = 2Y c
In the Tsai/Wu criteria the tensile and compressive fiber modes are treated as in the Chang/Chang criteria.
The failure criterion for the tensile and compressive matrix mode is given as:
2
bb
ab 2 ( Y c Y t ) bb
2
- + -------= ---------+ ------------------------------- 1
e md
Yc Y t
Sc
Y c Yt
> 0 failed
< 0 elastic
(7-206)
For
= 1,
we get the original criterion of Hashin [1980] in the tensile fiber mode.
For
= 0,
we get the maximum stress criterion which is found to compare better to experiments.
Main Index
When failure has occurred in all the composite layers (through-thickness integration points), the element
is deleted. Elements which share nodes with the deleted element become crashfront elements and can
have their strengths reduced by using the SOFT parameter with TFAIL greater than zero.
Information about the status in each layer (integration point) and element can be plotted using additional
integration point variables. The number of additional integration point variables for shells written to the
database is input by the PARAM, DYNEIPS definition as variable NEIPS. For Models 54 and 55 these
additional variables are tabulated below (i = shell integration point):
History
Variable
Description
Value
d3plot
Component
1. ef(i)
2. ec(i)
1 - elastic
82
3. em(i)
0 - failed
83
4. ed(i)
84
5. efail
max[ef(ip)]
85
6. dam
damage parameter
81
-1 - element intact
10-8 - element in crashfront
+1 - element failed
86
These variables can be plotted in MD Patran as element components 81, 82, ..., 80+ NEIPS. The
following components, defined by the sum of failure indicators over all through-thickness integration
points, are stored as element component 7 instead of the effective plastic strain:
Description
Integration Point
ni p
1
-------ni p
ef(i)
i =1
ni p
1
-------ni p
e c (i )
i =1
ni p
1
-------ni p
cm(i)
i =1
Main Index
Shkolnikov [1991] and a paper by Storakers [1986]. The recent additions necessary to model hysteretic
unloading and rate effects are due to Chang, et. al., [1994]. These latter additions have greatly expanded
the usefulness of this model.
Unloading
Curves
Strain
Figure 7-8
Strain
The model uses tabulated input data for the loading curve where the nominal stresses are defined as a
function of the elongations, i , which are defined in terms of the principal stretches, i , as:
i = i 1
(7-207)
The stretch ratios are found by solving for the eigenvalues of the left stretch tensor, V ij , which is obtained
via a polar decomposition of the deformation gradient matrix, F ij :
F ij = R i k U kj = V i k R kj
(7-208)
The update of V ij follows the numerically stable approach of Taylor and Flanagan [1989]. After solving
for the principal stretches, the elongations are computed and, if the elongations are compressive, the
corresponding values of the nominal stresses, i , are interpolated. If the elongations are tensile, the
nominal stresses are given by
i = E i
(7-209)
The stresses are then transformed back into the global system for the nodal force calculations.
Main Index
(7-210)
When hysteretic unloading is used, the reloading will follow the unloading curve if the decay constant,
, is set to zero. If is nonzero the decay to the original loading curve is governed by the expression:
1 e t
(7-211)
The bulk viscosity, which generates a rate dependent pressure, may cause an unexpected volumetric
response and, consequently, it is optional with this model.
Rate effects are accounted for through linear viscoelasticity by a convolution integral of the form
i j =
kl
g i jkl ( t )
is the relaxation function. The stress tensor, , irj augments the stresses determined from
0 g ij kl ( t ) --------
where
the foam,
ifj ;
(7-212)
i j ,
i j = ifj + irj
(7-213)
Since we wish to include only simple rate effects, the relaxation function is represented by one term from
the Prony series:
N
g ( t ) = 0 +
m e t
(7-214)
m=1
given by,
g ( t ) = Ed e
1 t
(7-215)
This model is effectively a Maxwell fluid which consists of a damper and spring in series. We
characterize this in the input by a Young's modulus, E d , and decay constant, 1 . The formulation is
performed in the local system of principal stretches where only the principal values of stress are
computed and triaxial coupling is avoided. Consequently, the one-dimensional nature of this foam
material is unaffected by this addition of rate effects. The addition of rate effects necessitates twelve
additional history variables per integration point. The cost and memory overhead of this model comes
primarily from the need to remember the local system of principal stretches.
Main Index
(7-216)
thus, the damage value is slightly modified such that elastoplastic like behavior is achieved with the
threshold stress. As a factor for S LIM xx a number between 0.0 and 1.0 is possible. With a factor of 1.0,
the stress remains at a maximum value identical to the strength, which is similar to ideal elastoplastic
behavior. For tensile failure a small value for S LIM Tx is often reasonable; however, for compression
S LIM Cx = 1.0 is preferred. This is also valid for the corresponding shear value. If S LIM xx is smaller than
1.0, then localization can be observed depending on the total behavior of the lay-up. If the user is
intentionally using S LIM xx < 1.0 , it is generally recommended to avoid a drop to zero and set the value to
something in between 0.05 and 0.10.
Then elastoplastic behavior is achieved in the limit which often leads to less numerical problems.
Defaults for S LIM xx = 1.0 E-8 .
The crashfront-algorithm is started if and only if a value for TSIZE (time step size, with element
elimination after the actual time step becomes smaller than TSIZE) is input
The damage parameters can be written to the postprocessing database for each integration point as the
first three additional element variables and can be visualized.
Material models with FS=1 or FS=-1 are favorable for complete laminates and fabrics, as all directions
are treated in a similar fashion.
For material model FS=1, an interaction between normal stresses and shear stresses is assumed for the
evolution of damage in the a- and b-directions. For the shear damage is always the maximum value of
the damage from the criterion in a- or b- direction is taken.
For material model FS=-1, it is assumed that the damage evolution is independent of any of the other
stresses. A coupling is present only via the elastic material parameters and the complete structure.
In tensile and compression directions and in a- as well as in b- direction, different failure surfaces can be
assumed. The damage values, however, increase only when the loading direction changes.
Special Control of Shear Behavior of Fabrics
For fabric materials a nonlinear stress strain curve for the shear part of failure surface FS=-1 can be
assumed as given below. This is not possible for other values of FS. The curve, shown in Figure 19.58.1,
is defined by three points:
a. a) the origin (0,0) is assumed,
b. the limit of the first slightly nonlinear part (must be input), stress (TAU1) and strain
(GAMMA1), see below.
c. the shear strength at failure and shear strain at failure.
In addition, a stress limiter can be used to keep the stress constant via the SLIMS parameter. This value
must be less than or equal to 1.0 and positive, which leads to an elastoplastic behavior for the shear part.
The default is 1.0E-08, assuming almost brittle failure once the strength limit SC is reached.
Main Index
SC
TAU1
SLIMS*SC
GAMMA1
Figure 7-9
GMS
V2
Figure 7-10
Both
E1
and
E 1t = E 1 ( V
n1
E2
V 2t = V 2 ( ab s ( 1 V ) )
n2
(7-217)
where V is the relative volume defined by the ratio of the current to initial volume. Typical values are
(units of N ,m m, s )
Main Index
E 1 = 0.0036
n 1 = 4.0
V 2 = 0.0015
E 2 = 100.0
n 2 = 0.2
= 0.05
(7-218)
The magnitudes of the principal values, it ria l , i = 1 ,3 , are then checked to see if the yield stress,
exceeded and if so they are scaled back to the yield surface:
if
y < it ria l
then
it ria l
in + 1 = y --------------- it ria l
y ,
is
(7-219)
After the principal values are scaled, the stress tensor is transformed back into the global system. As seen
in Figure 7-11, the yield stress is a function of the natural logarithm of the relative volume, V ; i.e., the
volumetric strain.
Main Index
ij
b
Volumetric Strain ln V
Figure 7-11
Yield Stress Versus Volumetric Strain Curve for the Crushable Foam
= k m n
(7-220)
where is the yield stress, is the effective plastic strain, is the effective plastic strain rate, and the
constants, k , m , and n can be expressed as functions of effective plastic strain or can be constant with
respect to the plastic strain. The case of no strain hardening can be obtained by setting the exponent of
the plastic strain equal to a very small positive value; i.e., 0.0001.
This model can be combined with the superplastic forming input to control the magnitude of the pressure
in the pressure boundary conditions in order to limit the effective plastic strain rate so that it does not
exceed a maximum value at any integration point within the model.
A fully viscoplastic formulation is optional. An additional cost is incurred but the improvement is results
can be dramatic.
(T)
( C 3 + C 4 ln ( * ) )
= C1 + C 2 ( p ) 1 2 e
+ C 3 ------------------
( 293 )
p =
Main Index
(7-221)
* = ---0
0 = 1 ,
( C 3 + c 4 lm ( * ) )
(T)
+ [ C 5 ( p ) n + C 6 ] ------------------
( 293 )
(7-222)
where
(T) ----------------= B1 + B2 T + B3 T 2
( 293 )
(7-223)
The relationship between heat capacity (specific heat) and temperature may be characterized by a cubic
polynomial equation as follows:
Cp = G1 + G2 T + G 3 T 2 + G4 T 3
(7-224)
A fully viscoplastic formulation is optional. An additional cost is incurred but the improvement in results
can be dramatic.
Main Index
R
E
S
U
L
T
A
N
T
R
E
S
U
L
T
A
N
T
DISPLACEMENT
(a)
Figure 7-12
DISPLACEMENT
(b)
R
E
S
U
L
T
A
N
T
PLASTIC DISPLACEMENT
Figure 7-13
Main Index
Catastrophic failure, based on force resultants, occurs if the following inequality is satisfied:
F r 2 F s 2 Ft 2 M r 2 Ms 2 Mt 2
- + ----------- + ----------- + ------------ + ------------ + ------------ 1 0
--------- F rfail
F sf ai l
F tfail
M rfail
M sf ai l
M tf ai l
(7-225)
(7-226)
After failure, the discrete element is deleted. If failure is included, either one or both of the criteria may
be used.
Cl
F = S F K A p V p -----t- + C 2 V p fl ui d ----------t- 1 f ( s + s 0 ) + V p g ( s + s 0 ) }
C A0
A0
where
(7-227)
is a user defined constant or a tabulated function of the absolute value of the relative velocity,
is the piston's relative velocity, C is the discharge coefficient, A p is the piston area, A 0t is the total
open areas of orifices at time t , fl ui d is the fluid density, C 1 is the coefficient for the linear term, and C 2
is the coefficient for the quadratic term.
Vp
In the implementation, the orifices are assumed to be circular with partial covering by the orifice
controller. As the piston closes, the closure of the orifice is gradual. This gradual closure is taken into
account to insure a smooth response. If the piston stroke is exceeded, the stiffness value, k , limits further
movement; i.e., if the damper bottoms out in tension or compression, the damper forces are calculated by
replacing the damper by a bottoming out spring and damper, k and c , respectively. The piston stroke
must exceed the initial length of the beam element. The time step calculation is based in part on the
stiffness value of the bottoming out spring. A typical force versus displacement curve at constant relative
velocity with only the linear velocity term active is shown in Figure 7-15. The factor, S F , which scales
the force defaults to 1.0 and is analogous to the adjusting ring on the damper.
Main Index
Figure 7-14
F
O
R
C
E
Last orfice
closes
Figure 7-15
Main Index
Figure 7-16
As the damper is compressed two actions contribute to the force that develops. First, the gas is
adiabatically compressed into a smaller volume. Secondly, oil is forced through an orifice. A profiled pin
may occupy some of the cross-sectional area of the orifice; thus, the orifice area available for the oil
varies with the stroke. The force is assumed proportional to the square of the velocity and inversely
proportional to the available area. The equation for this element is:
C0 n
V 2
F = S CLF K h ----- + P 0 ---------------- P a A p
C 0 S
a 0
where
(7-228)
where
F,
L = c u rre nt le ng t h ( i ni ti a l l en gt h of fs et )
(7-230)
Main Index
(7-231)
The area and offset are defined on either the cross section or element cards in the SOL 700 input. For a
slack cable the offset should be input as a negative length. For an initial tensile force the offset should be
positive. If a TABLED1 is specified, the Youngs modulus will be ignored and the TABLED1 will be used
instead. The points on the TABLED1 are defined as engineering stress versus engineering strain; i.e., the
change in length over the initial length. The unloading behavior follows the loading.
where
kl
g i jkl ( t )
- d
0 g ij kl ( t ) --------
the foam,
ifj
(7-232)
i j ,
from
i j = ifj + irj
(7-233)
Since we wish to include only simple rate effects, the relaxation function is represented by up to six terms
of the Prony series:
N
g ( t ) = 0 +
m e t
(7-234)
m=1
This model is effectively a Maxwell fluid which consists of a dampers and springs in series. The
formulation is performed in the local system of principal stretches where only the principal values of
stress are computed and triaxial coupling is avoided. Consequently, the one-dimensional nature of this
foam material is unaffected by this addition of rate effects. The addition of rate effects necessitates 42
additional history variables per integration point. The cost and memory overhead of this model comes
primarily from the need to remember the local system of principal stretches and the evaluation of the
viscous stress components
Main Index
F,
is given by:
(7-235)
where
f(L) .
L
F = F 0 + K f ( L ) 1 + C 1 L + C 2 sgn ( L ) ln ma x 1. ,------------
D LE
(7-236)
+ D L + g ( L ) h ( L )
where C 1 and C2 are damping coefficients for nonlinear behavior, DL E is a factor to scale time units,
and g ( L ) . is an optional TABLED1 defining a scale factor versus deflection for TABLED1 ID, h ( L d t ) .
In these equations,
L = currentlength initiallength .
Failure can occur in either compression or tension based on displacement values of CDF and TDF,
respectively. After failure no forces are carried. Compressive failure does not apply if the spring is
initially zero length.
The cross sectional area is defined on the beam property card for the discrete beam elements. The
square root of this area is used as the contact thickness offset if these elements are included in the
contact treatment.
kl
g i jkl ( t )
- d
0 gij kl ( t ) --------
where
(7-237)
If we wish to include only simple rate effects for the deviatoric stresses, the relaxation function is
represented by six terms from the Prony series:
N
g(t) =
Gm e
m t
(7-238)
m=1
Main Index
i .
An arbitrary number of
Figure 7-17
Note:
Relaxation Curve
This curve defines stress versus time where time is defined on a logarithmic scale. For best
results, the points defined in the TABLED1 should be equally spaced on the logarithmic
scale. Furthermore, the TABLED1 should be smooth and defined in the positive quadrant.
If nonphysical values are determined by least squares fit, SOL 700 will terminate with an
error message after the initialization phase is completed. If the ramp time for loading is
included, then the relaxation which occurs during the loading phase is taken into account.
This effect may or may not be important.
For volumetric relaxation, the relaxation function is also represented by the Prony series in terms of
bulk modulii:
N
k(t) =
Km e
k t
m
(7-239)
m= 1
Main Index
W ( J 1 ,J 2 ,J ) =
C pq ( J 1 3 ) p ( J 2 3 ) q + W H ( J )
(7-240)
p ,q = 0
J1 =
I 1 I 3 1 2
J 2 = I 2 I 3 1 2
In order to prevent volumetric work from contributing to the hydrostatic work the first and second
invariants are modified as shown. This procedure is described in more detail by Sussman and Bathe
[1987]. For the Ogden model the energy equation is given as:
3
W =
* 1
- (
---j i
1
1 ) + --- K ( J 1 ) 2
2
(7-241)
i = 1j = 1
where the asterisk ( * ) indicates that the volumetric effects have be eliminated from the principal
stretches, j* . See Ogden [1984] for more details.
Rate effects are taken into account through linear viscoelasticity by a convolution integral of the form:
i j =
kl
- d
0 gij kl ( t ) --------
(7-242)
Si j ,
E ij ,
(7-243)
where g i jkl ( t ) and G i jkl ( t ) are the relaxation functions for the different stress measures. This stress
is added to the stress tensor determined from the strain energy functional.
If we wish to include only simple rate effects, the relaxation function is represented by six terms from the
Prony series:
N
g ( t ) = 0 +
m e t
(7-244)
m= 1
given by,
n
g(t) =
Gi e
i t
(7-245)
j =1
This model is effectively a Maxwell fluid which consists of a dampers and springs in series. We
characterize this in the input by shear moduli, G i , and decay constants, i . The viscoelastic behavior is
optional and an arbitrary number of terms may be used.
The Mooney-Rivlin rubber model is obtained by specifying n + 2 . In spite of the differences in
formulations with Model 27, we find that the results obtained with this model are nearly identical with
those of Model 27 as long as large values of Poissons ratio are used.
Main Index
When viscoelastic terms are not included, this model is similar to the use of the Ogden model in solution
600, defined on the MATHE option.
where
J2
1
J 2 = --- S i j S i j
2
1.0
Figure 7-18
Main Index
and 2 are tabulated functions of pressure that are defined by TABLED1s (see Figure 7-19). The values
on the curves are pressure versus strain and should be entered in order of increasing pressure. The strain
values should always increase monotonically with pressure.
By properly defining the TABLED1s, it is possible to obtain the desired strength and ductility over a range
of pressure. (see Figure 7-20).
P
Figure 7-19
Yield Stress
p3
p2
p1
Plastic Strain
Figure 7-20
Main Index
where G 0 and K 0 are the input values, p is the current pressure, p o the cut-off or referencepressure (must
be zero or negative). If p attempts to fall below p o (i.e., more tensile) the shear stresses are set to zero
and the pressure is set to p o . Thus, the material has no stiffness orstrength in tension. The pressure in
compression is calculated as follows:
1 -----------
p = [ K 0 ln ( V ) ] 1 b
where
is the relative volume; i.e., the ratio between the original and current volume.
Main Index
if 0
if < 0
(7-246)
where is the shear strain and is the shear stress. The model approaches perfect plasticity as the stress
exponent r . These equations must be augmented to correctly model unloading and reloading
material behavior. The first load reversal is detected by < 0 . After the first reversal, the stress-strain
relationship is modified to
( 0)
( 0 )
( 0 )
------------------- = ------------------ + -----------------2 y
2 y
2 y
( 0)
( 0 )
( 0 )
------------------- = ------------------ -----------------2 y
2 y
2 y
where
and
if 0
if < 0
(7-247)
represent the values of strain and stress at the point of load reversal. Subsequent load
( 0 ) & < 0 .
The Ramberg-Osgood equations are inherently one-dimensional and are assumed to apply to shear
components. To generalize this theory to the multidimensional case, it is assumed that each component
of the deviatoric stress and deviatoric tensorial strain is independently related by the one-dimensional
stress-strain equations. A projection is used to map the result back into deviatoric stress space if required.
The volumetric behavior is elastic, and, therefore, the pressure p is found by
(7-248)
p = K v
where
Main Index
yield
Nominal stress
after failure
0
Failure Begins
= 0
= 1
eff
Rupture
Figure 7-21
Two options to account for strain rate effects are possible. Strain rate may be accounted for using the
Cowper and Symonds model which scales the yield stress with the factor,
1p
1 + ----
C
where
(7-249)
p 1p
ef f
p p
p
------, eff ) = ys ( ef
y ( eff
f ) + SI GY C
(7-250)
where the plastic strain rate is used. If SIGY=0, the following equation is used instead where the static
p
stress, ys ( eff
) , must be defined by a TABLED1:
p
ef f 1 p
p p
y ( eff
, ef f ) = ys 1 + --------
C
Main Index
(7-251)
For complete generality a TABLED1 (LCSR) to scale the yield stress may be input instead. In this curve
the scale factor versus strain rate is defined.
The constitutive properties for the damaged material are obtained from the undamaged material
properties. The amount of damage evolved is represented by the constant, , which varies from zero if
no damage has occurred to unity for complete rupture. For uniaxial loading, the nominal stress in the
damaged material is given by:
P
nominal = --A
where
(7-252)
is the applied load and A is the surface area. The true stress is given by:
P
t rue = ---------------------A A l os s
where
A loss
(7-253)
A loss
= -----------A
01
(7-254)
In this model damage is defined in terms of plastic strain after the failure strain is exceeded:
p
p
ef
f f ai lu re
= -----------------------------------------p
rapt ur e fpai lu re
if
p p
fpai lu re eff
ru pt ur e
(7-255)
After exceeding the failure strain softening begins and continues until the rupture strain is reached.
By default, deletion of the element occurs when all integration points in the shell have failed.
Note in Figure 7-22 that the origin of the curve is at (0,0). It is permissible to input the failure strain, f s ,
as zero for this option. The nonlinear damage curve is useful for controlling the softening behavior after
the failure strain is reached.
Damage
eff f s
Figure 7-22
Main Index
Failure
Figure 7-23
The strain is divided into two parts: a linear part and a non-linear part of the strain
E ( t ) = EL ( t ) + EN ( t )
(7-256)
(7-257)
EN .
(t) =
[ E tN ( ) ,S ( t ) ] d
(7-258)
=0
where
S (t )
E tN ( ) = E N ( t )
Main Index
(7-259)
(7-260)
It is assumed that the material remembers only its immediate past, i.e., a neighborhood about
Therefore, an expansion of E tN ( ) in a Taylor series about = 0 yields:
= 0.
E tN
E tN ( ) = E N ( 0 ) + ---------- ( 0 )d t
t
(7-261)
E tN
---------t
(7-262)
by
E N ,
and
(7-263)
we may write
E tN = f ( S ( t ), s ( t ) )
(7-264)
which states that the nonlinear strain rate is the function of stress and a state variable which represents
the history of loading. Therefore, the proposed kinetic equation for foam materials is:
t r ( S )- 2n 0
E N = --------- D 0 exp c 0 --------------- ( 2)
where
c0
D 0, c 0
D0 = 0
or
n
n
S i j = [ c 1 ( a i j R c 2 S ij ) P + c 3 W 1 ( W N ) 2 I i j ]R
(7-266)
n3
E N
R = 1 + c 4 ------------ 1
c5
(7-267)
P =
tr ( E
N)
(7-268)
W =
t r ( dE )
(7-269)
where
c 1, c 2, c 3, c 4, c 5, n 1, n 2, n 3,
= ( ij i j ) 1 / 2
= ( E ij E i j ) 1 / 2
EN
Main Index
(7-265)
N N
( E i j E i j ) 1 / 2
and
aij
(7-270)
In the implementation by Fu Chang the model was simplified such that the input constants
state variables S i j are scalars.
ai j
and the
W ( J 1 ,J 2 ,J ) =
C pq ( J 1 3 ) p ( J 2 3 ) q + W H ( J )
p, q = 0
J1 =
(7-271)
1 3
I1 I 3
2 3
J2 = I2 I 3
In order to prevent volumetric work from contributing to the hydrostatic work the first and second
invariants are modified as shown. This procedure is described in more detail by Sussman and
Bathe [1987].
The effects of confined air pressure in its overall response characteristics are included by augmenting the
stress state within the element by the air pressure.
i j = iskj ij ai r
where
iskj
(7-272)
a ir
p0
air = ---------------------1+
(7-273)
where p 0 is the initial foam pressure usually taken as the atmospheric pressure and
volumetric strain
= V 1 + 0
defines the
(7-274)
where V is the relative volume of the voids and 0 is the initial volumetric strain which is typically zero.
The rubber skeletal material is assumed to be incompressible.
Rate effects are taken into account through linear viscoelasticity by a convolution integral of the form:
i j =
kl
- dt
0 g ij kl ( t ) --------
Main Index
(7-275)
Si j ,
E kl
Si j =
- dt
0 G ij kl ( t ) ---------
(7-276)
where g i jkl ( t ) and G i jkl ( t ) are the relaxation functions for the different stress measures. This stress
is added to the stress tensor determined from the strain energy functional.
Since we wish to include only simple rate effects, the relaxation function is represented by one term from
the Prony series:
N
g ( t ) = a0 +
m + e t
(7-277)
m=1
given by
g ( t ) = Ed e
1 t
(7-278)
This model is effectively a Maxwell fluid which consists of a damper and spring in series. We
characterize this in the input by a shear modulus, G , and decay constant, 1 .
The Mooney-Rivlin rubber model is obtained by specifying n = 1 . In spite of the differences in
formulations with Model 27, we find that the results obtained with this model are nearly identical with
those of 27 as long as large values of Poissons ratio are used. By setting the initial air pressure to zero,
an open cell, cellular rubber can be simulated as shown in Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24
Main Index
where
L plasti c
(7-279)
F T = F n + K L t
(7-280)
F:
if F T > F Y
if F T F Y
(7-281)
The final force, which includes rate effects and damping, is given by:
L
F n + 1 = F 1 + C1 L + C2 sgn ( L ) ln ma x 1. ,------------ + D L + g ( L ) h ( L )
D
LE
where
C 1 , C2
DL E
(7-282)
Unless the origin of the curve starts at (0,0), the negative part of the curve is used when the spring force
is negative where the negative of the plastic displacement is used to interpolate, F y . The positive part of
the curve is used whenever the force is positive. In these equations, L is the change in length
L = current length initial length
Main Index
y = ( A + B p ) ( 1 + c ln * )
where
A, B, C and n are input constants
p
* = ---0
0 = 1 s 1
Main Index
N rt 2
---------- +
N rt F
M rr 2
------------ +
M rr F
M ss 2
T rr 2
------------ 1 ---------- = 0
M ss F
T rr F
(7-283)
Figure 7-25
Deformable Spotwelds
where the numerators in the equation are the resultants calculated in the local coordinates of the cross
section, and the denominators are the values specified in the input. If the user defined parameter, NF,
which the number of force vectors stored for filtering, is nonzero the resultants are filtered before failure
is checked. The default value is set to zero which is generally recommended unless oscillatory resultant
forces are observed in the time history databases. Even though these welds should not oscillate
significantly, this option was added for consistency with the other spot weld options. NF affects the
storage since it is necessary to store the resultant forces as history variables.
If the failure strain is set to zero, the failure strain model is not used. In a similar manner, when the value
of a resultant at failure is set to zero, the corresponding term in the failure surface is ignored. For example,
if only N rr is nonzero, the failure surface is reduced to N rr = N rr . None, either, or both of the failure
F
Main Index
The constitutive properties for the damaged material are obtained from the undamaged material
properties. The amount of damage evolved is represented by the constant, , which varies from zero if
no damage has occurred to unity for complete rupture. For uniaxial loading, the nominal stress in the
damaged material is given by
P
nominal = --A
where
(7-284)
P
t rue = ---------------------A A l os s
where
A loss
(7-285)
A loss
= -----------A
01
(7-286)
In this model damage is defined in terms of plastic strain after the failure strain is exceeded:
p
(7-287)
After exceeding the failure strain softening begins and continues until the rupture strain is reached.
Main Index
Nx
Ny
N xy
A 11 A 12 A 16 x0
A 21 A 22 A 26 y0
A 16 A 26 A 66 z0
B 11 B 12 B 16
+
B 21 B 22 B 26
B 16 B 26 B 66
Mx
My
M xy
B 11 B 12 B 16 x0
B 21 B 22 B 26 y0
B 16 B 26 B 66 z0
D 11 D 12 D 16
+ D 21 D 22 D 26
D 16 D 26 D 66
xy
xy
(7-288)
where
A ij
Di j
B ij
is a null matrix for symmetric lay-ups. The mid-surface strains and curvatures are denoted by i0j and ij ,
respectively. Since these stiffness matrices are symmetric, 18 terms are needed per shell element in
addition to the shell resultants, which are integrated in time. This is considerably less storage than would
typically be required with through thickness integration which requires a minimum of eight history
variables per integration point; e.g., if 100 layers are used, 800 history variables would be stored. Not
only is memory much less for this model, but the CPU time required is also considerably reduced.
(7-289)
ur
us
ut
t
s
t
- + ------------ + ------------ + ------------ + ------------ + ------------ 1. 0
----------- u rcf ai l
u scfai l
u tcfail
rcf ai l
scf ai l
tcf a il
2
After failure the discrete element is deleted. If failure is included either the tension failure or the
compression failure or both may be used.
R
E
S
U
L
T
A
N
T
R
E
S
U
L
T
A
N
T
Unloading Curve
Loading-unloading Curve
DISPLACEMENT
DISPLACEMENT
Unload = 0
R
E
S
U
L
T
A
N
T
Unloading Curve
Unload = 1
R
E
S
U
L
T
A
N
T
Unloading Curve
DISPLACEMENT
DISPLACEMENT
Umin
Unload = 2
Figure 7-26
Main Index
OFFSET x Umin
Unload = 3
if
pc p
sc ale = p--------------- pt p p c
c + pt
= sc ale f ( p ) + ( 1 sc ale ) f ( p )
t
c
y
Strain rate is accounted for using the Cowper and Symonds model, which scales the yield stress with
the factor
1/p
1 + ----
C
where
(7-290)
i j ij .
G a b = G ab u + ( G G a b u )
E bb = E bbu + bb ( E E bbu )
G b c = G bcu + ( G G bcu )
E cc = E ccu + cc ( E E ccu )
G ca = G cau + ( G G cau )
(7-291)
where
1v
B = ma x min ------------- ,1 , 0
1 vf
Main Index
(7-292)
and
is the elastic shear modulus for the fully compacted honeycomb material
E
G = ---------------------2(1 + )
(7-293)
The relative volume, , is defined as the ratio of the current volume over the initial volume, and typically,
V = 1 at the beginning of a calculation.
The TABLED1s define the magnitude of the stress as the material undergoes deformation. The first value
in the curve should be less than or equal to zero corresponding to tension and increase to full compaction.
Care should be taken when defining the curves so the extrapolated values do not lead to negative
yield stresses.
At the beginning of the stress update we transform each elements stresses and strain rates into the local
element coordinate system. For the uncompacted material, the trial stress components are updated using
the elastic interpolated modulii according to:
n+1
aa
t rial
n + E
= aa
aa
aa
anb+ 1
t ria l
= anb + 2 G a b ab
n+1
bb
t rial
n + E
= bb
bb
bb
bnc+ 1
t ria l
= bnc + 2 G b c b c
n+1
cc
t rial
n + E
= cc
cc
cc
n+1
ca
t ria l
n + 2G
= ca
ca
ca
(7-294)
We then independently check each component of the updated stresses to ensure that they do not exceed
the permissible values determined from the TABLED1s, e.g., if
inj + 1
t rial
> i j ( i j )
(7-295)
then
tri al
ijn + 1
inj + 1 = i j ( ij ) -------------------------t rial
in + 1
(7-296)
The components of i j ( ij ) are defined by TABLED1s. The parameter is either unity or a value taken
from the TABLED1 number, LCSR, that defines as a function of strain-rate. Strain-rate is defined here
as the Euclidean norm of the deviatoric strain-rate tensor.
For fully compacted material we assume that the material behavior is elastic-perfectly plastic and updated
the stress components according to:
s itjrial = s ijn + 2G ijdev
n+12
(7-297)
Main Index
(7-298)
We now check to see if the yield stress for the fully compacted material is exceeded by comparing
3
t rial
s eff
= --- s ijtri al s ijtri al
2
12
(7-299)
the effective trial stress to the yield stress, y . If the effective trial stress exceeds the yield stress, we
simply scale back the stress components to the yield surface
y t rial
-s
s inj + 1 = ----------t rial i j
s eff
(7-300)
We can now update the pressure using the elastic bulk modulus,
n+12
p n + 1 = p n K kk
(7-301)
E
K = ------------------------3 (1 2 )
(7-302)
After completing the stress update we transform the stresses back to the global configuration.
In Figure 7-27, note that the "yield stress" at a strain of zero is nonzero. In the TABLED1 definition, the
"time" value is the directional strain and the "function" value is the yield stress.
Figure 7-27
Main Index
(7-303)
J 1 3
J2 = I2 J
K,
and J , as:
K
W H ( J ) = ---- ( H 1 ) 2
2
(7-304)
Rate effects are taken into account through linear viscoelasticity by a convolution integral of the form:
kl
- d
0 g ij kl ( t ) --------
i j =
Si j =
- d
0 G ij kl ( t ) ---------
(7-305)
Si j ,
where g i jkl ( t ) and G i jkl ( t ) are the relaxation functions for the different stress measures. This stress
is added to the stress tensor determined from the strain energy functional.
If we wish to include only simple rate effects, the relaxation function is represented by six terms from the
Prony series:
N
g ( t ) = 0 +
m e t
(7-307)
m=1
given by,
N
g(t) =
Gi e
i t
(7-308)
i =1
This model is effectively a Maxwell fluid which consists of a dampers and springs in series. We
characterize this in the input by shear moduli, G i , and decay constants, i . The viscoelastic behavior is
optional and an arbitrary number of terms may be used.
Main Index
When viscoelastic terms are not included, this model is similar to the use of the Arruda Boyce model in
solution 600, defined in the MATHE option. When viscoelasticity is included, the formulation of these
two models are different.
kl
- d
0 gij kl ( t ) --------
t
(7-309)
where g i jkl t is the relaxation function for different stress measures. This stress is added to the stress
tensor determined from the strain energy functional. Since we wish to include only simple rate effects,
the relaxation function is represented by six terms from the Prony series:
N
g(t) =
Gm e
m t
m=1
We characterize this in the input by the shear moduli, G i , and the decay constants, i . An arbitrary
number of terms, not exceeding 6, may be used when applying the viscoelastic model. The composite
failure is not directly affected by the presence of the viscous stress tensor.
Main Index
( no sum )
(7-310)
that are transformed to the standard basis using the standard formula
E
i j = q ik q jl kl
(7-311)
The q i j are the components of the orthogonal tensor containing the eigenvectors of the principal basis.
The Cauchy stress is then given by
i j = J 1 ij
where
J = 1 2 3
(7-312)
is the relative volume change.
The constitutive tensor that relates the rate of deformation to the Truesdell (convected) rate of Kirchhoff
stress can in the principal basis be expressed as
iEi
C iiTKE
= j -------- 2 iEi ij
jj
j
j2 iEi i2 jEj
= ------------------------------C ijTKE
ij
12 j2
i j ,( i j )
i iiE iEi
C ijTKE
= ---- --------- ---------
ij
2 i j
i j , i = j
(no sum)
(7-313)
(7-314)
and finally the constitutive tensor relating the rate of deformation to the Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress
is obtained through
K
C ijTCkl = J 1 C iTjkl
(7-315)
1
iE = f ( i ) + K ( J 1 ) --3
f ( k )
(7-316)
k=1
where f is a TABLED1 determined from uniaxial data (possible at different strain rates). Furthermore, K
is the bulk modulus and J is the relative volume change of the material. This stress cannot be deduced
from a strain energy function unless f ( ) = E ln for some constitutive parameter E . A consequence of
this is that when using the formulas in the previous section the resulting tangent stiffness matrix is not
necessarily symmetric. We remedy this by symmetrizing the formulas according to
Main Index
E
E
E
--- i f' ( i )
1
ii
jj
3
--------ii-
--- j --------- + i --------- = KJ +
=
j
j symn
i
2 j
1--- ( f ( ) + f' ( ) )
j
j
6 i i
if i = j
(7-317)
otherwise
Two Remarks
The function f introduced in the previous section depends not only on the stretches but for some choices
of input also on the strain rate. Strain rate effects complicate things for an implicit analyst and here one
also has to take into account whether the material is in tension/compression or in a loading/unloading
stage. We believe that it is of little importance to take into account the strain rate effects when deriving
the tangent stiffness matrix and therefore this influence has been disregarded.
For the fully integrated brick element, we have used the approach in material model 77 to account for the
constant pressure when deriving the tangent stiffness matrix. Experiments have shown that this is crucial
to obtain a decent implicit performance for nearly incompressible materials.
Modeling of the Frequency Independent Damping
An elastic-plastic stress
n+1
d
= dn + 2 GI dev
(7-318)
where . is the strain increment. The trial stress is then radially scaled (if necessary) to the yield surface
according to
Y
n+1
= d m in 1 ,------- eff
n+1
where
ef f
n+1
d
(7-319)
and if yield has occurred in the last time step the elastic-plastic tangent is used
3G
d d
C d = 2G I dev ------ Y2
Here
Main Index
I dev
(7-320)
F , is
(7-321)
L
F = F 0 + K f ( L ) 1 + C1 L + C2 sgn ( L ) ln ma x 1. ,------------ + D L + g ( L ) h ( L )
D
LE
If TYPE=1, inelastic behavior is obtained. In this case, the yield force is taken from the TABLED1:
F Y = F y ( L plasti c )
where
L plasti c
(7-322)
F T = F n + K L t
(7-323)
F:
if F T > F Y
(7-324)
if F T F Y
The final force, which includes rate effects and damping, is given by:
L
F n + 1 = F 1 + C1 L + C2 sgn ( L ) ln ma x 1. ,------------ + D L + g ( L ) h ( L )
D LE
Unless the origin of the curve starts at (0,0), the negative part of the curve is used when the spring force
is negative where the negative of the plastic displacement is used to interpolate, F y . The positive part of
the curve is used whenever the force is positive.
The cross-sectional area is defined on the section card for the discrete beam elements. See
*SECTION_BEAM. The square root of this area is used as the contract thickness offset if these elements
are included in the contact treatment.
Main Index
0 C 2 1 + 1 ---- --- 2
2
- + ( 0 + )E
p = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2
3
1 ( S 1 1 ) s 2 ------------- s 3 --------------------2
+1
( + 1)
(7-325)
where E is the internal energy per initial volume, C is the intercept of the u s u p curve, S 1, S 2 , and S 3
are the coefficients of the slope of the u s u p curve, 0 is the Gruneisen gamma, and a is the first order
volume correction to 0 . Constants, C, S 1, S 2, S 3, 0 , and , are user-defined input parameters. The
compression is defined in terms of the relative volume, V , as:
1
= --- 1 .
V
(7-326)
(7-327)
during loading (compression). Unloading occurs at a slope corresponding to the bulk modulus at the peak
(most compressive) volumetric strain, as shown in Figure 7-28. Reloading follows the unloading path to
the point where unloading began, and then continues on the loading path described by Equation (7-327)).
In the compacted states, the bulk unloading modulus depends on the peak volumetric strain.
Main Index
Pressure p
B
A
K vA
vA
K vB
vB
K vC
vC
Volumetric Strain ( V )
Figure 7-28
(7-328)
The volumetric strain V is given by the natural algorithm of the relative volume. Up to 10 points and as
few as 2 may be used when defining the tabulated functions. The pressure is extrapolated if necessary.
Loading and unloading are along the same curve unlike tabulated compaction equation of state
(EOSTABC).
Main Index
Shear Models
The shear model is referenced from a MATDEUL entry. It defines the shear behavior of the material. At
present, an elastic shear model is available with a constant or polynomial shear modulus.
SHREL Constant Modulus Shear Model
The SHREL entry defines a shear model with a constant shear modulus G. The model is referenced from
a MATDEUL entry that defines the general material properties.
Main Index
Shear Stress
Strain
Figure 7-29
G = G0 + G1 + G2 + G3
where
G 0, G 1, G 2
and
G3
are constants.
Yield Models
Yield models is referenced by MATDEUL entries. The yield models can be used to model elastic perfectly
plastic behavior, bilinear elastoplastic behavior, piecewise linear behavior, or hydrodynamic behavior
(zero yield stress).
YLDHY Hydrodynamic Yield Model
The YLDHY entry defines a yield model with constant zero yield stress. This model should be used for
fluids that have no shear strength and are, therefore, hydrodynamic.
YLDVM von Mises Yield Model
The YLDVM entry defines a von Mises yield model. The yield stress and hardening modulus are defined
by giving either a bilinear or piecewise linear stress-strain curve. Only an elastic perfectly plastic yield
model can be used. The hardening modulus is not used.
Main Index
Bilinear Representation
Eh
is given by
E Eh
y = 0 + ---------------- p
E Eh
where
= yield stress
= Youngs modulus
Eh
= hardening modulus
During every iteration, the stress s is determined from the current equivalent strain
from the stress-strain table
by interpolating
= [ ( i i 1 ) ( i i 1 ) ( i i 1 ) ] + i 1
where j and j are the points in the table. The stress-strain characteristic used internally in MD Nastran
Nonlinear Explicit (SOL 700) is in terms of true stress and equivalent plastic strain. However, for
convenience, the stress-strain characteristic can be input in any of the following ways:
True stress/true strain
Engineering stress/engineering strain
True stress/plastic strain
True stress/plastic modulus
Main Index
where
= current force,
Plastic strain
pl
= current area.
is
pl = true el
where
t rue
= true strain,
el
= elastic strain
where
dl
----ldl
where
( I I0 )
eng = ----------------I0
A0
where
en g
= current length.
and strain
eng
are given by
= original area
I0
= original length
True stress/true strain and engineering strain are related by the following formulas:
t rue = eng ( 1 + eng )
t ru e = ln ( 1 + eng )
At small strains, there is little difference between true stress-strain and engineering stress-strain.
However, at moderate and large strains there can be very large differences, and it is important that the
correct stress-strain characteristic is input.
When defining the material properties using Youngs modulus, yield stress, and hardening modulus, the
hardening modulus must be estimated from a plot of true stress versus true strain. This estimate may well
require a measured material characteristic to be replotted.
Some simple examples follow:
Main Index
True Strain
Figure 7-30
The slope of the first segment of the curve gives the Youngs modulus for the material (when it is not
defined explicitly) and the first nonzero stress point gives the yield stress y . The point corresponding to
the origin can be omitted.
Engineering Stress Versus Engineering Strain
Engineering Stress
y
Engineering Strain
Figure 7-31
Plastic Strain
Figure 7-32
Since the curve is defined in terms of the equivalent plastic strain, there is no elastic part in the curve.
The first point must be the yield stress of the material at zero plastic strain. Youngs modulus is
defined separately.
Main Index
True Stress
1
E h2
E h1
Plastic Strain
Figure 7-33
This option is slightly different since the curve is specified as a series of pairs of stress and hardening
moduli, rather than as a series of pairs of stress and strain. Youngs modulus and yield stress are defined
explicitly so that the table consists of pairs of values with the hardening modulus (x-axis) and the true
stress (y-axis) at the end of the segment.
Yielding occurs when the von Mises stress
vm =
[ ( 1 2 ) + ( 2 3 ) + ( 3 1 ) 2 ] 2
y .
, 2 ,
and
3 .
Isotropic hardening is assumed, which means that the yield surface increases in diameter as yielding
occurs, but its center does not move.
This yield model can be used with beam, shell, and solid elements. When used with shell or solid
elements, strain-rate sensitivity and failure can be included. Strain-rate sensitivity can be defined in
two ways:
1. You can specify a table giving the variation of a scale factor S with strain-rate d dt . The scale
factor is multiplied by the stress found from the stress-strain characteristic to give the actual stress.
The failure criterion is based on plastic strain. When the plastic strain exceeds the specified value,
the element fails. All the stresses are set to zero, and the element can carry no load. (This failure
criterion is referred to from the DMATEP or the DYMAT24 entry.)
- 1 P
-----d- = 1 + --y
D
where
Main Index
where
(T Tr )
----------------------( Tm Tr )
T*
= temperature
Tt
= room temperature
Tm
= melt temperature
A, B, n, C ,
and
are constants
A + B p
k
-
A + B p + ( C + D p ) 1 -------------------- ln --( 1 T * m ) + E ---
cr s
0
where
(T Tr )
----------------------( Tm Tr )
T*
= Temperature
Tr
= room temperature
Tm
= melt temperature
cr
A , B , C, D , m , E ,
and
are constants
This yield model is suitable for a wide range of strain rates, strains and temperatures.
Main Index
y = ( A +
where
B pn )D
mT + CT ln ----
0
+e
mT + CT ln ----
0
= Temperature
A, B, n, C, m ,
and
are constants
This yield model can be used for both Fcc type of metals, like iron and steels, as well as Bcc type of
metals, like aluminum and alloys.
YLDRPL Rate Power Law Yield Model
The YLDRPL entry defines a rate power law yield model in which the yield stress is a function of the
plastic strain and strain rate.
n
y = M AX ( C, A + B p m )
where
A, B, n, m ,
and
are constants
where
max
A, B, C, D, E ,
Main Index
and
are constants
A4
1---
3
y = m in ( A 2, A T ) 1 H ( T T r ) + B p --------- , T < T m
ref
y = 0, T T m
where
= temperature
Tr
= room temperature
Tm
= melt temperature
= Pressure
= density
A, , A 4, H ,
and
are constants
Snow is a very specific material that lies between water and ice. In micro term, the structure of snow
looks like general porous materials where the degree of compaction can vary quite large. Therefore, from
the constitutive equation point of view, snow belongs to the family of soil. One of plasticity models
applied for snow is a multi-surface one.
The multi-surface plasticity model for snow, see references 1 and 2 (there are misprinting in those papers)
is characterized by two independent hardening (softening) mechanisms and a set of yield functions as
shown in the following form:
f c ( I 1 , J 2, q c ( c ) ) =
cc
4
J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c ) c I 1 +
qc
cc qc
= 0
f t ( I 1, q t ( t ) ) = I 1 q t = 0
--3
I1
and
J2
are the first and second invariant of the stress tensor and
is related to the cohesion of snow. q c ( q t ) is the hardening (softening) parameter associated with the yield
surface f c ( f t ) . c c determines the shape of f c . Hence, it is a model parameter that may be set independently
Main Index
from the specific type of snow. c is a material parameter related to the angle of friction. Figure 7-34
contains plots of the yield functions f c and f t in the meridian plane at different stages of the hardening
process of
fc
J2
Hardening
-I1
Yield surfaces
Softeningg
Figure 7-34
qt = ft t Ds t
Ds
represents the
For the implementation in MD Nastran Nonlinear Explicit (SOL 700), the accumulated plastic strain is
updated if the tensile-pressure is bigger than the current q t . The incremental strain is calculated using the
difference of the pressure divided by the bulk modulus. Then the new q t is updated to be used in the next
cycle. Furthermore, the deviatoric stresses are brought to zero.
constitutes a smooth yield function closed along the compressive and the tensile branch of the
hydrostatic axis. Its shape in the stress space changes continuously in the course of hardening, see
Figure 7-34. A specific hardening law, similar to the one used in the Cap Model (reference 3) was adopted
for snow on the basis of results from hydrostatic compression tests:
fc
Main Index
c
1
q c = -------- ln 1 ------
2a c
bc
if
c fc bc
c fc bc
ln ( 1 f c )
q c = -------------------------------------- -----------------------2 ( ac bc ( 1 fc ) )
2a c
if
c fc bc
a c, b c
are parameters determined from hydrostatic compression tests. f c is a parameter that avoids
singularity in above equations at c = b c . It will be set to 0.99. As c grows, the model obtains a shape
similar to the Drucker-Prager failure criterion, see Figure 7-34. The following relation obtains the
correlation between the proposed model for snow and the Drucker-Prager model.
c = Dp
The plasticity evolution is done using an additive plasticity model and associative flow rule (with
isotropic hardening law) as follows:
= e + p
= C : ( p)
f v
= ------
f c
= t ------
n+1
f c J 2D f c I 1
= ------------ ------------ + -------- -------J 2D
I 1
n+1
cc
3
4 ----- ( I 1 + q c )
qc
S
= ----------------------------------------------- + c --------------------------------------------------
cc
cc
4
2 J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c )
2 J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c )
qc
qc
c
3
4 ----s- ( I 1 + q c )
qc
= 3 c -------------------------------------------------cc
4
2 J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c )
qc
is calculated according to the following procedure. First the trial stresses are updated using
elastic assumption.
e
n + 1 = Kt ra ce n + 1 + 2G e n + 1 = E Kt ra ce n + 1 2 Ge n + 1
n + 1 E
Main Index
cc
3
4 ----- ( I 1 + q c )
q
S
c
= 3K c -------------------------------------------------- 1 2 G -------------------------------------------------cc
cc
4
4
2 J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c )
2 J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c )
q
q
c
c
E
J1
: ( n + 1 E )
S
f c ( E ) + -------------------------------------------------- : ( n + 1 E ) = 0
cc
4
2 J + ---- ( I + qc )
2
qc 1
Therefore,
fc ( E )
fc ( E )
= ---------------------------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J 2D
c
3
2
G ---------------------------------------------4 ----c- ( I 1 + q c )
J2 D
qc
cc
4
9K c -------------------------------------------------- + G -----------------------------------------J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c )
c
4
qc
cc
c
4
J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c )
2 J 2 + ----- ( I 1 + q c )
q
qc
c
In this way the volumetric equivalent plastic strain can be updated with the consequence that the yield
surface is growing. Therefore a few iterations are needed to bring the trial stresses, n + 1 , back to the
updated yield surface with a chosen accuracy.
Using this model an excellent agreement between simulation and the experiment results has been
achieved as mentioned in reference 1 and 4.
References
Equations of State
Equations of state are referenced from the MATDEUL entry. The equation of state for a material is of the
basic form
Pressure = f (density, specific internal energy)
Main Index
The simplest equation of state is the gamma law equation of state, defined by the EOSGAM entry. The
only input required is the ratio of specific heats for an ideal gas.
The EOSPOL entry defines a polynomial equation of state.
The EOSTAIT entry defines an equation of state based on the Tait model in combination with a
cavitation model.
The EOSJWL entry defines an equation of state based on the JWL explosive model. It is used to calculate
the pressure of the detonation products of high explosives. The JWL model is empirically based and
requires the input of five constants.
The EOSIG entry defines the properties of Ignition and Growth equation of state and the reaction rate
equation used to model high explosives.
EOSGAM Gamma Law Equation of State
The EOSGAM model defines a gamma law equation of state for gases where the pressure is a function of
the density, the specific internal energy, and the ideal gas ratio of specific heats of an ideal gas
p = ( 1) e
where
( Cp C v )
The EOSGAM equation of state can also be used to model viscous gases.
EOSPOL Polynomial Equation of State
The EOSPOL model defines a polynomial equation of state where the pressure is related to the relative
volume and specific internal energy by a cubic equation.
In compression
( > 0)
p = a 1 + a 2 2 + a 3 3 + ( b 0 + b 1 + b 2 2 + b 3 3 ) 0 e
In tension
( 0)
p = a1 + ( b0 b1 ) 0 e
where
Main Index
= reference density
The EOSPOL equation of state can also be used to model viscous fluids.
EOSTAIT Tait Equation of State
The EOSTAIT model defines a equation of state based on the Tait model in combination with a cavitation
model where the pressure p is defined as follows:
No cavitation
( > c ) ,
p = a0 + a1 ( 1 )
Cavitation
( c ) ,
p = pc
where
= reference density
= reference density
R
R
A 1 -------- e 1 + B 1 -------- e 2 + 0 e
R1
R2
= 0
A, B, , R 1 ,
and
R2
are constants.
Main Index
The EOSTAIT equation of state can als be used to model viscous fluids.
where
pc
A DETSPH entry must be used to specify the detonation time, the location of the detonation point, and the
velocity of a spherical detonation wave. When no DETSPH entry is present, all the material detonates
immediately and completely.
EOSMG - Mie-Gruneisen Equation of State
The Mie-Gruneisen equation is useful in high-strain rate processes. The pressure is split in a part that only
depends on density and a part that only depends on temperature.
p = pc + p T
The cold pressure is computed from the Rankine-Hugenot equations and is given by
0
0 c 02
p c = ----------------------2- 1 ----------
2
( 1 s )
Here
c0
0
= 1 ----
strain. The defining equation for the parameter s is the linearization of the relationship between linear
shock speed U s and particle velocity U p .
U s = c 0 + sU p
The thermal part of the pressure follows from thermodynamic considerations and reads
pT = 0 0 e
where
is given by
K T
0 0 = ---------CV
where
KT
CV
the volumetric
0
= 0 ----- .
Material Failure
One of the nonlinear features of a material's behavior is failure. When a certain criterion -the failure
criterion- is met, the material fails and can no longer sustain its loading and breaks. In a finite-element
method this means that the element where the material reaches the failure limit, cannot carry any stresses
anymore. The stress tensor is effectively zero. The element is flagged for failure and essentially is no
longer part of the structure.
Failure criteria can be defined for a range of materials and element types. The failure models are
referenced from the material definition entries.
Main Index
FAILJC
Spallation Models
A spallation model defines the minimum pressure prior to spallation. At present there is only one
spallation model, PMINC, that defines a constant spallation pressure.
PMINC Constant Minimum Pressure
A constant minimum pressure must be defined that must be less than or equal to zero. Note that the
pressure is positive in compression. If the pressure in an element falls below the minimum pressure, the
element spall and the pressure and yield stress are set to zero. The material then behaves like a fluid.
When the pressure subsequently becomes positive, the material will no longer be in a spalled state.
The pressure can then decrease again to the specified minimum (the spall limit) before spallation
occurs again.
Pressure
PMINC
Figure 7-35
Main Index
Volume
Material Viscosity
Viscous fluid material models are available for the Roe fluid solver only. The viscous behavior is
referenced from the entry to define the equation of state (EOSPOL or EOSTAIT). For these viscous
materials, the stress tensor t ij is defined as:
t ij = p i j + S ij
dp
Kd
------ = ---- -----dt
dt
and
d e idj
S i j = 2 --------dt
where K denotes the bulk modulus, the density, S i j the deviatoric stress tensor, p the pressure, e ijd the
deviatoric strain tensor, and the coefficient of viscosity. The Roe solver computes the stresses directly
from the velocity gradients.
Main Index
Main Index
Main Index
Overview
Penalty Methods
Preliminaries
346
Slave Search
347
Bucket Sorting
357
358
Friction
344
359
346
351
353
356
352
Overview
The input of contact data, Contact for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700), is defined similarly as for Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600). It is instructive to first read Chapter 12 of the SOL 600 Users Guide where an
overview is given of the nonlinear contact methods.
This section will summarize those parts of the contact methods applicable to SOL 700, and will describe
the theory of the algorithms used.
To activate contact in SOL 700, the Case Control entry BCONTACT must be given. There are three
methods available to define contact:
1. All elements in the model in one contact definition, using default settings
Case Control: BCONTACT=ALL
This will result in automatic contact detection between all elements in the model. For SOL 700,
it is advisable to use this method.
2. User defined Contact Bodies, using default or non-default settings
Case Control: BCONTACT = n
Bulk Data:
It is possible to define contact bodies (BCBODY), and specify which contact bodies need to be
checked for contact (BCTABLE). This method using BCBODY definitions provides extreme
flexibility and is compatible with the Implicit Nonlinear solution (SOL 600).
A contact body is defined by the Bulk Data entry BCBODY, which references a set of elements
(BSURF), a set of elements inside a box (BCBOX), or certain property IDs (BCPROP) or with
certain material IDs (BCMATL).
Often used definitions related to contact methods are:
Single Surface Contact: This refers to any contact definition where no master is defined.
Master Slave Contact:
considered touching
Separation Force
Main Index
(DIM
on BCBODY)
(BEHAV=RIGID
on BCBODY)
(ISTYP
(CONTROL
on BCBODY)
on BCBODY)
(IDSPL
on BCBODY)
(ERROR
on BCTABLE)
(FNTOL
on BCTABLE)
Interference closure
(CINTERF
(IGLUE &
Glue options
JGLUE
on BCTABLE)
on BCTABLE)
(HEATC
on BCTABLE)
Searching order
(ISEARCH
on BCTABLE)
(ICOORD
on BCTABLE)
(BCHANGE
entry)
(BCMOVE
entry)
operate as if the material is rigid. The penalty based contact forces applied on the nodes are
accumulated for the whole rigid body and applied as an external force and moment to the centerof-gravity of the rigid body.
Rigid body motion is allowed and properly simulated by SOL 700.
Initial velocities and boundary conditions acting on the nodes will be applied to the rigid body.
Rigid body must be assigned in Masters field in BCTABLE.
With these capabilities, a faceted rigid body, similar to a BCBODY with BEHAV=RIGID can be easily
modeled. The BEHAV=RIGID logic will be implemented in the next release of SOL 700.
Main Index
Penalty Methods
The treatment of sliding and impact along interfaces is an important capability in SOL 700.
Internally, the interfaces are defined in three dimensions by listing in arbitrary order all triangular and
quadrilateral segments that comprise each side of the interface. One side of the interface is designated as
the slave side, and the other is designated as the master side. Nodes lying in those surfaces are referred
to as slave and master nodes, respectively. When slave nodes penetrate the master, normal interface
springs are placed between the penetrated nodes and the master surface. See Slave Search in this chapter
for details on the contact force calculations.
Preliminaries
Consider the time-dependent motion of two bodies occupying regions B 1 and B 2 in their undeformed
configuration at time zero. Assume that the intersection
B1 B2 =
(8-1)
is satisfied. Let B 1 and B 2 denote the boundaries of B 1 and B 2 , respectively. At some later time, these
bodies occupy regions b 1 and b 2 bounded by b 1 and b 2 as shown in Figure 8-1. Because the deformed
configurations cannot penetrate,
( b 1 b 1 ) b 2 =
(8-2)
As long as
2
B0
Main Index
1
B0
Figure 8-1
( = 1, 2 )
Before a detailed description of the theory is given, some additional statements should be made
concerning the terminology. The surfaces b 1 and b 2 of the discretized bodies b 1 and b 2 become the
master and slave surfaces respectively. Choice of the master and slave surfaces is arbitrary when the
symmetric penalty treatment is employed. Otherwise, the more coarsely meshed surface should be
chosen as the master surface, nodal points that define b 1 are called master nodes and nodes that define
b 2
( b 1 b 2 ) ,
Right superscripts are implied whenever a variable refers to either the master surface b 1 , or slave
surface, b 2 ; consequently, these superscripts are dropped in the development which follows.
Slave Search
The slave search is common to all interface algorithms implemented in SOL 700. This search finds for
each slave node its nearest point on the master surface. Lines drawn from a slave node to its nearest point
will be perpendicular to the master surface, unless the point lies along the intersection of two master
segments, where a segment is defined to be a 3- or 4-node element of a surface.
Consider a slave node, n s , sliding on a piecewise smooth master surface and assume that a search of the
master surface has located the master node, m s , lying nearest to n s . Figure 8-2 depicts a portion of a
master surface with nodes m s and n s labeled. If m s and n s do not coincide, n s can usually be shown to
lie in a segment s s via the following tests:
( ci s ) ( ci ci + 1 ) > 0
(8-3)
( ci s ) ( s ci + 1 ) > 0
where vector c i and c i + 1 are along edges of s 1 and point outward from m s . Vector s is the projection of
the vector beginning at m s , ending at n s , and denoted by g , onto the plane being examined (see
Figure 8-3).
Figure 8-2
Main Index
ns
given that
ms
is the Nearest
Figure 8-3
Projection of
s = g ( g m )m
s1
(8-4)
s1
ci ci + 1
m = -------------------------ci ci + 1
(8-5)
Since the sliding constraints keep n s close but not necessarily on the master surface and since n s may lie
near or even on the intersection of two master segments, the inequalities of Equation (8-3) may be
inconclusive; i.e., they may fail to be satisfied or more than one may give positive results. When this
occurs n s is assumed to lie along the intersection which yields the maximum value for the quantity
g ci
-----------ci
i = 1, 2, 3, 4,
(8-6)
When the contact surface is made up of badly shaped elements, the segment apparently identified as
containing the slave node actually may not, as shown in Figure 8-4.
Assume that a master segment has been located for slave node n s and that n s is not identified as lying on
the intersection of two master segments. Then the identification of the contact point, defined as the point
on the master segment which is nearest to n s , becomes nontrivial. Each master surface segment s 1 , is
given the parametric representation:
r = f 1 ( , )i 1 + f 2 ( , )i 2 + f 3 ( , ) i 3
(8-7)
where
4
f i ( , )
j xi
j =1
Main Index
(8-8)
When the nearest node fails to contain the segment that harbors the slave node, segments numbered 1-8
are searched in the order shown in Figure 8-4.
1
5
4
Figure 8-4
Note that
r1
r r
------ ------- 0
(8-9)
Thus, r represents a master segment that has a unique normal whose direction depends continuously on
the points of s 1 .
Let
ns
( c, c )
s1
must satisfy
r
------ ( c, c ) [ t r ( c, c ) ] = 0
(8-10)
r
------- ( c, c ) [ t r ( c, c ) ] = 0
(8-11)
Main Index
on
has
s1
in terms of
and
c .
ns
, and substitute the results into (8-11). This yields a cubic equation
3
ns
2
r
------
r
-----
x3
4
1
r
x2
x1
Figure 8-5
ns
The equations are solved numerically. When two nodes of a bilinear quadrilateral are collapsed into a
single node for a triangle, the Jacobian of the minimization problem is singular at the collapsed node.
Fortunately, there is an analytical solution for triangular segments since three points define a plane.
Newton-Raphson iteration is a natural choice for solving these simple nonlinear equations. The method
diverges with distorted elements unless the initial guess is accurate. An expanded search procedure as
discussed in Improvements to the Contact Searching section is used.
Three iterations with a least-squares projection are used to generate an initial guess:
0 = 0,
r ,
r ,
0 = 0,
[ r , r , ] =
i + 1 = i + 1 + ,
r ,
r ,
{ r ( i , i ) t },
(8-12)
i + 1 = i +
followed by the Newton-Raphson iterations which are limited to ten iterations, but which usually
converges in four or less.
r ,
[H]
= { r ( i, i ) t }
r ,
0
r r ,
r ,
[ H ] [ r , r , ] +
r r ,
0
r ,
(8-13)
i + 1 = i +
i + 1 = i +
In concave regions, a slave node may have isoparametric coordinates that lie outside of the [ 1 ,+1 ] range
for all of the master segments, yet still have penetrated the surface. A simple strategy is used for handling
this case, but it can fail. The contact segment for each node is saved every time step.
Main Index
If the slave node contact point defined in terms of the isoparametric coordinates of the segment, is just
outside of the segment, and the node penetrated the isoparametric surface, and no other segment
associated with the nearest neighbor satisfies the inequality test, then the contact point is assumed to
occur on the edge of the segment.
In effect, the definition of the master segments is extended so that they overlap by a small amount. In the
hydrocode literature, this approach is similar to the slide line extensions used in two dimensions. This
simple procedure works well for most cases, but it can fail in situations involving sharp concave corners.
ns
l = n i ( [ t r ( c, c ) ] < 0 )
(8-14)
where
n i = n i ( c, c )
(8-15)
is normal to the master segment at the contact point. The amount of penetration is equal to the value of l.
If slave node
fs = l k i ni
ns
si
if l < l < 0
(8-16)
if
fs :
ns
and
l<0
(8-17)
to the four nodes ( i = 1, 2, 3, 4 ) that comprise master segment s i . By default, SOFT=1 on the BCTABLE
entry, and the stiffness factor k i is given in terms of the nodal masses and the global timestep, d t as
m slave m mast er
1
k i = f si ----------------------------------------- ------2m slave + m mast er dt
(8-18)
With SOFT=1, it is mostly not needed to scale the contact stiffness, even if materials with very different
stiffness properties come into contact.
Main Index
ki
Ki ,
the volume
Vi ,
Ai
si
is given in terms of
si
as
f si K i A i2
k i = -----------------Vi
(8-19)
(8-20)
for shell elements. When too much penetration is observed, the contact stiffness can be increased by the
interface stiffness scale factor, f si . This scale factor is 0.1 by default, and can be defined by FACT on the
BCTABLE entry. Larger values may cause instabilities unless the time step size is scaled back in the time
step calculation.
slave node
Figure 8-6
Failure to find the Contact Segment can be caused by Poor Aspect Ratios in the
Finite Element Mesh
To circumvent the problem caused by bad aspect ratios, an expanded searching procedure is used in
which we attempt to locate the nearest segment rather than the nearest nodal point.
Nodes 2 and 4 share segments with node 3. Therefore, the two nearest nodes are 1 and 5. The nearest
contact segment is not considered since its nodes are not members of the nearest node set.
Main Index
The nearest contact segment to a given node, k , is defined to be the first segment encountered when
moving in a direction normal to the surface away from k . A major deficiency with the nearest node
search is depicted in Figure 8-7 where the nearest nodes are not even members of the nearest contact
segment. Obviously, this would not be a problem for a more uniform mesh. To overcome this problem
we have adopted segment based searching in both surface to surface and single surface contact.
Normal vector
at node 3
Figure 8-7
Expanded Search
Bucket Sorting
Bucket sorting is now used extensively in the SOL 700 contact algorithms.
The reasons for eliminating slave node tracking by incremental searching is illustrated in Figure 8-8
where surfaces are shown which cause the incremental searches to fail. With bucket sorting incremental
searches may still be used but for reliability they are used after contact is achieved. As contact is lost, the
bucket sorting for the affected nodal points must resume.
tied interface
not yet supported
Figure 8-8
Main Index
In a direct search of a set of N nodes to determine the nearest node, the number of distance comparisons
required is N 1 . Since this comparison needs to be made for each node, the total number of comparisons
is
N(N 1)
1 2 = ( xi x j ) 2 + ( y i yj ) 2 + ( zi zj ) 2
(8-21)
that uses eight mathematical operations. The cumulative effect of these mathematical operations for
N ( N 1 ) compares can dominate the solution cost at less than 100 elements.
The idea behind a bucket sort is to perform some grouping of the nodes so that the sort operation need
only calculate the distance of the nodes in the nearest groups. With this partitioning the nearest node will
either reside in the same bucket or in one of the two adjoining buckets. The number of distance
calculations is now given by
3N
------- 1
(8-22)
where is the number of buckets. The total number of distance comparisons for the entire onedimensional surface is
3N
N ------- 1
(8-23)
Thus, if the number of buckets is greater than 3, then the bucket sort will require fewer distance
comparisons than a direct sort. It is easy to show that the corresponding number of distance comparisons
for two-dimensional and three-dimensional bucket sorts are given by
9N
N ------- 1
b
27 N
N ---------- 1
bc
where
for 2-D
for 3-D
and
(8-24)
(8-25)
Incremental searching may fail on surfaces that are not simply connected. The contact algorithm in SOL
700 avoids incremental searching for nodal points that are not in contact and all these cases are
considered (see Figure 8-6).
The cost of the grouping operations, needed to form the buckets, is nearly linear with the number of nodes
N . For typical SOL 700 applications, the bucket sort is 100 to 1000 times faster than the corresponding
direct sort. However, the sort is still an expensive part of the contact algorithm, so that, to further
minimize this cost, the sort is performed every ten or fifteen cycles and the nearest three nodes are stored.
This can be specified by BSORT on the BCTABLE entry. Typically, three to five percent of the
calculational costs will be absorbed in the bucket sorting when most surface segments are included in the
contact definition.
Main Index
(8-26)
where the coordinate pairs ( x mi n, x max ) , ( y mi n, y max ) , and ( z min, z ma x ) span the entire contact surface. In this
procedure, we loop over the segments rather than the nodal points. For each segment we use a nested DO
LOOP to loop through a subset of buckets from IM IN to IM A X , J MI N to J MA X , and K MI N to K MA X
where:
IM IN = M IN ( P XI, P X 2, P X3, PX 4 )
IM A X = M A X ( P X 1, P X2, P X 3, P X 4 )
J MI N = MA X ( P Y1, P Y2, P Y3, P Y4 )
(8-27)
and P X k , P Yk , P Zk are the bucket pointers for the kth node. Figure 8-9 shows a segment passing through
a volume that has been partitioned into buckets. The orthogonal distance of each slave node contained in
the box from the segment is determined. The box is subdivided into sixty buckets.
Figure 8-9
Main Index
We check the orthogonal distance of all nodes in the bucket subset from the segment. As each segment
is processed, the minimum distance to a segment is determined for every node in the surface and the two
nearest segments are stored. Therefore the required storage allocation is still deterministic. This would
not be the case if we stored for each segment a list of nodes that could possibly contact the segment.
We have now determined for each node, k , in the contact surface the two nearest segments for contact.
Having located these segments we permanently store the node on these segments which is nearest to node
k . When checking for interpenetrating nodes we check the segments surrounding the node including the
nearest segment since during the steps between bucket searches it is likely that the nearest segment may
change. It is possible to bypass nodes that are already in contact and save some computer time; however,
if multiple contacts per node are admissible then bypassing the search may lead to unacceptable errors.
Figure 8-10
Main Index
Figure 8-11
Thickness changes in the contact are accounted for if and only if the shell thickness change option is
flagged on the PARAM* DYCONTHKCHG. Each cycle, as the shell elements are processed, the nodal
thicknesses are stored for use in the contact algorithms. The interface stiffness may change with thickness
depending on the input options used.
To account for the nodal thickness, the maximum shell thickness of any shell connected to the node is
taken as the nodal thickness and is updated every cycle. The projection of the node is done normal to the
contact surface:
Main Index
Detected Penetration
Figure 8-12
Undetected Penetration
Undetected Penetration
brick
shell
Inner penetration if
edge is too close
Figure 8-13
To avoid problems with initial penetrations, the following recommendations should be considered:
Adequately offset adjacent surfaces to account for part thickness during the mesh
generation phase.
Use consistently refined meshes on adjacent parts which have significant curvatures.
Be very careful when defining thickness on shell and beam section definitions - especially for
rigid bodies.
Scale back part thickness if necessary. Scaling a 1.5mm thickness to .75mm should not cause
problems but scaling to .075mm might. Alternatively, define a smaller contact thickness by part
ID. Warning: if the part is too thin contact failure will probably occur
Use spot welds instead of merged nodes to allow the shell mid surfaces to be offset.
n+1
n
E contact
= E contact
+
i =1
Main Index
to time
nmn
i =1
n+1
1
n + --2
di st islave
F ima st er
F islave
is the incremental distance the ith slave node has moved during
di st ima st er
Friction
Friction in SOL 700 is based on a Coulomb formulation. Let
f*
fn
k the interface stiffness, the coefficient of friction, and f the frictional force at time n. The frictional
algorithm, outlined below, uses the equivalent of an elastic plastic spring. The steps are as follows:
1. Compute the yield force,
Fy :
Fy = fn
(8-28)
(8-29)
(8-30)
if
f F y
(8-31)
if
f > F y
(8-32)
An exponential interpolation function smooths the transition between the static, s , and dynamic, d ,
coefficients of friction where is the relative velocity between the slave node and the master segment:
= d + ( s d ) ec
(8-33)
where
eT
= --------------t
Main Index
(8-34)
C
is a decay constant.
Typical values of friction, see Table 8-1, can be found in Marks Engineering Handbook.
Table 8-1
MATERIALS
Main Index
STATIC
SLIDING
0.78 (dry)
0.74 (dry)
0.61 (dry)
.47 (dry)
Aluminum on aluminum
1.05 (dry)
1.4 (dry)
0.90 (dry)
.69(wet), .85(dry)
Main Index
General Coupling
Hotfilling
373
362
372
371
367
General Coupling
Fluid-structure Interaction
The objective of fluid-structure interaction using the coupling algorithm is to enable the material modeled
in Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes to interact. Initially, the two solvers are entirely separate. Lagrangian
elements that lie within an Eulerian mesh do not affect the flow of the Eulerian material and no forces
are transferred from the Eulerian material back to the Lagrangian structure. The coupling algorithm
computes the interaction between the two sets of elements. It thus enables complex fluid-structure
interaction problems to be analyzed.
The first task in coupling the Eulerian and Lagrangian sections of a model is to create a surface on the
Lagrangian structure. This surface is used to transfer the forces between the two solver domains. The
surface acts as a boundary to the flow of material in the Eulerian mesh. At the same time, the stresses in
the Eulerian elements cause forces to act on the coupling surface, distorting the Lagrangian elements.
By means of a BSURF, BCPROP, BCMATL, or BCSEG entry, you can define a multifaceted surface on
the Lagrangian structure. A set of BCSEGs, element numbers, property numbers, material numbers, or
any combination of these identify the element faces in this surface. The method of defining of the surface
is therefore extremely flexible and can be adapted to individual modeling needs.
The coupling algorithm is activated using the COUPLE entry. It specifies that the surface is used for
Euler-Lagrange coupling. You can define whether the inside or the outside domain is covered by the
coupling surface by setting the COVER field on the entry. This means that the Euler domain cannot contain
material where it is covered by the outside or the inside of the Lagrangian structure. For problems where
the Eulerian material is inside a Lagrangian structure (for example, an inflating air bag), COVER should
be set to OUTSIDE since the Eulerian elements outside the coupling surface must be covered. For
problems where the Eulerian material is outside the Lagrangian structure (for example a projectile
penetrating soft material), the inside of the coupling surface must covered, and COVER should be set
to INSIDE.
The coupling surface must have a positive volume. This means that the normals of all the segments of
the surface must point outwards. By default, the solver will check the direction of the normal vectors and
automatically reverse them when necessary. However, if you wish to switch of the check to save some
computational time in the generation of the problem, you can define this using the REVERSE field on the
COUPLE entry.
The coupling algorithm activated using the COUPLE entry is the most general interaction algorithm. It can
handle any Euler mesh. There is an option, however, to switch to a faster algorithm by setting the
parameter DYPARAM, FASTCOUP. This algorithm makes use of knowledge of the geometry of the Euler
mesh. As a result, the requirement is that the Euler mesh must be aligned with the basic coordinate
system axes.
Main Index
Closed Volume
The coupling surface must form a closed volume. This requirement is fundamental to the way the
coupling works. It means that there can be no holes in the surface and the surface must be closed.
In order to create a closed volume, it may be necessary to artificially extend the coupling surface in some
problems. In the example shown below, a plate modeled with shell elements is interacting with an
Eulerian mesh. In order to form a closed coupling surface, dummy shell elements are added behind the
plate. Dummy shell elements can be created using material MATD009. The shape of these dummy shell
elements does not matter and it is best to use as few as possible to make the solution more efficient.
The closed volume formed by the coupling surface must intersect at least one Euler element otherwise
the coupling surface is not recognized by the Eulerian mesh.
Eulerian Domain
Lagrangian
Shell Elements
(Property 200)
Dummy Elements
to Form a Closed
Coupling Surface
(Property 200)
Care must be taken when doing so, however. The additional grid points created for the dummy elements
do not move, since they are not connected to any structural elements. When the shell elements move so
far that they pass beyond these stationary grid points, the coupling surface turns inside out and has a
negative volume causing the solver to terminate.
Main Index
Porosity
There is a general purpose capability to model porosity of a coupling surface. Porosity allows material to
flow from the Eulerian region through the coupling surface or vice-versa. This method is addressed using
the PORFLOW, PORFCPL entry. PORFLOW is used to model the interaction between an Eulerian region
to the environment while PORFCPL is used for flow from an Eulerian region to another one. For air bags,
a newer and better methodology for modeling porosity has been implemented.
The coupling surface or parts of it can be made porous by referring to a LEAKAGE entry from the COUPLE
entry. This will be further explained by means of two examples. The first example models an air bag with
porous material and two holes using PORFLOW:
Main Index
The transport of mass through the porous area is based on the velocity of the gas in the Eulerian
elements, relative to the moving coupling surface.
.
Eulerian Element
SXint
Coupling Surface
Main Index
The volume of the Eulerian material transported through the faces of the coupling surface that
intersect an Eulerian element is equal to
V trans = d t ( v A )
where
V trans
= transported volume during one time step ( V tra n s > 0 for outflow;
V trans < 0 for inflow)
dt
= time step
= porosity coefficient
= area of the face of the coupling surface that intersects the Eulerian
element A is equal to the area of the face that lies inside the
Eulerian element.
The transported mass through the porous area is equal to the density of the gas times the transported
volume.
2. Pressure Method
This algorithm is activated by:
PORFLOW, 42, , MATERIAL, 33, PRESSURE, 1.E5, METHOD, PRESSURE.
The transport of mass through the porous area is based on the pressure difference between the gas
in the Eulerian element and the outside pressure. The outside pressure is the pressure as specified
on the PORFLOW entry.
Eulerian Element
SXint
Face of the coupling
surface that intersects
the Eulerian element
Coupling Surface
The volume of the Eulerian material transported through the faces of the coupling surface that
intersect an Eulerian element is equal to:
2
---
V trans = d t A
Main Index
p exh p exh
2 p
------------ --- --------- ---------
p
1
p
+1
-----------
where
V trans
= transported volume during one time step ( V tra n s > 0 for outflow;
V trans < 0 for inflow)
dt
= time step
= porosity coefficient
= area of the face of the coupling surface that intersects the Eulerian
element A is equal to the area of the face that lies inside the
Eulerian element
= adiabatic exponent
p exh
= Cp C v
The pressure at the face is approximated by the one-dimensional isentropic expansion of the gas
to the critical pressure or the environmental pressure according to
(p
> pc )
p
p = env env
p c ( p env < p c )
where
pc
2 1
p c = p ------------
+ 1
In case the outside pressure is greater than the pressure of the gas, inflow through the coupling
surface will occur. This porosity model can only be used for ideal gases; i.e., materials modeled
with the gamma law equation of state (EOSGAM).
Main Index
If all Euler domains are defined by MESH, BOX, or MESH, ADAPT, then there are no restrictions on the
use multiple coupling surfaces. In that case, a simulation may both contain porous holes that connect one
Euler domain to another as well as coupling surfaces with interactive failure.
With the multi-material solver, Multiple Euler domains are only supported if all Euler domains are
defined by either MESH,BOX or MESH,ADAPT.
Main Index
Deactivation
Deactivation is only supported by the Roe solver. In case you are using the multiple coupling surfaces
functionality, it is also possible to deactivate a coupling surface and the associated Eulerian domain at a
certain time using the TDEAC field on the COUPLE entry. The deactivation stops the calculation of the
coupling algorithm and its associated Eulerian domain. The analysis of the Lagrangian structure
continues. Activation of the coupling surface is not possible.
Initialization
To initialize Euler elements several PEULER1 and TICEUL1 entries are used as follows:
PEULER1,6,,HYDRO,19
TICEUL1,19,19
TICREG,1,19,SPHERE,1,3,5,1.0
SPHERE,1,,0.0,0.0,0.0,500.0
TICVAL,5,,SIE,400000.,DENSITY,0.2
MESH,22,BOX,,,,,,,+
+,-0.01001,-0.01001,-0.01001,0.14002,0.12002,0.12002,25,OUTSIDE,+
+,14,12,12,,,,EULER,6
$
PEULER1,7,,HYDRO,20
TICEUL1,20,20
TICREG,2,20,SPHERE,2,3,6,2.0
SPHERE,2,,0.0,0.0,0.0,500.0
TICVAL,6,,SIE,400000.,DENSITY,1.9
MESH,23,BOX,,,,,,,+
+,0.11499,-0.00501,-0.00501,0.1302,0.11002,0.11002,50,OUTSIDE,+
+,26,22,22,,,,EULER,7
Main Index
The MESH entry references a unique property number that is also used by the PEULER1 entry. So the
PEULER1 entry provides the link between the MESH entry and a TICEUL1 entry. In this way, each Euler
domain references a unique TICEUL1 entry. The level indicators that occur on a TICEUL1 entry only
apply to the Euler mesh that is linked to this TICEUL1 entry.
To initialize all meshes to one initial state, only one property set is used in combination with only one
PEULER1 and TICEUL1 entry. Also, the PEULER entry may be used in this case.
Output
Euler archive output is restricted when this option facet has not been set. The restrictions are:
The entry ELEMENTS on an Euler archive output request is required to be ALLEULHYDRO,
ALLMULTIEULHYDRO or ALLMULTIEULSTREN. Specifying element numbers is not supported.
For each mesh, a separate Euler archive file is created. Thus, one Euler archive output request
gives multiple archive files. Each of these archive files may contain more than one cycle. To
distinguish the Euler archive files from each other, the Euler archive files have a tag that
specifies to what mesh they belong. This tag has the form: FV_(Mesh-ID). Here FV is an
acronym for Finite Volume.
When one of the Euler meshes is of TYPE ADAPT, all Euler archives will contain only one cycle.
Example: A mesh with ID=22 and a mesh with ID=23 have been defined. Then this output request would
generate the archives ALLEULER_FV22_0 and ALLEULER_FV23_0.
Main Index
To define a porous hole between two closed surfaces, the surfaces should not be defined as coupling
surfaces but as air bags. The first air bag is defined in one go using all the elements in the first surface.
To define the second air bag, two subsurfaces will be created from the second surface. The first
subsurface is the hole. The second subsurface consists of all the elements of the second surface that are
not part of the hole. The second air bag is then the combination of these two subsurfaces.
1. Create the first air bag using all elements in the first surface with
Loads-BCs/Create/Airbag/Surface.
2. Define a porous hole with Airbag/Subsurface and choose as porosity model PORFCPL.
3. Create a subsurface consisting of all elements of the second surface that are not part of the
subsurface created in step 2.
4. Create the second air bag by selecting the two subsurfaces in step 2 and 3.
Main Index
either a first order or a second order solution. A first order spatial accurate solution uses a one-stage
time integration scheme; a second order spatial accurate solution applies a three-stage time
integration scheme.
Multiple coupling surfaces with failure can be requested if the fast coupling algorithm is used by setting
the DYPARAM,FASTCOUP, ,FAIL entry. You can also define interaction between multiple coupling
surfaces, like in cases where you wish to model chambers that after structural failure will show a
connection between them through which fluid or gas could flow. A typical example is an explosion in
the cargo space of an aircraft after which the floor may be ruptured and the high-pressure gas can vent
into the passenger cabin.
The fluid solver allows you to introduce viscosity into the solution. You use Taits equation of state to
model the fluid with additional viscosity terms.
There are some limitations in the current implementation. Eulerian elements must be completely filled
with materials, so void or partial void elements are not allowed. For fluid flows where voids sometimes
may occur, we recommend that you use Taits equation of state. This equation of state is fully supported
by the improved second order Euler solver, and allows you to define a so-called critical density. When
the fluids density falls below the critical value, the fluid cavitates (i.e., the pressure retains the value
associated with the critical density). The density can further drop, but the pressure remains constant. In
this fashion, you avoid the creation of voids and still allow the fluid to cavitate. When you only have data
available for the fluid that satisfies the simple bulk equation of state, you can still use Taits model by
setting the A 0 parameter to zero, to one, and add the critical density value at which cavitation occurs.
Especially for blast wave types of problems, the full second order solution is recommended because of
the accuracy it inherently brings. The JWL equation of state is not supported. A major advantage of using
the blast wave approach is the speed at which the analysis can be performed. Especially spherical wave
propagation through a Cartesian mesh is much more accurate in a full second order solution than in first
order, or second order with (cheaper) first order accurate boundary conditions.
Main Index
The normals of the faces of the surface must point outwards in order to compute the correct (positive)
volume. When the normals point inwards, they are automatically reversed such that the resulting volume
is positive. The surface must be closed to ensure a correct volume calculation.
You must define the amount of fluid in the container or bottle. The volume of the gas above the fluid
then follows immediately from the difference between the volume of the container and the fluid volume
in the container. Obviously, the fluid volume cannot exceed the volume enclosed by the surface. The
fluid is assumed to be incompressible. Thus, any volume change directly translates to a volume change
of the gas above the fluid. The gas above the fluid is assumed to behave as an ideal gas under
iso-thermal conditions:
pV = C
where
is the pressure,
represents a constant.
To define the constant C , you have to specify the initial pressure of the gas above the fluid on the
FFCONTR entry. The initial pressure is only used for the calculation of the pressure changes and does
not have an effect on other boundary conditions that you may have applied. If an over-pressure (for
example, a carbonated soft drink) or an under-pressure (for example, a hot filled container) is present,
you must model this separately using a PLOAD definition. The values for the pressure on the PLOAD
entry and the pressure generated by the FFCONTR are superimposed for the calculation.
Hotfilling
Filling bottles with hot liquid can cause large deformations during cooling. To simulate these
deformations the Fluid filled functionality container option can be used. Since MD Nastran Nonlinear
Explicit (SOL 700) has only a limited cooling functionality the temperature of the fluid has to be
specified by the user. In addition, the volume of the fluid will depend on temperature. A temperature
versus time table and water density versus temperature table are input options for the fluid filled
container. If these are set the gas is no longer iso-thermal but satisfies
PV T = C
Here V is the volume of the gas. This volume is computed as the difference between the total volume and
the volume of fluid. The volume of the fluid is given by
M water
V = ----------------- ,
Main Index
Main Index
10
Main Index
Eulerian Solvers
J
376
386
d
----- u i dV + u i ( u n ) dA = ( p + q ) n i dA g e 3 V
dt
V
(10-1)
d
----- e dV + e ( u n ) dA = u i pn i dA
dt
V
For Eulerian materials with strength the pressure p is replaced by the stress tensor. The volume integrals
represent the total mass, momentum and energy in the Volume V. The surface integrals on the left signify
transport out of the volume through parts of the area A. The surface integrals on the right represent the
momentum and energy increase caused by forces acting on the boundary of the volume. The numerical
scheme is a finite volume method. It is obtained by applying equation (10-1) to the material inside an
Euler element and by specifying how transport terms are computed. The first equation signifies that the
decrease of mass in an element equals the loss of mass trough the element boundary. In transporting mass
between elements mass should be conserved globally. This is achieved by looping across the element
interfaces and adding the transported mass, momentum and energy to the acceptor element and
subtracting it from the donor element. In this way the finite volume scheme conserves mass, momentum
and energy.
In applying equation (10-1), it is assumed that density, velocity, and specific energy are constant across
an Euler element and only depend on time. In addition, they are constant within one time step. This is
consistent with a first-order approach. The evolved time at cycle n will be denoted by t n . Element density,
velocity, and specific total energy inside an element at cycle n will be denoted by n , u n , and e n ,
respectively.
Main Index
Mn + 1 Mn =
( u n ) dA t
tn
Pn + 1 Pn =
u i ( u n ) dA
En + 1 En =
t
tn
p ( , s ) n i dA + g e3 V
t
tn + 1
(10-2)
e ( u n ) dA + ui p ( , e ) ni dA
A
A
3
En + 1 n + 1
M n + 1- n + 1
1
- ,s
n + 1 = -------------,e
= -------------= e n + 1 --2
Vn + 1
Mn + 1
uk
k=1
Applying first-order time integration gives equation (10-2). The integration is from
denotes the mass inside the element, P momentum, and E energy.
tn
to
tn + 1 .
Here,
For the surface integrals that represent transport, the forward Euler method is used. Consequently, surface
integrals are evaluated at the beginning of the time step. The surface integral with the pressure terms is
evaluated using the new density and specific total energy.
The transport velocity u n depends on both the donor as well as the acceptor element and is given by the
average of the donor and acceptor velocity. Multiplying the transport velocity with surface area and time
step yields the transport volume. This volume is filled up with mass of the donor element. Multiplying
this volume with the density of the donor element gives the transported mass. Likewise the transport
volume times the donor velocity gives the transported momentum.
Since the fluid-structure interaction forms an integral part of the numerical scheme we first discuss
fluid-structure interaction.
Fluid-structure Interaction
Material in an Euler mesh can interact with Lagrangian structures. Eulerian material can exert forces on
a structure causing displacement and deformation. On the other hand structures provide a barrier to
Eulerian material. That is Eulerian material cannot penetrate the structure and the structural surface
determines which Euler element have the capacity to hold mass. Consider for example a tank shell
surface. Euler Elements that are outside the tank surface cannot hold material and only elements that are
partially or completely inside the surface have the capacity to contain mass. This surface defines the
effective boundary of the Euler domain and will be called the coupling surface. In most cases the
coupling surface will consist of Lagrangian Elements. But also the interaction of Eulerian material with
a Lagrangian solid is possible. Then the coupling surface consists of surface elements that have no
Lagrangian model attached but only serve to enable interaction. In the following we shall assume that the
coupling surface is a Lagrangian shell surface. The coupling surface will also be referred to as the
structural surface.
Main Index
The coupling surface consists of shell elements that deform under pressure loads from material inside the
Eulerian domain. An explicit finite element solver solves the shell dynamics, and an explicit Euler solver
solves the fluid dynamics for the inside region of the coupling surface. The interaction between these two
solvers takes place in two ways.
The mass in the Euler elements exerts a pressure load on the lagrangian elements associated with
the structural surface. These loads constitute an additional set of boundary conditions for the
finite element solver, resulting in new grid point accelerations and velocities for the structure.
From the updated plastic strain or updated stresses of the shell elements it is determined which
elements are failing. Finally the structural grid points are moved using the new velocities
The structural grid points move and so the Euler mesh has a new effective boundary.
Consequently, the volume of mass in each element may change. Since density is mass divided by
the volume of the mass, densities will also change, and so will the pressures. In the following we
shall assume that the material is insides the coupling surface.
Figure 10-1
In this figure the square represents an Euler element that is intersected by the coupling surface. Only
that part of the square that is inside the coupling surface can contain mass. Therefore this part is the
effective volume of material in the element. The boundary of this effective volume consists of two
types of surfaces:
Euler element boundaries that connect two neighboring elements called Euler faces.
Main Index
Parts of the coupling surface that are within the Euler element. They will be called polpacks,
Here M is the mass in the Euler element, V is the velocity vector, A denotes the area vector of the face,
t is the time step, DO NOR denotes the element supplying mass, and A C CE P TOR denotes the element
receiving mass. In most cases, the coupling surface is not permeable and there is no transport across the
polpacks. However, in case coupling surface shell elements have a porosity model assigned, the flux
equations take that into account.
The momentum in an element can increase by either transport of momentum or by a pressure load
working on the polpacks and faces. The pressure load contribution to this momentum increase is the
surface integral pn i dA t . The force contribution of a face to the momentum increase of the element left
A
Main Index
Here
is the area vector pointing from the left element to the right
element and
is a weighted average of the pressure in the two elements that are on the left and
right of the face. These momentum updates clearly conserve the combined momentum of the left and
right element.
p f ace
For polpacks, the contribution is likewise, but now the pressure at the polpack is given by the pressure in
the Euler element that contains the polpack. To conserve momentum, the negative of this momentum
contribution is put as a force on the coupling surface shell element that hosts the polpack. This is the way
boundary conditions are imposed on the Lagrangian element constituting the coupling surface.
In a similar way the energy equation is applied.
The procedure for advancing the Euler domain with one time step is as follows:
Do all finite element objects and contact. Move the finite element objects in accordance to their grid
point velocities.
Using the new position of the finite element structures compute new polpacks. Using polpacks and faces
compute for all Euler elements the volume of the portion that is inside the coupling surface.
Transport mass, momentum, and energy across all faces and permeable polpacks using the conservation
laws. The flux velocity is the average of the left and right Euler element velocity. In case no right Euler
element is available the flux velocity is determined from an inflow condition and in some cases the
velocity of the Euler element. Examples are holes and parts of surfaces that enable flow into the inside
region of the coupling surface as a means of filling the inside region of the coupling surface. At the end
of this step, element masses are fully updated.
For each Euler element, compute density from the new mass and volume and compute pressure from the
equation of state using the new density.
Compute the effect of Euler element pressures to both structure as well as other Euler elements by going
over respectively polpacks and Euler faces. This effect will contribute to the Euler element momentum.
The transport contribution to the momentum increase has already been computed in step 3. At the end of
this step the element momentum and energy are fully updated.
Advance the Lagrangian shell elements associated with the coupling surface with one time step using the
internal shell element forces, contact forces, and external forces from the Euler domain and compute new
velocities on the grid points.
Compute a new stable time step based on the mesh size, speed of sound and velocity. The stability
criterion used is the CFL condition and applies to both the tank surface as well as to the Euler elements.
Main Index
(10-3)
de i j
u i u j 1 u k
ds ij
--------- = 2 ------------= -------- + -------- --- -------- ij
x i x j 3 x k
dt
dt
(10-4)
Here the derivative is along the path of the moving mass and ( u k ) denotes the velocity in the Euler
element. Since the velocity of the moving mass equals the velocity in the Euler element the total
derivative is given by
ds i j
s
s
s x
s
--------- = --------i-j + --------i-j -------k- = --------ij- + u k --------i-j
dt
t
x k t
t
x k
(10-5)
de ij
s ij
s
--------- + u k --------ij- = 2 ------------t
x k
dt
(10-6)
This equation is not in conservation form and using the equation as it is would require the additional
computation of shear stress gradients. By putting the equation in conservation, gradient computations are
not needed and the equation be solved using the divergence theorem.
To enable further use for other quantities like plastic strain consider
------ + u k ------= D
xk
t
(10-7)
x k
x k
x k
t
t
t
(10-8)
This gives
( u k )
-------------( )- -------------------- = D
+
x k
t
1 ( ) ( u k )
--- -------------- + --------------------- = D
x k
t
(10-9)
Main Index
(10-10)
In this way, transport of stresses can be computed in close analogy to mass and momentum by
transporting mass times shear stress. In the same way transport of plastic strain is carried out.
Strain rates are computed from velocity gradients. They are obtained by use of the divergence theorem
as follows:
ui
V -------- =
x j
u i
- dV
------x j
div ( ej u i ) dV
u i e j dS
Face F ace
Sj
ui
(10-11)
fa ces
Pressure can be either computed from density or updated from volume strain rates. The first corresponds
to splitting the stress tensor computation into a hydrostatic part and a deviatoric part. The second
computes the stress tensor without any splitting and uses the isotropic Hookes law in terms of strain
rates. We show that the two approaches are equivalent. Consider computing pressure from the volume
strain rates. Differentiation of the isotropic Hookes law gives
u
dp
------ = K --------i
dt
x i
with
(10-12)
u
d
(10-13)
yields
dp
------ = K
---- d
-----dt
dt
(10-14)
dp
d------ = ---( K ln )
dt
dt
p =
ref
ref
ref
ref
ref
(10-15)
So to first-order in density, Hookes law and the equation of state give the same pressure. Basing the
pressure on the logarithm of the density ratio is expensive and the linearization is sufficiently accurate.
Pressures are computed using the linearization.
To account for rotation of material the Jaumann correction is applied.
Main Index
tries to maintain interfaces between materials. Consider, for example, the case of a blast wave of air in
water. It is important that the interface between water and air during the expansion of the blast wave is
maintained and does not deteriorate by the unphysical mixing of water and air.
To enable a multi-material simulation, a certain amount of bookkeeping is needed. For every Euler
element, the following information is available:
The number of materials inside the Euler elements
For each material, the volume fraction, the material ID, the density, the mass, the specific energy,
the total energy, and volume strain rates are stored. The volume fraction of a material is defined
as the fraction of Element volume that is filled with that material.
The transport logic for multi-material amounts to:
Compute the volume to be transported. This is V A t and this volume flux gives rise to a mass
flux. If there is only one material, the mass flux is the density times the volume flux, but now the
donor element has several materials and each material has a distinct density and, therefore, the
mass flux is split into several mass fluxes. Each material in the donor element has a distinct mass
flux and this material specific mass flux is easily converted into a volume flux by using the
material density. Using this conversion, the mass fluxes should give rise to volume fluxes that
add up to a total volume flux that equals V A t . Materials are transported out of the element
until the prescribed total volume flux is reached. The only remaining issue is which materials are
transported first.
Determine for both donor element as well as acceptor element which materials are present in
the element.
Look which materials are common to both elements.
First transport any material that is common to both elements. Transport these common materials
in proportion to their acceptor material fraction. A material is transported with the material
density of the donor element and this material density translates a volume flux into a mass flux
and vice versa. Subtract any mass that is transported from the flux volume. If there is sufficient
mass of the common materials in the donor element the whole flux volume will be used to
transport the common materials.
If after transport of the common materials the flux volume is not fully used yet, transport
Main Index
pressure equilibrium. Since masses of materials in Euler elements are only changed by the transport
computation, these masses are fixed during the pressure computation. The volume taken up by each
material in an Euler element is not known but determines the pressure inside the material. By adjusting
the volumes of the materials simultaneously, pressure equilibrium is achieved. Therefore, the pressure
computation amounts to an iterative process that iterates on the volumes of the materials inside the
Euler element.
To understand the influence of the material volumes consider an element with fuel and air. Suppose that
at the start of a cycle, there is pressure equilibrium and that during transport, air enters the element.
Because of the surplus of air there is no longer pressure equilibrium. Physically, it is expected that the air
very slightly compresses the fuel until pressure equilibrium is achieved. The compression of the air is just
the adjustment of the material volumes of fuel and air. The material volume of air increases while the
material volume of fuel decreases.
Viscosity
Viscous stresses only contribute to the momentum balance:
d--- u dV + u i ( u n ) dA = pn i dA + s ij n j dA
dt i
V
(10-16)
si j
is given by
1
s i j = e i j --- e kk
3
(10-17)
1 u i u i
e ij = --- -------- + --------
2 x j x j
The contribution of viscous dissipation to the energy balance law is small and is not taken into account.
Velocity gradients are computed by Gausss law as given by equation (10-18). For boundary
contributions, the imposed velocity boundary condition is used. Material in one element exerts a viscous
force on material in the adjacent elements and leads to changes in momentum. The momentum
transferred across an Euler element face is given by
s i j n j dA dt
u i
u n
2
= --- u k, k n i + -------- + --------- F AC E A R EA * t
3
n
x i
(10-18)
The second term is most significant and requires a special treatment. This term is proportional to the
normal velocity derivative at the face. It can be obtained by averaging the normal derivative over the left
and right Euler element:
u
--------i
n
Face
1 u i
= --- -------2 n
u i
+ --------
n R
(10-19)
This leads to decoupling. To show this, consider an Euler element and two of its opposing faces. For both
opposing faces, a viscous flux that is proportional to equation (10-18) is added to the Euler element. The
net contribution is proportional to the difference of equation (10-18) for the two faces. In this subtraction,
the normal velocity derivative of the element itself drops out. As a result, the contribution of viscous
Main Index
fluxes to the momentum increase of the Euler elements is only weakly coupled to the velocity gradient
in the Euler element. In practice, decoupling follows. To avoid this decoupling, the gradient is computed
directly using the velocity difference between across the face, giving:
u i
-------n
Face
u i ui
= ------------------x
(10-20)
Furthermore, walls exert viscous stress on material and, at the wall, a no-slip condition is applied.
Computing these in a specific local system enables a straightforward use of the no-slip condition. In this
local system, the x-axis is along the normal of the boundary. The no-slip condition ensures that all
tangential velocity derivatives are zero. In addition, normal derivatives are computed directly from the
velocity difference between element and wall. This leads to shear stresses at the wall:
4 u wall u el ement
4 u
l oc
s xx = --- ------ = --- -------------------------------------3 x wall x elemen t
3 x
v wall v element
v
l oc
s xy = ------ = ------------------------------------x
x wall x element
l oc
s zx
(10-21)
= ------- = ---------------------------------------x
x wall x element
w wall
w el ement
Figure 10-2
Main Index
Main Index
(10-22)
f ( q ), g ( q ) ,
and
h(q)
q =
u
v
w
E
u2 + p
f( q) =
uv
uw
( E + p )u
uv
g ( q ) = v2 + p
v w
( E + p )v
uw
h( q) =
vw
w2 + p
( E + p )w
(10-23)
Equation (10-22) describes the conservation of mass, momentum and energy. In equation (10-23), is
the material density, u, v, w the velocity components, p the pressure, and E the total energy. For a gas,
we can close the system (note that we have five equations, with six unknowns) by adding the equation of
state for a calorically perfect gas (the gamma law equation of state in MD Nastran Nonlinear Explicit
(SOL 700)).
p = ( 1) e
(10-24)
In equation (10-24), e denotes the specific internal energy of the gas and is the ratio of specific heats.
There exist more equations of state for gases, but most gases can be described as calorically perfect gases,
in which case equation (10-24) applies.
For a fluid in its simplest form, we may use a so-called simple bulk equation of state:
p = K ----- 1
0
(10-25)
In equation (10-24), K is the material bulk modulus and 0 is the reference density at which the material
has no pressure. Also, for fluids, there are more equations of state, like a full polynomial or Taits
equation of state. Both are implemented in the approximate Riemann solver that MD Nastran Nonlinear
Explicit (SOL 700) uses, but the method of implementation is similar to the simple bulk equation of state
and is not described in detail here.
Numerical Approach
The conservation laws as described by equation (10-23) are numerically solved by an upwind, cellcentered finite volume method on unstructured 3-D meshes. We will briefly describe the solution
method here.
When the conservation laws are written in integral form, by integrating over an arbitrary volume, the
finite volume (discretized) method becomes apparent when we consider each element in an Eulerian
mesh as a finite volume on which we have to solve the conservation laws as described by equation
(10-23). The integral form of equation (10-23)) when using Gauss integral theorem:
---q dV +
t
V
( f ( q ) nx + g ( q ) ny + h ( q ) nz ) d S
= 0
(10-26)
From equation (10-26), it becomes apparent that the fluxes of mass, momentum, and energy have to be
integrated normal to the boundary of the volume or its surface. When we use the rotational invariance of
the Euler equations of motion, the integral form can be rewritten using the transformation matrix that
describes the transformation of the state variables in a direction normal to the surface:
Main Index
----- q dV +
t
V
f ( q ) dS
(10-27)
= 0
where q denotes the state vector transformed to a coordinate system with the local x-axis in the direction
of the normal to the surface. When we then make the step to a discretized form, by defining the volume
as the volume of a finite element (an element of the Euler mesh), and the surface defined by the faces
spanning the element, equation (10-27) becomes a local one-dimensional system of equations for each
face of the element with the local x-axis in the direction of the normal to the elements face. Note that the
fluxes in the local y- and z-direction do not contribute to the change of the state variable. The system of
equations to solve for each element face thus becomes:
q f ( q )
------ + ------------- = 0
t
x
(10-28)
where x defines the x-direction normal to the elements face. Considering the fact that each face has a left
and a right element connected to it, we can view the state variables in the left- and right connected
element as initial conditions for the solution of the flux normal to the face:
q L x < 0
q ( x ,0 ) =
q R x > 0
(10-29)
Equations (10-28) and (10-29) describe a so-called Riemann problem. Thus, the solution for the fluxes at
the element faces amounts to solving a local 1-D Riemann problem for each of the faces of the element,
considering the left and right state of the fluid or the gas. The contribution of the face fluxes result in the
state change in the element as a function of time as denoted by the first term in equation (10-28). The
fluxes on the faces are determined using a flux function, f R ( q L, q R ) by which, using equations (10-27),
(10-28), and (10-29), the discretization becomes:
dq i
1-------- = ---Vi
dt
f R ( q L, q R ) A n
(10-30)
n =1
In equation (10-30),
element, and
An
Vi
Using a flux difference scheme, the flux function can be written as:
1
1
f R ( q L, q R ) = --- { f ( q L ) + f ( q R ) } --- { f + f - }
2
2
(10-31)
Main Index
(10-32)
When we use the eigenvectors, the eigenvalues, and the wave strengths that can be found from a
diagonalization of the Jacobian matrix of the Euler equations, we arrive at a simple definition of the flux
function. Note that the shape of the eigenvectors, eigenvalues, and the wave strengths depend on the type
of equation of state the flux function is constructed for. In general terms, the numerical flux function used
in the scheme is defined as:
5
1
1
f R ( q L, q R ) = --- { f ( q L ) + f ( q R ) } --- i i R i
2
2
i = 1
(10-33)
(10-34)
Using the ideal gas equation of state (gamma-law equation of state), we find for the wave strengths:
p a u 1 = -------------------------------2 a 2
(10-35)
p + a u 2 = -------------------------------2 a 2
R 1 = 1 u a v w
H
ua
(10-36)
+
R 2 = 1 u + a v w
H
ua
In the above equations, the quantities denoted by a tilde are weighted quantities according to:
= L + ( 1 ) R
L
= ---------------------------L
+ R
(10-37)
All quantities are averaged using the above definition, except for the density:
=
L R
(10-38)
The above described flux evaluation scheme is called an approximate Riemann scheme due to the fact a
linearization using the weighted quantities at the element faces is applied. As a result, the scheme exhibits
an artifact, namely that it does not satisfy the entropy inequality. The entropy inequality states that the
entropy of a system can only remain constant or increase. Due to the artifact, the scheme is able to also
capture mathematically sound, but physically impossible discontinuities like expansion shocks. This is
easily repaired by adding a so-called entropy fix to the scheme as described in the next section.
Main Index
( z) = ( z2 + 2 )
1
---------------------2 1
a 1
a < 1
(10-39)
The function works automatically on the eigenvalues of the system, represented in equation (10-39) by
z , and is governed by a single parameter 1 that depends on the flow field:
w
1 = u--- + --v- + --a
a
a
(10-40)
(10-41)
Main Index
(10-42)
For the right side of the face, the second order approximation is defined by:
1
q iR+ 1 2 = q i + 1 --- R ( q i + 2 q i + 1 )
2
(10-43)
with:
1
1
R = --- ( 1 ) ( r R ) + ( 1 + ) r R ----R-
r
2
rR
(10-44)
qi + 1 q i
= -----------------------------q i + 2 qi + 1
= 1
( r ) = ma x [ 0 ,min ( 2 r ,1 ) ,min ( r ,2 ) ]
(10-45)
Time Integration
The set of equations is integrated in time using a multi-stage scheme. For the second order accurate
solution, a three-stage time integration scheme is used:
q(0) = qi
1 t
q ( 1 ) q ( 0 ) = ----------------- F ( 0 )
Vi
2 t
q ( 2 ) q ( 0 ) = ----------------- F ( 1 )
Vi
(10-46)
3 t
q ( 3 ) q ( 0 ) = ----------------- F ( 2 )
Vi
q in + 1 = q ( 3 )
In equation (10-46),
q(k)
F(k)
the stage
are defined as
F(k) =
f R ( q ( k ) ,q ( k ) ) A n
L
(10-47)
n =1
using the state variables at each stage of the integration. The final step gives the solution of the state
variables at the new time level.
Main Index
Main Index
11
Main Index
Introduction
Airbag Definition
Seatbelts
394
395
405
413
414
Introduction
The MD Nastran r2 release, SOL 700 includes a Fluid Structure Interaction (FSI) capability that is based
on the advanced Finite Volume (Eulerian) and General Coupling Technology available in MSC.Dytran.
The objective of fluid-structure interaction using the coupling algorithm is to enable the material modeled
in Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes to interact. Initially, the two solvers are entirely separate. Lagrangian
elements that lie within an Eulerian mesh do not affect the flow of the Eulerian material and no forces
are transferred from the Eulerian material back to the Lagrangian structure. The coupling algorithm
computes the interaction between the two sets of elements. It thus enables complex fluid-structure
interaction problems to be analyzed.
The first task in coupling the Eulerian and Lagrangian sections of a model is to create a surface on the
Lagrangian structure. This surface is used to transfer the forces between the two solver domains. The
surface acts as a boundary to the flow of material in the Eulerian mesh. At the same time, the stresses in
the Eulerian elements cause forces to act on the coupling surface, distorting the Lagrangian elements.
The method used for airbag simulation is full gas dynamics and is based on General Coupling with
adaptive Euler. Unlike other techniques such as the ALE (Arbitrary Lagrange Euler) where the Eulerian
mesh is fixed in space or GBAG method where the gas flow is modeled by applying a pre-determined
pressure profile to inflate the bag, in the General Coupling technique, the Eulerian mesh will adapt
itself to the Lagrangian fabric model as the airbag is inflated. In other words, when the airbag is initially
at the folded stage, there is a small Eulerian domain encapsulating the Lagrangian mesh. When the airbag
is inflated, the Eulerian mesh expands as the gas jet flows through the airbag compartments and adapts
itself to follow the airbag fabric. This technique is unique in MD Nastran r2 and is considered the most
accurate method to predict the complex airbag behavior such as Out-of-Position (OOP) simulation, as
required by FMVSS 208, where the occupant is already leaning forward when the airbag is inflated. In
addition, CFD deployment of multi-compartmented airbags can easily be modeled with this technique by
using multiple, fully automatic, adaptive Euler domains. The following capabilities are available:
Analyze multiple compartments with the CFD approach.
Simulate flow from one CFD domain into another CFD domain.
The individual CFD domains are dynamic and adaptive. The user does not need to mesh the CFD
domains, nor does he have to worry about the size, since the CFD domains will automatically
follow the deploying airbag compartments.
Flow through both small and large holes is accurately calculated.
Inflator models
Main Index
Figure 13-1
Airbag Definition
The airbags are defined by using the AIRBAG entry in SOL 700. Airbags can be automatically inflated
by defining a gas flow rate in Eulerian domain using full gas dynamics method. A second method, the
conventional uniform pressure method, is also available but it is not as accurate as the full gas dynamics.
All related airbag input definitions such as inflator and porosity models, environmental parameters, are
grouped in entries that can be directly input in the AIRBAG entry. Every entity has certain parameters
associated with it that has to be input immediately following the name of the entity. The order of which
entity is entered first in the AIRBAG card is immaterial as long as the associated parameters are defined
right after the name of the entity. The following entity groups are available:
CFD
Entries for this entity describe the properties of the Eulerian domain. Only one
CFD section can be defined. If this section is not defined, the uniform pressure
method is used.
ENVIRONM Entries for this entity describe the properties of the environmental conditions for the
airbag. Only one ENVIRONM section can be defined. If not defined, the values
for INITIAL will be used.
Main Index
INITIAL
Entries for this entity describe the properties of the environmental conditions for the
airbag. Only one INITIAL section can be defined and is required.
INFLATOR
Entries for this entity describe the properties of an inflator that is attached to the
airbag. More than one inflator may be defined.
CGINFLTR
Entries for this entity describe the properties of a cold gas inflator that is attached to
the airbag. More than one inflator may be defined.
SMALHOLE
Entries for this entity describe the properties of a small hole in the airbag. More than
one SMALHOLE may be defined. A small hole should be used when the size of the
hole is of the same order as the size of the elements of the Euler mesh.
LARGHOLE Entries for this entity describe the properties of a large hole in the airbag. More than
one LARGHOLE may be defined. A large hole should be used when the size of the
hole is of the larger than the size of the elements of the Euler mesh.
PERMEAB
Entries for this entity describe the properties of the permeability of the airbag fabric.
More than one PERMEAB may be defined.
CONVECT
Entries for this entity describe the properties of the loss of energy of the gas in the
airbag by means of convection through the airbag surface. More than one
CONVECT may be defined.
RADIATE
Entries for this entity describe the properties of the loss of energy of the gas in the
airbag by means of radiation through the airbag surface. More than one RADIATE
may be defined. When this option is used, the Stephan-Boltzmann constant must be
defined by PARAM, SBOLTZ.
GAS
Entries for this entity describe the properties of gases. More than 1 GAS may be
defined and the gases defined in one AIRBAG entry can be referenced by other
AIRBAG entries.
There are other entries in SOL 700 to define airbag properties. These are:
PARAM, UGASC
PARAM, SBOLTZ
PARAM,
DYDEFAUL
INFLFRC
EOSGAM
GRIA
Main Index
INFLHB
Hybrid inflator defined by mass flow rate and static temperature of multiple
inflowing gasses.
INFLCG
Coldgas inflator behaves like a reservoir filled with high pressure gas that
flows into the airbag.
Figure 13-2
For both the uniform pressure model and the full gas dynamics (CFD) method, the inflator location and
area are defined by means of a subsurface created by a BSURF, BCPROP, BCMATL, or BCSEG
parameters. These parameters are referenced by BFID field on the INFLTR entity. It can only reference
shell elements that belong to the airbag surface, as defined by BFID. The characteristics of the inflator
are specified on an INFLTR entity on AIRBAG card. This entry references tables for the mass flow rate
and the temperature of the inflowing gas.
A model can be defined containing both (CFD) and uniform pressure model for the airbag. These two
options can be defined with identical inflator characteristics. When the CFD entity and its associated
parameters are omitted from the AIRBAG card, the uniform pressure method will be used. In case the
CFD entity is present, the airbag will use the Euler method from the start of the simulation. In case the
value of SWITCH is nonzero, the airbag will switch from an Eulerian representation to a Uniform
Pressure formulation.
Hybrid Inflator Model
The hybrid inflator supports the inflow of multiple gases through an inflator subsurface, as well as
providing a type of thermally ideal gas for which the specific heat at constant pressure c p can be
dependent on temperature.
In addition, the properties of the gas contained in an air bag will be changed based on the gas composition
and temperature. Updating of gas constants is available for use together with INFLTR, INFLHB, INFLTNK,
and INFLCG inflator definitions, and with PORHOLE, PERMEAB, PERMGBG, PORFCPL, and
PORFGBG porosity definitions.
Main Index
A thermally ideal gas is specified by the specific gas constant and the variation of specific heat at constant
pressure with temperature.
The specific gas constant for a gas is defined as:
R = R uni M
where
R un i
Using the specific heat as function of temperature, the specific internal energy of a gas as a function of
temperature is found as:
T
e(T) =
( c p ( T ) R ) dT + e ref
T ref
cv
so that:
e ( T ) = cv ( T ) T
Mixture of gas
A hybrid inflator is specifically meant to give an inflow of several gases with different properties. To
account for the properties of these gases, it is necessary to keep track of the composition of a gas at a
certain time, not only for the inflator but also for the gas mixture inside the air bag. For use with hybrid
inflators, it is assumed that instantaneous mixing takes place. This means the gas composition are the
same throughout the volume.
For an inflator, gas fractions are given as user input. For gasbags and Eulerian, gas fractions are based on
the total mass of each gas at a certain time. Gas fractions are defined as follows:
mass i ( t )
mfra c i ( t ) = -------------------------m ass t ot ( t )
Properties of the gas mixture inside a surface are based upon the principle that a mixture of (thermally)
ideal gases is itself an ideal gas. This yields for the properties of the mixture:
m
R* =
mfrac i t R i
i =1
m
c v* =
mfrac i ( t ) cvi ( T )
i =1
c p* = c v* + R *
c p*
* = ----*cv
Main Index
Here T is the temperature of the gas mixture. This may be the inflow temperature of the inflator, the
temperature inside a constant pressure gasbag, or the average temperature of all Eulerian elements that
are not covered by the coupling surface. The latter is found as:
ecel l
T Euler = ----------------cv
E ul er
Energy/work
A formulation for the change of energy in a closed volume can be found when c p and c v are a function
of temperature and gas composition. This takes into account inflow (by hybrid inflators), outflow (by
porosity), and energy loss (through convection and radiation).
We know:
dQ = dU + pdV
where:
d Q = d q in dq l o ss d q out
d U = m de + e dm
For the work done by the gas mixture, the following holds:
dV
V
p ------- = M ( c p* c v* ) T --dt
V
Given the expressions above for a thermally ideal gas and a general mixture of these gases, this finally
yields for the rate of temperature change in an enclosed volume:
*
T dc v
1 + ----*- ---------
c v dT
T
1
--- = ------------ ( [ M in c p* ( t ,T i n ) ] T i n [ M o u t c p* ( t ,T ou t ) ] T o ut Q lo ss )+
Me
T
in
o ut
( c vi ( T ) m i )
V
i
- ( * 1 ) -- ------------------------------------V
M c v*
Main Index
Ti
and
Tt
c p m T i = c v m T t + c v m T t
V = 0 ,
hence,
p V = m R T t + m RT t
Porosity in Airbags
Porosity is defined as the flow of gas through the airbag surface. There are two ways to model this:
1. Holes: The airbag surface contains a discrete hole.
2. Permeability: The airbag surface is made from material that is not completely sealed.
The same porosity models are available for both the uniform pressure airbag model as the Eulerian
coupled (CFD) airbag model. The porous flow can be either to and from the environment or into and from
another uniform pressure model.
Holes
Flow through holes as defined on the SMALHOLE entries is based on the theory of one-dimensional gas
flow through a small orifice. LARGHOLE entries define flow through a hole with the velocity method.
The velocity method can only be active for Eulerian airbags. When the SMALHOLE is used on the
AIRBAG card, the theory of one-dimensional gas flow through a small orifice is applied.
Velocity Method
The transport of mass through the porous area is based on the velocity of the gas in the Eulerian elements,
relative to the moving of coupling surface (airbag fabric).
Main Index
Eulerian Element
SX i nt
Coupling Surface
The volume of the Eulerian materian transported through the faces of the coupling surface that intersect
an Eulerian element is equal to
V trans = d t ( v A )
where
V trans
= transported volume during one time step ( V trans > 0 for the outflow;
the inflow).
V trans < 0
dt
= time step.
= porosity coefficient.
= area of the face of the coupling surface that intersects the Eulerian element
the area of the face that lies inside the Eulerian element.
for
is equal to
The transport mass through the porous area is equal to the density of the gas times the
transported volume.
Pressure Method
The transport of mass through the porous area is based on the pressure difference between the gas in the
Eulerian element and the outside pressure. The outside pressure is the pressure as specified on the
ENVIRONM section in the AIRBAG entry.
Eulerian Element
S X i nt
Coupling Surface
Main Index
The volume of the Eulerian material transported through the faces of the coupling surface that intersect
an Eulerian element is equal to:
V trans = d t ( A A )
2 p p exh 2 /
------------- --------
1 p
exh
p-------- p
----------+ 1
where
V trans
= transported volume during one time step ( V trans > 0 for outflow;
V trans < 0
dt
= time step.
= porosite coefficient.
= area of the face of the coupling surface that intersects the Eularian element
the area of the face that lies inside the Eulerian element.
p=
= adiabatic exponent =
p exh
for inflow).
is equal to
C p Cv .
The pressure at the face is approximated by the one-dimensional isentropic expansion of the gas to the
critical pressure or the environmental pressure ascending to
> pc
p
p = env
p
env < p c
where
pc
2 ----------p c p ------------ r 1
+ 1
In case the outside pressure is greater than the pressure of the gas, inflow through the coupling surface
occurs. This porosity model can only be used for ideal gases; i. e., materials modeled with the gamma
law equation of state (EOSGAM).
Permeability
Permeability is defined as the velocity of gas through a surface area depending on the pressure difference
over that area.
Main Index
On the PERMEAB entity in AIRBAG card, permeability can be specified by either a coefficient or a
pressure dependent table:
1. Coefficient:
Gas Velocity
( massflow) )
coeff = -------------------------------- ( pressdiff )
Coeff
press_diff
2. Table
Gas Velocity
press_diff
The velocity of the gas flow can never exceed the sonic speed:
V max V sonic
where
R T crit
T crit
where
T gas
Main Index
where the choice of X j may coincide with the folded or unfold configurations. It is this unfolded
configuration which may be specified here.
Note that a reference geometry which is smaller than the initial airbag geometry will not induce initial
tensile stresses.
If a liner is included and the LNRC parameter set to 1 in MATD034, compression is disabled in the liner
until the reference geometry is reached; i.e., the fabric element becomes tensile.
where h ( t ) is the time-dependent heat transfer coefficient, A is the (sub)surface area for heat
transfer, T is the temperature inside the airbag, and T env is the environment temperature.
2. Radiation:
A ]
q rad = eA s [ T A T env
where e is the gas emissivity, A is the (sub)surface area for heat transfer,
inside the airbag, and T env is the environment temperature.
Main Index
is the temperature
Seatbelts
Belt elements are single degree of freedom elements connecting two nodes. When the strain in an element
is positive (i.e. the current length is greater then the unstretched length), a tension force is calculated from
the material characteristics and is applied along the current axis of the element to oppose further
stretching. The unstretched length of the belt is taken as the initial distance between the two nodes
defining the position of the element plus the initial slack length.
Seatbelt shell elements must be used with caution. The seatbelt shells distribute the loading on the surface
of the dummy more realistically than the two node belt elements. For the seatbelt shells to work with
sliprings and retractors it is necessary to use a logically regular mesh of quadrilateral elements.
Slipring
Retractor
Top View:
RN5
SN5
RE4
RN4
SRE14
SRE24
SN4
RE3
RN3
SRE13
SRE23
SN3
RE2
SRE12
RE1
SRE11
SRE22
SN2
RN2
SRE21
RN1
SN1
Figure 13-3
The ordering of the nodes and elements are important for seatbelt shells.
Main Index
Seatbelt Pretensioner
Pretensioners allow modeling of five types of active devices which tighten the belt during the initial
stages of a crash. Types 1 and 5 represent a pyrotechnic device which spins the spool of a retractor,
causing the belt to be reeled in. The user defines a pull-in versus time curve which applies once the
pretensioner activates. Types 2 and 3 represent preloaded springs or torsion bars which move the buckle
when released. The pretensioner is associated with any type of spring element including rotational. Note
that when the preloaded spring, locking spring, and any restraints on the motion of the associated nodes
are defined in the normal way; the action of the pretensioner is merely to cancel the force in one spring
until (or after) it fires. With the second type, the force in the spring element is canceled out until the
pretensioner is activated. In this case, the spring in question is normally a stiff, linear spring which acts
as a locking mechanism, preventing motion of the seat belt buckle relative to the vehicle. A preloaded
spring is defined in parallel with the locking spring. This type avoids the problem of the buckle being free
to drift before the pretensioner is activated. Type 4, a force type, is described below.
To activate the pretensioner, the following sequence of events must occur:
1. Any one of up to four sensors must be triggered.
2. Then a user-defined time delay occurs.
3. Then the pretensioner acts.
Type 1 pretensioner is intended to simulate a pyrotechnic retractor. Each retractor has a loading (and
optional unloading) curve that describes the force on the belt element as a function of the amount of belt
that has been pulled out of the retractor since the retractor locked. The type 1 pretensioner acts as a shift
of this retractor load curve. An example will make this clear. Suppose at a particular time that 5mm of
belt material has left the retractor. The retractor responds with a force corresponding to 5mm pull-out on
it's loading curve. But suppose this retractor has a type 1 pretensioner defined, and, at this instant of time,
the pretensioner specifies a pull-in of 20mm. The retractor then responds with a force that corresponds
to (5mm + 20mm) on it's loading curve. This results in a much larger force. The effect can be that belt
material will be pulled in, but there is no guarantee. The benefit of this implementation is that the force
vs. pull-in load curve for the retractor is followed and no unrealistic forces are generated. Still, it may be
difficult to produce realistic models using this option, so two new types of pretensioners have been added.
These are available in MD Nastran r2 and later versions.
Types 2 and 3 are simple triggers for activating or deactivating springs, which then pull on the buckle.
No changes have been made to these, and they are not discussed here.
The type 4 pretensioner takes a force vs. time curve (see Figure 13-4). Each time step, the retractor
computes the desired force without regard to the pretensioner. If the resulting force is less than that
specified by the pretensioner load curve, then the pretensioner value is used instead. As time goes on,
the pretensioner load curve should drop below the forces generated by the retractor, and the pretensioner
is then essentially inactive. This provides for good control of the actual forces, so no unrealistic values
are generated. The actual direction and amount of belt movement is unspecified, and depends on the
other forces being exerted on the belt. This is suitable when the force the pretensioner exerts over time
is known.
Main Index
Force
Retractor Pull-out Force
Defined Force
vs.
Time Curve
Retractor Lock Time
Time
Figure 13-4
The type 5 pretensioner is essentially the same as the old type 1 pretensioner, but with the addition of a
force limiting value. The pull-in is given as a function of time, and the belt is drawn into the retractor
exactly as desired. However, if at any point the forces generated in the belt exceed the pretensioner force
limit, then the pretensioner is deactivated and the retractor takes over. In order to prevent a large
discontinuity in the force at this point, the loading curve for the retractor is shifted (in the abscissa) by
the amount required to put the current (pull-out, force) on the load curve. For example, suppose the
current force is 1000, and the current pull-out is -10 (10mm of belt has been pulled in by the
pretensioner). If the retractor would normally generate a force of 1000 after 25mm of belt had been pulled
OUT, then the load curve is shifted to the left by 3, and remains that way for the duration of the
calculation. So that at the current pull-in of 10, it generates the force normally associated with a pull out
of 25. If the belt reaches a pull out of 5, the force is as if it were pulled out 40 (5 + the shift of 35), and
so on. This option is included for those who liked the general behavior of the old type 1 pretensioner, but
has the added feature of the force limit to prevent unrealistic behavior.
The type 6 pretensioner is a variation of the type 4 pretensioner, with features of the type 5 pretensioner.
A force vs. time curve is input and the pretensioner force is computed each cycle. The retractor linked to
this pretensioner should specify a positive value for PULL, which is the distance the belt pulls out before
it locks. As the pretensioner pulls the belt into the retractor, the amount of pull-in is tracked. As the
pretensioner force decreases and drops below the belt tension, belt will begin to move back out of the
retractor. Once PULL amount of belt has moved out of the retractor (relative to the maximum pull in
encountered), the retractor will lock. At this time, the pretensioner is disabled, and the retractor force
curve is shifted to match the current belt tension. This shifting is done just like the type 5 pretensioner. It
is important that a positive value of PULL be specified to prevent premature retractor locking which
could occur due to small outward belt movements generated by noise in the simulation.
Main Index
Seatbelt Retractor
The unloading curve should start at zero tension and increase monotonically (i.e., no segments of
negative or zero slope).
Retractors allow belt material to be paid out into a belt element. Retractors operate in one of two regimes:
unlocked when the belt material is paid out, or reeled in under constant tension and locked when a user
defined force-pullout relationship applies.
The retractor is initially unlocked, and the following sequence of events must occur for it to
become locked:
1. Any one of up to four sensors must be triggered. (The sensors are described below.)
2. Then a user-defined time delay occurs.
3. Then a user-defined length of belt must be paid out (optional).
4. Then the retractor locks and once locked, it remains locked.
In the unlocked regime, the retractor attempts to apply a constant tension to the belt. This feature allows
an initial tightening of the belt and takes up any slack whenever it occurs. The tension value is taken from
the first point on the force-pullout load curve. The maximum rate of pull out or pull in is given by 0.01
fed length per time step. Because of this, the constant tension value is not always achieved.
In the locked regime, a user-defined curve describes the relationship between the force in the attached
element and the amount of belt material paid out. If the tension in the belt subsequently relaxes, a
different user-defined curve applies for unloading. The unloading curve is followed until the minimum
tension is reached.
The curves are defined in terms of initial length of belt. For example, if a belt is marked at 10mm intervals
and then wound onto a retractor, and the force required to make each mark emerge from the (locked)
retractor is recorded, the curves used for input would be as follows:
0
.
.
.
Pyrotechnic pretensions may be defined which cause the retractor to pull in the belt at a
predetermined rate. This overrides the retractor force-pullout relationship from the moment when the
pretensioner activates.
If desired, belt elements may be defined which are initially inside the retractor. These will emerge as belt
material is paid out, and may return into the retractor if sufficient material is reeled in during unloading.
Elements e2, e3 and e4 are initially inside the retractor, which is paying out material into element e1.
When the retractor has fed L crit into e1, where
L crit = fed length 1.1 minimum length
Main Index
Main Index
Element 1
Before
Element 1
Element 2
Element 3
Element 2
Element 4
After
Element 3
Element 4
Figure 13-5
Elements in a Retractor
with weblockers
FORCE
without weblockers
PULLOUT
Figure 13-6
Main Index
Seatbelt Sensor
Sensors are used to trigger locking of retractors and activate pretensioners. Four types of sensors are
available which trigger according to the following criteria:
Type 1
When the magnitude of x-, y-, or z- acceleration of a given node has remained
above a given level continuously for a given time, the sensor triggers. This does
not work with nodes on rigid bodies.
Type 2
When the rate of belt payout from a given retractor has remained above a given
level continuously for a given time, the sensor triggers.
Type 3
Type 4
The sensor triggers when the distance between two nodes exceeds a given
maximum or becomes less than a given minimum. This type of sensor is intended
for use with an explicit mass/spring representation of the sensor mechanism.
By default, the sensors are inactive during dynamic relaxation. This allows initial tightening of the belt
and positioning of the occupant on the seat without locking the retractor or firing any pretensioners.
However, a flag can be set in the sensor input to make the sensors active during the dynamic
relaxation phase.
Seatbelt Slipring
Sliprings allow continuous sliding of a belt through a sharp change of angle. Two elements (1 & 2 in
Figure 13-7) meet at the slipring. Node B in the belt material remains attached to the slipring node, but
belt material (in the form of unstretched length) is passed from element 1 to element 2 to achieve slip.
The amount of slip at each time step is calculated from the ratio of forces in elements 1 and 2. The ratio
of forces is determined by the relative angle between elements 1 and 2 and the coefficient of friction, .
The tension in the belts are taken as T 1 and T 2 , where T 2 is on the high tension side and T1 is the force
on the low tension side. Thus, if
T2
is sufficiently close to
T1 ,
sufficient to reduce the ratio T 2 T 1 to e . No slip occurs if both elements are slack. The out-of-balance
force at node B is reacted on the slipring node; the motion of node B follows that of slipring node.
If, due to slip through the slipring, the unstretched length of an element becomes less than the minimum
length (as entered on the belt material card), the belt is remeshed locally: the short element passes through
the slipring and reappears on the other side (see Figure 13-7). The new unstretched length of e1 is
1.1 minimum length . Force and strain in e2 and e3 are unchanged; force and strain in e1 are now equal to
those in e2. Subsequent slip will pass material from e3 to e1. This process can continue with several
elements passing in turn through the slipring.
To define a slipring, the user identifies the two belt elements which meet at the slipring, the friction
coefficient, and the slipring node. The two elements must have a common node coincident with the
slipring node. No attempt should be made to restrain or constrain the common node for its motion will
Main Index
automatically be constrained to follow the slipring node. Typically, the slipring node is part of the vehicle
body structure and, therefore, belt elements should not be connected to this node directly, but any other
feature can be attached, including rigid bodies.
Slipring
B
Element 2
Element 1
Element 1
Element 3
Element 2
Element 3
Before
Figure 13-7
Main Index
After
2. ETA (Engineering Technology Associates) calibrated dummies. The calibrated dummies are
similar to LS-DYNA dummies except that they are validated against a set of standard tests.
The calibration tests are conducted on all Hybrid III, SID and EUROSID models to assure
model fidelity.
5th percentile deformable female dummy
50th percentile deformable male dummy
95th percentile deformable male dummy
5th percentile rigid female dummy
50th percentile rigid male dummy
95th percentile rigid male dummy
EUROSID - 1 (Euro Side Impact Dummy)
US DOT SID
EEVC Upper Legform
FMVSS 201 Headform
Figure 13-8
Main Index
There are many other ATD models available through ETA VPG (Virtual Proving Ground) prepost processor. In addition VPG supports the following barriers:
Barriers
FMVSS & ECE Side Impact Barriers
0-Degree Front Rigid Barrier
30deg Rigid Front Barrier
Front Offset Deformable Barrier
Rear Impact Barrier
Impactors
Rams
Pendulums
Head Forms
Main Index
12
Main Index
Introduction
General Information
User Notes
416
416
419
421
Introduction
This chapter supports
A general description about the hardware and software requirements and definitions.
How to use parallel operation for different platforms.
General Information
Release Platforms
MD Nastran SOL 700 was built and tested on the following hardware with the listed software installed
as given in Table 12-1.
Table 12-1
Operating System
Intel (32-bit)
Windows 2000-SP4
Windows XP-SP2
SGI ** R10K/R12K
IRIX64 6.5.22m
HPUX B.11.00
HP-UX Itanium2
HPUX B.11.23
Compaq Alpha
Tru64 UNIX
v5.1/1885
Solaris 8, 64-bit
( = SunOS 5.8 )
IBM RS/6000
AIX 5.1
Intel Linux **
*For correct operation of the Intel Fortran compiler, MS Visual Studio .NET
must be installed prior to installing the Intel 8.1 compiler. For SOL 700,
these installs are not mandatory.
**The SOL 700 in MD Nastran 2006r2 does not support the
following configurations:
SGI: R4k and R5k; HP: HP-UX 10.20; SUN: Solaris 7; Linux: Redhat
7.3, Windows NT
Main Index
Table 12-2
Platform
Operating System
MPI Version
MPI Location
Intel (32-bit)
Windows 2000-SP4
Windows XP-SP2
MPIch V.1.2.5
SGI R10K/R12K
IRIX64 6.5.22m
HPUX B.11.00
HP MPI 1.08
HP-UX Itanium2
HPUX B.11.23
HP MPI 1.08
Compaq Alpha
IBM RS/6000
AIX 5.1
POE 3.2
LAM 6.5.9
LAM 6.5.9
Intel Linux
Red Hat 9
LAM 6.5.9
/usr/opt/MPI196
/opt/SUNWhpc/HPC5.0
/usr/lpp/ppe.poe
1. Exact location not important as long as it is installed. Install location will be picked up from the registry.
2. Proper install will provide soft links to /usr/bin, /usr/lib.
3. MPI is part of the release and automatically installed in $installdir/bin/exe/mpi
Main Index
For HP (HPUX Risc2 and HPUX Itanium2), the HP MPI is required on all the machines that are
clustered for the job submission. HP MPI 02.00.00.00 is made available and is installed with the
MD Nastran SOL 700 installation.
For all other Unix platforms, it is assumed that a native MPI program is pre-installed. For SGI IRIX64,
"Array Services 3.3 MPT 1.3" should be available. For Sun/Solaris, it is "HPC 5.0". For Dec/Alpha
"Compaq MPI 1.9.6" and for IBM AIX "POE 3.2".
Although no specific hardware requirements exist for MD Nastran SOL 700 to run in distributed memory
parallel mode, it is preferable to have fast network connections between the machines if more than one
machine is used. It is recommended that the network should have a speed of at least 100 MBit per second.
The appropriate licenses are required in all machines used.
For windows, "MP-MPICH" from University of Aachen, Lehrstuhl fr Betriebssysteme is required on
all the machines that are clustered for the job submission. MPICH is made available on the Nastran 2005
installation CD. Install MPIch version 1.2.5, by "default" and then the MPIch service will be installed.
And, make sure you define MSC_LICENSE_FILE and/or LM_LICENSE_FILE environment variables
correctly. If you make any changes make sure you always reboot your machine. The Windows Services
manager that is running the MPIch service needs to get these new settings and that is why a reboot
is necessary.
One workaround is to make a registry entry setting for MSC_LICENSE_FILE in the Flexlm key
location. This change is immediate and doesnt need a reboot.
The head node is used to check your licenses. So make sure the head node has correctly defined
license settings.
If only two machines are to be used, you can use a hub or a cross-over cable to connect them. If more
than two machines are to be used, a switch is preferable. TCP/IP is used for communications.
Compatibility
Version 2006r2 only support connection of homogeneous networks with machines of the same type. Two
machines are compatible if they can both use the same executables. Some examples of compatible
machines are:
1. Several machines with exactly the same processor type and O/S.
2. One SGI R8000/Irix 6.5 and one SGI R10000/Irix 6.5 machine.
3. One HP J-Class/HPUX-11.0 and one HP C-Class/HPUX-11.0.
Definition
1. Root machine: The machine on which the job is started.
2. Remote machine: Any machine other than the root machine that is part of a distributed parallel
run on the network.
Main Index
User Notes
This section assumes that MD Nastran has been successfully installed on at least one of the machines that
are to be used in a distributed analysis, and that the appropriate SOL 700 licenses are in order. Assume
that host1 is the host name of the machine on which the job is to be started (the root machine). The host
names of the other machines (remote machines) are host2, host3, etc.
MD Nastran SOL 700 will always use one of the CPU's of the root machine. Additional slave nodes can
be used in a single calculation by using a hostfile. The hostfiles between windows and Linux/Unix
are different.
hostnamei
number i CPUs
working directory
executable location
For example,
Start run on four CPUs: two on the root machine, bari and two on the remote machine, pisa. Both
machines have exactly the same location of executable. Then hostfile has the following lines:
bari 2
pisa 2
Main Index
And, if two CPUs on bari and one CPU on pisa are used and pisa has different executable location, then
the following lines must be specified in hostfile:
bari 2
pisa 1 /tmp /app2/msc/nastran/msc2006r2/dyna (note the blank
after /tmp)
Main Index
It should say:
hosts:
Main Index
For example:
murano walter
murano.adams.com walter
usher walter
usher.adams.com walter
miller walter
miller.adams.com walter
+
6. Make sure that rsh does not show any echo's from the .cshrc file. You must modify
your .cshrc file such with if (! $?prompt) that no echo's or clear's are done. You can
check that by:
rsh {remote system} date
7. Set the path such that hboot can be executed. This means that the path must be set correctly by
the .cshrc on the remote machine. You can test this by:
rsh {remote system} 'echo $path'
rsh {remote system} 'which hboot'
Do not omit the quotes from the command line. Without them, the actual path of the machine you are on
will be echoed.
The same working directory as used on the root machine does not have to exist on the remote machines.
On Linux systems, if multiple jobs are to be run by a particular user simultaneously, a manual lamboot
from the command line (or a script) must be done prior to running the first job. In addition, PATH=3 must
be specifid on the SOL 700, ID entry and a line lamboot=no added. A user can determine the proper
location of lam by running a small job, examining the f06 file and searching for the string execut
The command shown in the example below should then be executed.
A typical f06 file shows the following:
dytran-lsdyna will be executed using the command
/usr/msc/programs/nastran/dytran-lsdyna/run_dytran
For this case, the following commands should be placed in a script and the script executed to establish
the lamboot:
#!/bin/csh
setenv LAMHOME /usr/msc/programs/nastran/dytran-lsdyna/mpi/bin
set path = ($LAMHONE $path)
$LAMHOME/lamboot
To check if lam is running, the user should execute the following command:
ps -ef | grep lam
As long as the lam processes is not killed, it will remain running unless the machine is rebooted. To
terminate the process, either kill it from the command line or enter the following command:
/usr/msc/programs/nastran/dytran-lsdyna/mpi/bin/lamhalt
Main Index
AIX
The same working directory on the remote machines (the full path) must exist as the one used on the
root machine.
Alpha
The same working directory as used on the root machine does not have to exist on the remote machines.
Solaris
The same working directory on the remote machines (the full path) must exist as the one used on the
root machine.
SGI Altix & Irix64
Before you can start the MPI on SGI, you first need to setup and start the array services. This array keeps
track of which machines belong to the MPI Universe. Unfortunately you need to be root to define one:
<> su root
First check if the array services are enabled:
# vi /usr/lib/array/arrayd.auth
The variable AUTHENTICATION must be set from NOREMOTE to NONE.
Create the array:
# vi /usr/lib/array/arrayd.conf
[add in the following lines:]
array {array name}
machine {machine1}
machine {machine2}
Add as many as desired. For instance:
array irixaa
machine zephyr
machine tigra
Restart (or start) the array:
# /etc/init.d/array restart
You also need to add a special login name:
#vi /etc/passwd
guest:x:81:99:array services guest:/dev/null:/bin/tcsh
#vi /etc/group
guest:x:99:
Exit root login:
# exit
Main Index
Machine
From
What
walter
tigra.dtw.macsch.com
172.31.188.227
/bin/tcsh
walter
zephyr
72.31.188.227
The same working directory on the remote machines (the full path) must exist as the one used on the root
machine. To start a SOL 700 calculation, you must specify the array to use:
Add array=irixaa to sol700.pth file and use PATH=3 on the SOL 700 executive
control entry
Main Index
For Altix, the user has two options. He may use SGI MPI or LAM MPI. The LAM is default. To use the
SGI MPI the user must use the option: sgimpi=yes. When using SGI MPI the user should not forget to
specify also the array. For example:
Add sgimpi=yes array=irixaa to sol700.pth file and use PATH=3 on the SOL 700
executive control entry
Main Index
Why do I get this error, "Logon failure: unknown user name or bad password"?
You must have the same account credentials on all the nodes participating in the mpich job. If your cluster
is set up with a domain controller then you can use a domain account to launch an mpich job. If you do
not have a domain controller then you must set up user accounts on all the nodes individually with the
same credentials on each node. Each user can have whatever password they choose, but they must use
the same password on all the nodes. In other words, UserA-PasswordA must be the same on all the nodes
and UserB-PasswordB must be the same on all the nodes, etc.
Why do I get this error, "LaunchProcess failed, CreateProcessAsUser failed, The system cannot
find the file specified."?
The executable used in an mpich job must be available to all the nodes participating in the job. The path
to the executable must be valid on all the nodes. This can be accomplished by copying the executable to
a common location on all the nodes or copying it to a shared location. For example, you could copy
cpi.exe to c:\temp\cpi.exe on all the nodes and run "mpirun -np 3 c:\temp\cpi.exe". Or you
could copy cpi.exe to a shared directory \\myhost\myshare\cpi.exe and then execute.
Main Index
13
Main Index
Examples
J
Crash
Drop Test
Defense
Prestress
Miscellaneous
428
444
459
510
524
555
564
596
582
576
Crash
Pick-up Truck Frontal Crash
Description
Auto companies perform crash tests simulation to increase safety of the passengers and comply with
government regulations such as those of FMVSS (Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards). This is an
example of a pick-up truck frontal crash at 15 m/s (34 m.p.h.) against a rigid wall. To model the
simulation, contact was defined between the truck and the rigid wall to predict the stress and
deformations of the structure.
SOL 700 Entries Included
SOL 700
TSTEPNL
PARAM, DYDTOUT
PARAM, DYSHELLFORM
PARAM, DYSHINP
BCTABLE
BCBODY
BCPROP
BSURF
MATD020
MATD024
CSPOT
MATD20M
Model
Main Index
The model has a total of 62984 grid points and 55572 elements as follow:
346 Bars
1815 Trias
49954 Quads
3458 Hexas
The rigid wall and the ground are modeled by 500 and 25 shell elements, respectively. All shell elements
are Belytschko-Tsay formulation. The crash speed of the truck is modeled by defining an initial velocity
of 15 m/s, applied on all the grid points of the truck in a horizontal direction towards the wall. Gravity
load is included to take into account the mass of the truck. The simulation time is 0.09 seconds. The unit
system is Newtons, seconds, and millimeters.
Input
All nodes of the truck have an initial velocity specified by the TIC entry. All nodes of the rigid wall and
the ground have been constrained in all the degrees of freedom. Contact is defined between:
1. The truck and rigid wall surface
2. The truck tires and the ground surface
3. Self contact for the truck to avoid penetration among various components.
Input file:
SOL 700,NLTRAN path=3 stop=1
SOL 700 is a executive control that activates an explicit nonlinear transient analysis.
TIME 10000
CEND
ECHO = NONE
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,print,PLOT) = ALL
Stress(SORT1,PLOT) = ALL
Strain(SORT1,PLOT) = ALL
accel(print,plot)= ALL
velocity(print,plot)= ALL
echo=both
SET
990009
=
105843 105655
..
..
SET
990619
=
74752
77110
Main Index
SET is an executive control entry that defines a set that contains some grid points. The set will later be
referenced by the CSPOT entry in the bulk entry section.
LOADSET = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
IC=1
TSTEPNL = 20
BCONTACT = 1
weightcheck=yes
page
The bulk entry section starts
BEGIN BULK
INCLUDE 1.truck.bdf
INCLUDE rconn.bdf
TSTEPNL
20
10
+
+
+
+
0
9e-3
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (10) and Time
Increment (9e-3 seconds) of the simulation. The total time is the product of the two entries. Notice here
the Time Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value
of the Time Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the
smallest element dimension during the simulation.
PARAM,OGEOM,NO
PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,dydtout,0.001
PARAM, DYDTOUT is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the time interval of d3plot outputs.
PARAM*,DYSHELLFORM,2
PARAM*, DYSHELLFORM is a SOL 700 bulk data entry to define the shell formulation. If
Main Index
0.
100
0.
-1.
4
1.
ENDT
GRAV is a bulk data entry that defines acceleration vectors for gravity or other acceleration loading.
Bulk data entry that defines Contact relations and Contact bodies:
BCTABLE
1
SLAVE
MASTERS
SLAVE
MASTERS
SLAVE
4
1
2
3
4
5
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is also used by SOL 600 and it is meant to define MasterSlave as well as self contact.
BCBODY
BCBODY
BCBODY
BCBODY
BCBODY
1
2
3
4
5
3
3
3
3
3
DEFORM
DEFORM
DEFORM
DEFORM
DEFORM
1
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700
Main Index
BCPROP is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700
only, which defines a 3-D contact region by element properties. All elements with the specified properties
define a contact body.
$ Single Surface Contact
BSURF
5
5
6
..
..
10
11
BSURF is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700 only,
which defines a contact surface or body by element IDs. All elements with the specified IDs define a
contact body.
Bulk data entry that defines properties for shell and beam elements:
$ ========== PROPERTY SETS ==========
PSHELL
1
63
3.137
63
..
..
PBEAM
224
208
452.4 16290.
..
..
Bulk data entry that defines concentrated mass at grid points:
$
$
CONM2
..
..
CONM2
Main Index
* conm2 *
1990624
91344
1e-06
1990693
983105
1e-06
63
16290.
32570.
Bulk data entry that continues defining properties for elements, spring, damper, rigid wall and ground:
$
* mpc158 *
PBAR
226
158
..
..
$
* mpc408 *
PBAR
263
224
$
$
* spring *
PELAS
264
14.4
$
$
* damper *
PVISC
265
2.935
$
$
* rigid *
PSHELL
266
70
..
..
* ground_prop *
PSHELL
272
71
.01
1e-05
1e-05
.01
1e-05
1e-05
2.
70
70
2.0
71
71
MATD024
637.89e-09 210000.
1
.3
0.9
..
..
MATD024 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry. It is used to model an elasto-plastic material with an yield stress
versus strain curve and arbitrary strain rate dependency. Failure can also be defined based on the plastic
strain or a minimum time step size.
Main Index
104615
105038
Bulk data entry that defines boundary conditions and initial velocity of the pick-up truck:
SPC1
SPCADD
TIC
..
..
TIC
1
2
1
123456
1
1
990803
THRU
991384
15000.
510439
15000.
TIC is a bulk data entry that defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural
transient analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at independent degrees
of freedom.
Main Index
Bulk data entry that merges and defines joint between rigid bodies:
MATD20M,181,180,221,182,183
..
..
MATD20M is a SOL 700 bulk data entry. It was used to merges MATD020 rigid bodies into one assembly
Main Index
Results
t = 0.0 seconds
t = 0.035 seconds
t = 0.09 seconds
Main Index
Train-barrier Impact
Description
This is an example of a train frontal crash at 30.559 meter/second against two rigid barrier cylinders to
represent an inability to stop at the end of the line. To model the simulation, Contact was defined between
the train and the rigid barrier to predict the stress and deformations of the structure.
SOL 700 Entries Included
SOL 700
TSTEPNL
PARAM,DYDTOUT
PARAM*,DYTSTEPDT2MS
BCTABLE
BCBODY
BCPROP
MATD024
MATD001
MATD020
CSPOT
Model
Because of symmetry, only half of the actual structures (train and barrier) were modeled in this example.
Boundary conditions were applied along the center line of the structures to ensure symmetric behavior.
The model has a total of 117820 grid points and 113770 elements as follow:
586 Bars
1533 Trias
107047 Quads
The train model contains 112530 elements in the form of shell and beam. The rigid barrier cylinder model
contains 1240 shell elements. All shell elements are Belytschko-Wong-Chiang formulation. The crash
speed of the train is modeled by defining an initial velocity of 30.559 meter/second, applied on all the
grid points of the train in a horizontal direction towards the barrier. The simulation time is 0.35 seconds.
The unit system is Kilonewton, millimeters, and milliseconds.
Main Index
Input
All nodes of the train have an initial velocity specified by the TIC card. All nodes along the center line
have a boundary condition that ensures symmetric behavior of the structure. Adaptive contact relation
was defined as follows:
1. Contact between the train and the barrier
2. Self-Contact of the train components
Input file:
SOL 700,NLTRAN path=3 stop=1
SOL 700 is a executive control that activates an explicit nonlinear transient analysis.
TIME 10000
CEND
ECHO = NONE
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,print,PLOT) = ALL
Stress(SORT1,PLOT) = ALL
Strain(SORT1,PLOT) = ALL
accel(print,plot)= ALL
velocity(print,plot)= ALL
echo=both
SET
26148 =
92304 92319 92334
..
..
SET
84302 =
98670 103916
SET is an executive control entry that defines a set that contains some grid points. The set will later be
referenced by the CSPOT entry in the Bulk Entry Section.
LOADSET = 1
SPC = 2
$ DLOAD = 2
IC=1
TSTEPNL = 20
BCONTACT = 1
weightcheck=yes
page
Main Index
35.0
10
+
+
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (10) and Time
Increment (35 milliseconds) of the simulation. The total time is the product of the two entries. Notice
here the Time Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact
value of the Time Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the
smallest element dimension during the simulation.
PARAM,OGEOM,NO
PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES
PARAM,GRDPNT,0
PARAM,dydtout,5.0
PARAM, DYDTOUT is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the time interval for d3plot outputs.
PARAM*,DYTSTEPDT2MS,-5e-3
PARAM*,DYTSTEPDT2MS is a SOL 700 bulk data entry card. When it is specified, mass scaling will be
activated. The value given will be the minimum time step with which the model will run. If the stable
time step of an element is smaller than this value, its density will be increased.
Bulk data entry that defines Contact relations and Contact bodies:
BCTABLE
1
SLAVE
1
0
0.3
0.
0
0.0
4
0.
0
full
0.7
0.
0.
+
0
SLAVE
2
0
0.3
MASTERS 3
Main Index
0.
0
0.0
1
0.
0
0.7
0.
0.
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is also used by SOL 600 and it is meant to define
Master-Slave as well as self contact.
BCBODY
BCBODY
BCBODY
1
2
3
3
3
3
DEFORM
DEFORM
DEFORM
1
2
3
0
0
0
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700
only, which defines a 3-D contact region by element properties. All elements with the specified properties
define a contact body.
Bulk data entry that defines grid points and elements:
GRID
1
-12750.
586.2983.919
..
..
GRID
117820
-6002. 1145.5
950.
..
..
$DBLOCK FS_AB_SIDEPOSTS
$ CQUAD4 ELEMENTS IN PART - FS_AB_SIDEPOSTS (PID = 584)
$
CQUAD4
1914
584
6594
6597
6544
6545
..
..
Bulk data entry that defines concentrated mass at grid points:
$DBLOCK Added Masses
$ CONM2 ELEMENTS IN PART - Added Masses (PID = 5242)
CONM2
101538
6729
1.972
Ma
..
..
CONM2
107566 104763
30000.
Ma
Main Index
Added
Added
Bulk data entry that defines boundary conditions along the center line:
$ SPC BCS IN BCSET - Nodal SPC (SID = 2)
SPC
2
11
246
0.0
..
..
SPC
2 104764
23456
0.0
Bulk data entry that defines material properties.
MATD024,59,7.900-6 ,200.000, 0.30, 0.340,,,,+
+,,,10
..
..
MATD024 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is used to model an elasto-plastic material with an yield stress
versus strain curve and arbitrary strain rate dependency. Failure can also be defined based on the plastic
strain or a minimum time step size.
MATD001, 61,7.800-6 ,200.000, 0.30,
..
..
MATD001 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is used to model an isotropic elastic material available for
Bulk data entry that defines properties for bar, elastic and shell elements:
PBAR
..
..
PELAS
Section_
..
..
PSHELL
FS_FR_FR
Main Index
687
61
5235
5.0
5241
60
156.
24760.
3.
60
24760.
60
Main Index
Results
Main Index
t = 0.0 seconds
t = 0.24 seconds
t = 0.12 seconds
t = 0.35 seconds
Main Index
Model
There are five compartments in the airbag as shown in the figure below. These compartments were
folded, and each compartment was connected to the gas supply bag through a large hole. An inflator was
modeled next to the gas supply bag. The gas jet is initiated from the inflator and running into the gas
supply bag. Fixed boundary conditions were applied to the brackets attached to the gas supply bag. The
simulation time was 0.02 seconds.
Unit used for this analysis was kg for weight, meter for length, second for time, Kelvin for temperature.
Fix
Compartment
Inflator
Input
AIRBAG
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
, 1
,CFD
,INITIAL
,INFLATOR
,
,LARGHOLE
,LARGHOLE
,LARGHOLE
,LARGHOLE
,LARGHOLE
, 25
,
,
, 3
,
, 1.527
, 101325., 293.
, 1.4
, 1001
, 1
, 350.
, 1.557 , 243. ,
, 301
, 2
,
, 302
, 3
,
, 303
, 4
,
, 304
, 5
,
, 305
, 6
,
,
,
,0.009 ,0.009
, 294. ,
,
,
,
,
, 1.0
,
, 1.0
,
, 1.0
,
, 1.0
,
, 1.0
,
,0.009
,
,0.7
,
,
,
,
,
,
,0.009
,
,0.009
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,+
,+
,+
,+
,+
,+
,+
,+
,+
, 25
, 3
,
,
,
, 1.527
,
,0.009
,
,
,+
,+
Within the CFD keyword line, CFD related data was defined. Gamma low equation of state was defined
referring to the EOSGAM card as shown below.
+
Main Index
,INITIAL
, 101325., 293.
, 1.4
, 294.
,+
Within the INITIAL keyword line, initial conditions of gas property inside an airbag were defined.
Initial pressure was 101,325 N m 2 , initial temperature was 293 K, initial gamma gas constant was 1.4,
initial R gas constant was 294m 2 s 2 K .
+
+
,INFLATOR
,
, 1001
, 1.557
, 1
, 243.
, 350.
,
,
,
,
,
,0.7
,
,
,
,+
,+
Within the INFLATOR keyword line, gas property from an inflator was defined. Mass flow rate was
defined referring a table data (TABLED1). Temperature of inflowing gas was 350 K, a scale factor of
available inflow area was 0.7, and the gamma gas constant of the inflator gas was 1.557, and the R gas
constant of the inflator gas was 243 m 2 s 2 K
+
,LARGHOLE
, 301
, 2
, 1.0
,+
Within the LARGEHOLE keyword line, the airbag into which gas flowed was defined. Here, the airbag
ID 2 was the airbag to which this airbag gave gas. A scale factor of available inflow area was 1.0
Each compartment airbag must be defined with AIRBAG card. The reference density must be the same
for all AIRBAGs that were defined in one simulation.
AIRBAG
AIRBAG
+
+
, 1
, 2
,CFD
,INITIAL
,
,
,
,
25
,
,
35
,
,
3
,
, 1.527
101325., 293.
, 1.4
,
,
,
,
,0.011 ,0.011
, 294. ,
,
,
,0.011
,
,
,
,
,
,+
,+
,+
,
EOSGAM,3,1.517,226.4
The new card which describes gas state was provided. EOSGAM was the card which defined the gamma
low gas equation of state where the pressure p was defined as:
p = ( 1) e
where
was a constant,
1
2
61
62
226.4m 2 s 2 K
.0009375-.626128
.0009375-.626128
.0005000-.414100
.0005000-.339100
in this model.
.230000
.220000
.450000
.450000
GRIA card is a SOL 700 Bulk Data entry which defines the final unstretched configuration of a deployed
bag. All IDs of GRIA cards must exist in GRID cards and the same as the IDs of GRID cards.
Main Index
Result
There are two types of results files, ARC and d3plot. The ARC file which is the original MSC.Dytran
result file format is for the results of Euler elements (fluid) and d3plot file which is the native
LS-DYNA result file format. The deformation results between SOL 700 and MSC.Dytran are compared
to be identical. These results were from the binary result files (ARC file for both cases).
Deformation Result of Airbag (d3plot)
Time
0.000
0.002
0.004
Main Index
MSC.Dytran 2005r3
Time
0.006
0.008
0.010
Main Index
MSC.Dytran 2005r3
Time
MSC.Dytran 2005r3
0.0148
0.020
Main Index
MSC.Dytran 2005r3
Main Index
Model
The model has a total of 10868 grid points and 9594 elements as follows:
3 Bars
23 Beams
2078 Quads
3626 Trias
3410 Hexas
454 Pentas
The dummy is modeled by several types of elements and the floor, chair and window are modeled by
shell elements. The airbag surface is meshed with membrane elements. To simulate the gas jet inside the
airbag, no elements need to be defined because that is done by the adaptive hex mesher of the Eulerian
solver of SOL 700. In other words, the adaptive Euler solver automatically creates the elements inside
the bag. As the airbag is inflated, these elements are expanded and adapt to follow the fabric surface
of the bag. This mesher provides an Euler mesh that is large enough to cover the whole airbag membrane
but at the same time keeps the elements that are outside the airbag surface limited. Too many empty
elements outside the airbag surface increases runtime without benefit.
Input
Several contacts are defined between airbag, dummy and parts of the car.
Input file
SOL 700,NLTRAN stop=1
Main Index
SOL 700 is an executive control entry similar to SOL 600. It activates an explicit nonlinear transient
50
.0012
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (50) and Time
Increment (0.0012 sec) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest element
dimension during the simulation.
SMALHOLE
81
PERMEAB
OUT
0.9
OUT
20
+
20.0
11.
11.
+
+
+
0.8
AIRBAG is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that instructs SOL 700 to create an airbag using either the CFD
solver or a uniform gas bag method. Here, the CFD solver will be used. Inflow of gas into the airbag is
defined by the entries following the INFLATOR key word. Outflow is defined by adding SMALHOLE.
Bulk data entries defining materials:
MATD001,111,6.E-10,6.E1,0.3
MATD001 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that models an isotropic elastic material. It represents the
membrane material.
Main Index
EOSGAM,1,1.4,226.45E6
EOSGAM is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that defines the ideal gas inside the airbag.
MATD009,222,1.E-12
MATD020,444,7.8E-9, 2.1E05,0.3
MATD020,185,7.8E-9, 2.1E05,0.3
MATD009 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that models materials without resistance to deviatoric stresses.
MATD020 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that models rigid objects.
All other MATD** entries model the various parts of the dummy.
Bulk data entries entry that defines geometric properties of the various surfaces
Surface
Elements
Grid Points
Properties
Airbag membrane
20001-32132
Inflator
23225-23514
605 (CTRIA3)
20655,20656,21461,
610,660,710,760 (CTRIA3)
21462,22267,22268,
23073,23074
Car Window +frame 31863-32102
2100 (CQUAD4)
Floor
31683-32132
2101 (CQUAD4)
dummy
1-5678
1 9015
Main Index
Bulk data entries that define Contact relations and Contact bodies:
BCTABLE*1
*
$
$ contact
1 :
$ ID
=
1
$ TITLE = CHEST TO RIB
$
*
SLAVE
1
*
0.9000000
*
*
*
0.9000000
*
*
0.1000000
*
*
*
2
*
*
*
5.000000
*
1
*
*
*
SS2WAY
1.000000
1.0000000E+20
1.000000
1
20.00000
5.000000
1.000000
YES
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is also used by SOL 600 and it is meant to define Master-
0
2119
2120
2121
2122
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only. It defines a flexible or rigid
contact body in 2-D or 3-D. It could be specified with a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, or BCMATL entry.
BPROP is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only, which defines 3-D
0
2804
2805
2806
2807
BSURF is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only. It defines a contact
surface or body by element IDs. All elements with the specified IDs define a contact body.
Main Index
BCSEG*
*
2680
3399
3400
BCSEG is a bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only. It specifies grid points to be used
in a contact analyses.
Using the BCTABLE and several BCBODY, BCSEG, and BCSURF entries the following contacts
are defined
Slave
Master
1 Chest
rib
2 neck
Self contact
3 Rib
shoulder
4 Rib
Jacket
5 Neck
cable
6 Shoulder belt
chest
7 Lap
pelvic
8 Airbag
Self contact
9 Airbag
Dummy front
10 Dummy
Chair
11 Dummy shoes
Ground
Main Index
20257
20258
2,RIGID,MR185,1,2,101,
10.
2,RIGID,MR185,2,2,101,
10.
2,RIGID,MR185,3,2,101,
10.
2,RIGID,MR185,5,2,101,
10.
2,RIGID,MR185,6,2,101,
10.
2,RIGID,MR185,7,2,101,
10.
RBE2A* 2
*
*
3922
*
8463
End of input file.
Main Index
0.,,+
0.,,+
0.,,+
0.,,+
0.,,+
0.,,+
MR2
3923
8465
8297
8319
*
*
*
Results
t = 0 sec
t = 0.02999 sec
Main Index
t = 0.0444 sec
t = 0.0444 sec
Main Index
The relation between density and pressure ( P ) of the bird material was specified through an equation of
linear polynomial:
P = a e 3 + ( b0 + b 1 + b2 2 + b3 3 ) 0 E
= 0 1
0 = reference density
Main Index
a1 = 0.0
a2 = 0.0
a3 = 4.25 E6 psi
b 1 = b2 = b3 = 0.0
To model the composite glass canopy, a curved composite plate was built. The composite plate was
modeled using PCOMP and MATD054 material.
A picture of the model is shown below.
The model has a total of 7082 grid points and 6200 elements as follows:
2000 Quads
4200 Hexas
The glass plate was modeled with composite shell elements. The bird was modeled with solid elements.
The relative speed of the bird to the airplane is modeled by defining an initial velocity of 7874 in/s (447
m.p.h.), applied on all the grid points of the bird. The simulation time is 0.002 seconds. The unit
system is inch, lb-force, second.
Input
All nodes of the bird have an initial velocity specified by the TIC entry. Nodes on the straight edges of
the curved plate have translational constrains in all directions. Contacts are defined between the plate
(master) and the bird (slave).
Input File:
SOL 700,NLTRAN path=3 stop=1
SOL 700 is a executive control that activates an explicit nonlinear transient analysis.
Main Index
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (100) and Time
Increment (2e-5 seconds) of the simulation. The total time is the product of the two entries. Notice here
the Time Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value
of the Time Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the
smallest element dimension during the simulation.
PARAM,DYDTOUT,4e-4
PARAM, DYDTOUT is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the time interval of d3plot outputs.
Bulk data entry that defines Contact relations and Contact bodies:
$ Define contact
BCTABLE 1
SLAVE
3
0
0.
0
1
0.
0
0.
0.
0.
MASTERS 4
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is also used by SOL 600 and it is meant to define MasterSlave as well as self-contact.
Main Index
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only and defines a flexible or rigid
contact body in 2-D or 3-D. It could be specified with a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP or BCMATL entry.
BCPROP is a bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only. It defines a 3-D contact region
by element properties. All elements with the specified properties define a contact body.
$ Deform Body Contact LBC set: plate
BCBODY
4
3D
DEFORM 4
BSURF
4
1
2
3
..
..
0
4
BSURF is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only and defines a contact
surface or body by element IDs. All elements with the specified IDs define a contact body.
Bulk data entry that defines material and element properties for composite glass plate:
PCOMP
1
1
1
1
.012
.012
.012
0.
0.
0.
YES
YES
YES
2
2
70.
.012
.012
0.
0.
0.
YES
YES
..
..
PCOMP is a bulk data entry. It was used to define the properties of a 5-ply composite material laminate.
MATD054 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is used to model arbitrary orthotropic materials, e.g.,
unidirectional layers in composite shell structures. Various types of failure could be specified for the
model. This model is only valid for thin shell elements.
Main Index
Bulk data entry that defines material and element properties for bird:
$ Material Record : mat1.1
MATD054 1
2.33-4 1.16E7
0.223
4.74E6 4.74E6 4.74E6
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,0.02,
42000. 42000. 42000.
$ Material Record : mat1.2
$ Description of Material :
MATD054 2
9.53-5 2812
0.48
950.
950.
950.
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,2,
281.2
281.2
281.2
..
..
MATD010
9E-5
145
1.16E7
1.16E7
0.223
0.223
0.48
0.48
42000.
1035.
2812
2812
0
281.2
95
2.9
0.145
MATD010 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry and is used to model elastic-plastic hydrodynamic material.
Main Index
0.
2256
Bulk data entry that defines boundary conditions and initial velocity of the bird:
$ Loads for Load Case : Default
SPCADD
2
1
$ Initial Velocities of Load Set : bird_vel
TIC
1
2092
1
4609.88
TIC
1
2092
3
-3601.6
..
..
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed_end
SPC1
1
123456 1
THRU
11
..
..
$ Referenced Coordinate Frames
CORD2R* 1
-5.12207
*
4.0018
2.12867-5
0.
-1.1203 0.
9.12389
0.
2.72458-5
TIC is a bulk data entry that defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural
transient analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at independent degrees
of freedom.
Main Index
Results
t = 0.0 seconds
t = 0.0008 seconds
t = 0.0016 seconds
t = 0.002 seconds
Main Index
Main Index
The thickness of fan blades varies from 0.02659 to 0.40227 inch depending on the location of blade
element. The radius of fan blades is 13.6 inch and that of rotor is 0.9 inch. The length and radius of bird
model are 6.24 and 2.36 inches respectively.
8000 rpm
Fully fixed
Fixed (x,y direction)
(x,y rotation)
8000 rpm
(enforced speed)
8000 rpm
(initial speed)
437 mph
Two material models are used in the analysis. All blades and rotors are elastic-plastic material and
modeled by MATD024. The material properties are:
= 4.14e 4 lbf/inch 3 s 2 inch Poissons
y = 138000 psi
ratio = 0.35
Main Index
= 145 psi
The relation between density and pressure (P) of the bird material was specified through an equation of
linear polynomial:
P = a 1 + a2 2 + a3 3 + ( b 0 + b1 + b2 2 + b 3 2 ) o E
= o 1 = overall material density
o = reference density E
a1 = 0.0 a2 = 0.0
a3 = 4.25 E6 psi b 1 = b 2 = b3 = 0.0
The model used for bird strike analysis (explicit) has a total of 20724 grid points and 19055 elements
as follows:
NUMBER OF CHEXA ELEMENTS =
10752
NUMBER OF CQUAD4 ELEMENTS =
8227
NUMBER OF CTRIA3 ELEMENTS =
76
Input
The simulation consists of two runs. The first run is a prestress analysis that computes the deformations
and stresses due to rotation. This computation is essentially static using implicit solver. Conducting this
computation in the impact run would require structural relaxation. To speed up the process, the static part
of the computation is done by the double precision version of the implicit solver in the prestress run.
Boundary conditions and initial conditions of the prestress run differ from the second run. In the prestress
run the rear of the rotor is fixed and a force in circumferential direction is applied to the rotor and fan
blades. In the impact run the rear of the rotor is given an angular velocity and the bird is given an initial
velocity. Contacts are defined between the fan blades and the bird.
SOL 700,NLTRAN STOP=1 PATH=3
SOL 700 is a executive control entry that initiates the explicit nonlinear solver in the MD Nastran. PATH
is set to 3 because a different solver must be assigned for the implicit run (double precision solver.)
First, consider the prestress input deck. In this input deck, only the rotor and fan blades are included.
Main Index
TSTEPNL
$
1.-5
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (5) and Time
Increment (1e-5 sec) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps are determined by MD Nastran SOL 700 solver during the analysis. The time step is a function of
the smallest element dimension during the simulation.
By using the SOL 700 bulk data entry PRESTRS a prestress analysis is carried out. Here the implicit SOL
700 solver is used. This solver requires the analysis to be run with double precision executable. Final
deformations and stresses of elements are written to a text file named imput_file_name.nastin to
provide initial conditions for rotor and fan blades of the impact run.
Bulk data entries that define properties for shell elements.
PSHELL1 135
3001
+
0.05440
KeyHoff Lobatto 5
Mid
MATD024 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that represents MD Nastran Material #24. It is used to model
elasto-plastic material.
Main Index
Bulk data entry that defines geometric properties of the rotor and blades:
CQUAD4
..
GRID
..
6062
301
300425
1.0762
300426
4.6577
300446
300445
-1.945
5
2
3
1
321
0.
1
1
1
6
6
1.
299999
321
1
1.
5
-133.3330.0
1.
.001
1.
123456 300425 THRU
1245
400058
1245
400115
0.0
1.
ENDT
300443
RFORCE is a bulk data entry that defines a static loading condition due to angular velocity.
Main Index
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (100) and Time
Increment (.4e-4 sec) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps are determined by MD Nastran solver during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest
element dimension during the simulation.
The prestress results file is prestress_rotor.dytr.nastin. The name of this file was changed
to rotor.dytr.nastin due to the long file name. It includes the information of grid points, elements
and initial conditions. This makes the shell elements that are defined in the prestress run available to the
impact run. Because the only properties of the rotor and fan blade that need to be defined in the impact
run are material properties and boundary conditions, all other information like GRID, CQUAD, etc must
be deleted in the explicit input deck.
ISTRSSH*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
2275
0.000E+00
7.084E+03
0.000E+00
1.000E+05
-1.000E+00
1.096E+04
0.000E+00
6.916E+03
-3.908E+01
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
1.481E+04
5.499E+00
0.000E+00
7.371E+03
1.150E+02
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
1.149E+04
2.964E+03
0.000E+00
5*
*
1.480E+02*
0.000E+00*
1.392E+05*
0.000E+00*
1.999E+03*
0.000E+00*
1.392E+05*
The file rotor.dytr.nastin contains the entry ISTRSSH. This entry specifies the prestress condition of the
shell element. The information in the upper box are that element number 2275 has (1) in-plane integration
point and (5) through-thickness integration points followed by (5) additional history variables in the first
row. The contents from next row to the end include the initial conditions of this element such as the initial
Main Index
stress in xx direction, yy direction and so on. These result variables of the prestress run are to be carried
over to the impact run. If other elements types instead of shell are used, ISTRSBE, ISTRSTS, and
ISTRSSO cards must be included in nastin file.
Bulk data entries that define Contact relations and Contact bodies:
BCTABLE 1
SLAVE
8001
0
0.1
0.
0
2
0.
0
0.1
0.
0.
YES
+
+
+
MASTERS 1001
SLAVE
1001
0.
0.
0.1
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry and it is meant to define Master-Slave as well as self contact. In
this analysis, adaptive contacts between the bird and the fan blades are used.
BCBODY
BCPROP
1001
1001
3D
1
DEFORM
2
1001
3
0
4
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only, which defines a flexible or rigid
contact body in 2-D or 3-D. It could be specified with a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, or BCMATL entry.
In this analysis, BCPROP cards are used because adaptive contact is applied.
Bulk data entries that define material and properties for the shell as same as the prestress run:
MATD024 3001
4.14E-4 1.60E+7 0.35000 100000. 138000. 0.20000
+
+
3001
...
PSHELL1 1
3001
KeyHoff Lobatto 5
Mid
+
+
0.22768
...
HGSUPPR 1
...
SHELL
HGSUPPR card is for the definition of the hourglass suppression method, the corresponding hourglass
damping coefficients and sets for the bulk viscosity method and coefficients.
Bulk data entry that defines boundary conditions and initial velocity:
BCGRID
Main Index
300425
THRU
300443
BCGRID is also used to specify a set of nodes which are to be constrained with SPCD2 (angular velocity).
SPCD2
1
GRID
1
7
80
TABLED1
80
+
0.0
837.758
1.
837.758
ENDT
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Disp1
SPC1
1
3
21
THRU
31
..
..
$ Initial angular velocity for rotor +fan blade
TIC3
1 299999
1.
-1.
+
-837.758
1
THRU
6384
300000
THRU
300018
300020
THRU
...
TIC3 defines the initial velocity as combination of translational part and a rotational part.
SPCD2 defines imposed nodal motion on a node or a set of nodes.
3004
0.0
9E-5
1
0.0
145
3004
4.25E6
2.9
0.145
PSOLIDD is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that defines properties for solid elements. It refers to entry
MATD010, EOSPOL for material properties.
MATD010 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that represents MD Nastran Material #10, which is used to model
..
GRID
..
TIC
TIC
..
..
Main Index
1000001
1
1
7692.
7692.
TIC is a bulk data entry that defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural
transient analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at independent
degrees-of-freedom.
Results
Prestress Run
Using the TSTEPNL entry 5 results increments were archived. The results of all increments are
essentially the same which indicates that the implicit calculations are stable. The results of the last
increment were written to the file prestres_rotor.dytr.nastin.
Result Increment 2
Main Index
Main Index
Impact run
The prestress result variables have been initialized at the begin of the analysis (Time = 0)
t = 0 seconds
t = 0.001 seconds
Main Index
t = 0.00152 seconds
t = 0.002 seconds
Main Index
t = 0.003 seconds
t = 0.004 seconds
Main Index
Figure 13-1
Initial Situations
The properties and initial conditions of the plate and birds are as follows:
Plate
Bird 1
Bird 2
Material
Titanium
Air
Jelly
Jelly
Density (kg/m3)
4527
1.1848
930
930
1.03e11
2.2e9
2.2e9
Poissons ratio
0.314
1.38e8
Gamma
Thickness (m)
Main Index
Ambience B
1.4
0.0015
Plate
Radius (m)
0.25
Length (m)
0.25
Ambience B
Bird 1
Bird 2
Mass (kg)
0.36
0.285
150
200
0.1
Main Index
The finite element model of the upper and lower plates, the Eulerian domains and the initialization of the
birds are shown in the figure below. The dummy quad elements used to create closed coupling surfaces
are not shown in this figure.
Input File:
SOL 700 is an executive control that activates an explicit nonlinear transient analysis:
SOL 700,NLTRAN stop=1
Case control cards for problem time, loads and initial conditions:
$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control
CEND
TITLE = Multiple BIRD STRIKE on BOX Structure
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name: Default
SUBTITLE=Default
TSTEPNL = 1
SPC = 1
IC = 1
Main Index
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (10) and Time
Increment (0.0015 seconds) of the simulation. The total time is the product of the two entries. Notice here
the Time Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value
of the Time Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the
smallest element dimension during the simulation.
$------- BULK DATA SECTION ------BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL 1
10
0.0015
1
Define the Initial, the Minimum and the Safety factor of the time step:
PARAM*, DYINISTEP, 1e-7
PARAM*, DYMINSTEP, 1e-8
DYPARAM, STEPFCTL, 0.9
Define coupling surface that can fail and Multi material overflow array to store material data. In a
problem where more than 10% of the elements have more than one material, the default value of
FMULTI(0.1) must be increased.
DYPARAM, FASTCOUP, INPLANE, FAIL
DYPARAM, FMULTI, 0.2
Define Output results request for every 0.00015 s and time history output request for coupling surfaces:
DYPARAM, LSDYNA, BINARY, D3PLOT, .00015
DYTIMHS,, .000001,,,,,,,+
+, CPLSOUT
Euler domain 1:
Define an Euler mesh with 50x28x44 elements reference to PEULER1 (=1):
$ domain 1
$
MESH, 1, BOX,,,,,,,+
+,-0.26,-0.015,-0.05,0.50,0.28,0.44,,,+
+, 50, 28, 44,,,, EULER, 1
Main Index
Define FSI coupling surface from elements listed in the BSURF entry (covering inside):
$ COUPLING SURFACE 1
$
COUPLE , 1 , 1 , INSIDE , ON , ON , , , , +
+ , , , , , , , , , +
+ , , 1
$
BSURF , 1 , 7393 , THRU , 8448 , 13729 , THRU , 14048 , 14577 , +
+ , THRU , 15236
Define Eulerian element properties with reference to TICEUL1 (=11).
PEULER1 , 1 ,
MMHYDRO , 11
,
,
5
3
2
,
Main Index
1
2
5
,
,
,
,
,
,
XVEL ,
XVEL ,
SIE ,
Define Eulerian materials for the birds and the environment (air):
$--------Material Bird -----------------------------------MATDEUL , 3 , 930 , 3
EOSPOL
, 3 , 2.2e9
MATDEUL , 5 , 930 , 5
EOSPOL
, 5 , 2.2e9
$ -------- Material Air id =4
MATDEUL , 4 , 1.1848 , 4
EOSG
, 4 , 1.4
Euler domain 2:
Define an adaptive Euler mesh reference to PEULER1 (=6):
$-----------------------------Domain 2----------------------------$
MESH , 2 , ADAPT , 0.01 , 0.01 , 0.01 , , , , +
+ , -0.26 , -0.015 , -0.05 , , , , , , +
+ , , , , , , , EULER , 6
Define FSI coupling surface from elements listed in the BSURF entry (covering outside):
$===Coupling Surface 2
$
COUPLE , 2 , 2 , OUTSIDE , , , , , , +
+ , , , , , , , , , +
+ , , 2
$
BSURF , 2 , 7393 , THRU , 8448 , 13729 , THRU ,
Main Index
14048 ,
14577 , +
0.0
0.0
.83333
0.25
Mid
Main Index
Main Index
Figure 13-2
Figure 13-3
Deformation of Plates
Files
examp4_9_bs.dat
examp4_9_bs.bdf
examp4_9_bs.dytr.d3plot
EXAMP4_9_BS.DYTR_EULER_FV1_*.ARC
EXAMP4_9_BS.DYTR_EULER_FV2_*.ARC
Main Index
+, FLOW, OUT
$
PEULER1, 1, , MMHYDRO, 11
PEULER1, 6, ,MMHYDRO, 12
EOSGAM,4,1.4
$
$--------Material Bird -----------------------------------MATDEUL, 3, 930, 3
EOSPOL, 3, 2.2e9
MATDEUL, 5, 930, 5
EOSPOL, 5, 2.2e9
$
$=============================================================
$
$ Allocation of material to geometric regions.
$ -------------------------------------------TICEUL1 11
11
TICREG 1
11
CYLINDER1
3
1
3
TICREG 2
11
CYLINDER2
5
2
2
TICREG 3
11
SPHERE 4
4
5
1
$
CYLINDR 1
.13
.125
.2252
.17
.125
.2944
+
.035
CYLINDR 2
-.1381 .125
.26
-.2381 .125
.26
+
+
.035
SPHERE,4,,-.1381, .125, .26, 1000
$
$ Initial material data.
$ ---------------------TICVAL 1
XVEL
-75
ZVEL
-129.9
TICVAL 2
XVEL
200
$
$ LAGRANGE
$
$ Property, material and yield model.
$ ----------------------------------PSHELL1 2
2
Blt
Gauss
3
.83333 Mid
+
.0015
$
MATD024,2,4527,1.150e11,.314,1.38e8,,0.1
$
PSHELL,3,999,1.E-3
PSHELL,4,999,1.E-3
$
MATD009,999,1.E-20
$
$ Boundary constrain.
$ -------------------CORD2C 1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.25
0.0
+
0.0
0.125
0.25
$
$ -------- Material Air id =4
MATDEUL
4 1.1848
4
Main Index
$
|
$
-> density
$
$-----------------------------Domain 2-----------------------------$
TICEUL1,12,12
TICREG,11,12,SPHERE,7,4,5,1.0
SPHERE,7,,0.0,0.0,0.0,500.0
TICVAL,5,,SIE,2.1388E5,DENSITY,1.1848
$
$===Coupling Surface 2
$
COUPLE,2,2,OUTSIDE,,,,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,2
$
BSURF
2
7393
THRU
8448
13729
THRU
14048
14577+
+
THRU
15236
MESH,2,ADAPT,0.01,0.01,0.01,,,,+
+,-0.26,-0.015,-0.05,,,,,,+
+,,,,,,,EULER,6
$
$ coupling interaction
$
COUPINT,2,2,1
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
Main Index
Figure 13-4
All these steps are integrated in one common modeling environment by using MD Nastran. The MD
Nastran MASTER database is tailored to include only the FBO loads and other relevant information
required for rotordynamic simulation without compromising the confidentiality of model geometry and
modeling details. The MASTER database can be shared by MD Natran users among different companies
and organizations for follow-up analysis. For example, after the FBO analysis simulated by SOL 700, the
MASTER database can be sent to airframe manufacturers to use the loads in their rotordynamics
analysis facilitated by SOL 400. The following steps are completely automated in SOL 400
rotordynamics simulation:
1. Read the MASTER database generated by SOL 700 to use the FBO loads as a pre-condition to
RD analysis.
2. Map the loads on the coarse finite element model in RD simulation. An advanced search
technology is implemented in SOL 400 to identify the closest element to a given load. The load
is then distributed on the corner nodes of the element.
Main Index
3. Synchronization of the explicit and implicit timesteps, The explicit timestep is much smaller than
the implicit timestep, so the timesteps need to be synched up when the analysis is switched from
FBO analysis to RD simulation. The synchronization is based on Fast Fourier Transformation (see
Timestep Control on SOL 400 for details)
It is believed that this process can result in much higher levels of accuracy and dramatically reduce the
cost of analysis and design of the propulsion system and wing while still protecting any proprietary
information. The example problem that is used in this paper is a representative finite element model of
an engine mounted on a wing.
SOL 700 Entries Included
SOL 700
TSTEPNL
DYPARAM,LSDYNA,DATABASE,SSSTATM
DBEXSSS
DYPARAM,LSDYNA,DATABASE,NCFORC
CSPOT
BLDOUT
SOL400
ANALYSIS=NLTRAN
ROTORG
RSPINT
CONM2
UNBALNC
CBUSH
PBUSH
PBUSHT
Loadings Types
The dynamic loads on the engine after the FBO can be classified under two categories:
a. Large amplitude transient impact loads generated inside the engine due to the released blade
hitting the containment and the impact loads generated as a result of contact with the trailing
blade(s).
b. The so-called Seizure Torque being applied on the fan rotor due to unbalance caused by the
missing blade. The seizure torque is as a result of rubbing loads caused by contact between the
tip of the blades and the fan case. If the torque is large enough it could stall the rotor and the
engine causing a seizure (see below for more details).
The impact type transient loadings are calculated and stored by MD Nastran SOL 700. In this release,
only three types of loadings are taken into account.
1. Impact loads between the broken blade and the case
2. Rub loads on fan case
3. Rub loads on blade tips
Main Index
Additionally, this release is limited to the analysis of only one released blade and assumes that there are
no other failed trailing blades. In other words, only the released blade is considered for unbalance. The
other types of loads and unbalances, such as impact loads between the broken blade and remaining blades
unbalance generated by breaking some of the remaining blades due to the impact between the broken and
remaining blades and so on, will be considered in future releases of MD Natran.
The impact loads are generated due to released blade(s) impacting the containment structure or other
components. These forces contain both a normal component (to the fan case) and tangential components
which change with time as the blade hits various parts of the containment ring. The released blade, predetermined in the analysis and in testing, is the only blade which is actually released at the hub and
impacts the fan case. In many cases, the trailing blade will impact the root of the released blade, causing
the trailing blade to fail and break at a different location. As a result, one or more trailing blades will
behave like shrapnel and will contribute significantly to the impact loads. These forces and their contact
locations are stored in SOL 700 binout as well as the MD Nastran database MASTER file in the
Nastran basic coordinate system. The new entry BLDOUT in MD Nastran defines blade out force output
information and mapping criteria for a combined SOL 700 SOL 400 Blade-out analysis (used both in
the SOL 700 and subsequent SOL 400 analyses).
Rub loads occur as a result of fan blade tips coming into contact with the inner surface of the containment
ring and/or its trench-filler materials. During the Fan blade-out event, as the unbalance forces
( M u r )
on the rotor make it to go off-center and the running tip-clearance between the rotating blades and the
stator structure gets consumed, the tips of the blades will rub against the enclosure. The rubbing loads are
distinguished between those that are applied on the fan case and those that are located on the blade tips.
There are equal and opposite sets of forces on the containment ring and on the blade tips. The primary
difference is that the rubbing loads on the containment ring can be stationary whereas the rubbing loads
on the blade tips are varying as the blades rotate and at any given instant different blades on the rotor
continue to contact the stator structure in the same location. The rub loads ( F rub ) have radial and
tangential components, with radial component
( Fr )
component ( F t ) opposite to the direction of motion of the rotor. Using the relationships for tip Coulomb
damping with the coefficient of friction , the magnitude of the tangential component is computed
as:
Ft = Fr
( Ft )
motion, its tendency would invariably be to slow-down the spin RPM of the rotor-shaft. These loads, if
severe enough, do not only slow down the rotor rather may even stop it, a phenomenon called seizure
torque. Thus, rub forces have normal and tangential components ( F r ) and ( F t ) , respectively at the
points of contact. Similar to impact forces, MD R3 SOL 700 will compute the contact location and
magnitude of the rubbing loads and store them into binout as well as the MASTER file. The loads
that have zero magnitude are filtered out and are not written to the database to save time and disk space.
Main Index
( M u r )
( Mu )
whether the remaining unbroken blades contact the containment ring or not. This force is output by SOL
700 in the Nastran basic coordinate system and saved in the SOL 700 binout file. In addition, the mass
of the broken blade will be saved for use in the subsequent creation of UNBALNC entries for the SOL 400
rotor dynamics analysis.
Time Step Control in SOL 400
The contact forces computed by SOL 700 are stored and transferred to SO 400. These forcing functions
have very small time intervals and they may increase the analysis time. In order to increase the timestep
and synchronize the explicit and implicit timesteps, a technique based on Fast Fourier Transformation
(FFT) and Inverse Fast Fourier Transformation (IFFT) is used to eliminate the high frequencies of
the data.
First, the time histories from SOL 700 are changed by FFT from time domain to frequency domain. Next,
the frequency domain histories are passed through a low pass filter where the low pass frequency can be
selected by the user. Finally, the histories are changed by Inverse FFT from frequency domain back to
time domain. Because the high frequencies are removed by the low pass filter, the final time histories do
not include the high frequency vibration.
Load Mapping Scheme
Main Index
Model
Main Index
Figure 13-5
Implicit Prestress Blade and Rotor Model and Location of Bearings on the Rotor
Figure 13-6
Figure 13-7
A simplified generic engine model was provided by Boeing for the purpose of this study. The engine
model was modified and enhanced by MSC to include realistic fan blades, rotor, three bearings and other
components. Typically, full FBO models can easily have millions of elements and degrees of freedom to
represent a realistic jet engine. However, for the purpose of this study, even though the FBO model was
constructed with a much finer mesh density than the rotor dynamics model, it is not as elaborate as the
full engine models that are used by manufacturers in their explicit simulation. The FBO model has 8864
nodes and 8256 shell elements and is deemed to be sufficiently detailed to capture the physics of the
problem and compute the impact and rub loads. The fan blades were constructed by shell elements with
various thicknesses across their width and length. The rotor was made of a hollow rod with varied cross
sections across its length and a rotational velocity of 4500 rpm. The material for both rotor and fan blades
is titanium grade with the following properties:
Material: (Titanium)
Blade and Rotor (SI Unit)
= 4.466 g/cm3
y = 1009 MPa
The bearings were modeled by constructing two concentric rings with pre-determined stiffness properties
that can contact each other. The flange on the bearings prevents the axial movement of the rotor during
the fan-blade-out. The bearing models and their properties are important design considerations to
simulate the fusing during the FBO and rotor dynamics analysis. Fusing is an event where a bearing or
other support structure fails as a result of high loads beyond the design strength of the fusing structure,
and its stiffness is reduced to zero.
Main Index
Input
The simulation consists of three runs. The first run is a prestress analysis that computes the deformations
and stresses due to rotational velocities. This computation is essentially linear static and an implicit solver
is selected for the purpose of computational efficiency.. Boundary conditions and initial conditions of the
prestress run differ from the FBO run. In the prestress run the three bearing points are fixed and a force
in circumferential direction is applied to the rotor and fan blades.
Implicit Prestress Run
Since the entries and details of the prestress input file are quite similar to that of Bird Strike on rotating
fan blades with prestress example, explanation of the prestress input will be skipped.
Explicit FBO Run
Since the explicit FBO input is also similar to of the explicit input of Bird Strike on rotating fan blades
with prestress example, only additional or different entries will be explained.
SOL 700,NLTRAN STOP=1 PATH=3 BLADEOUT
BLADEOUT option activates the chaining simulation. All FBO forces assigned in BLDOUT entry will be
stored in MASTER file after the simulation.
TSTEPNL
300
.1e-3
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL entry describes the number of Time Steps (300) and Time Increment (1.e-4 seconds) of the
simulation. End time is the product of the two entries (30 ms).
DBEXSSS 111
21
2
3
4
+
8
9
10
11
12
+
16
17
18
19
20
DYPARAM LSDYNA DATABASESSSTATM .00008
5
13
6
14
7
15
+
+
101
DBEXSSS entry requests the statistics of subsystems. The subsystems are defined by BCPROP entries.
DYPARAM, LSDYNA,DATABASE,SSSTATM parameter requests to store the mass, mass center and mass
inertia tensor of the subsystems which are assigned by DBEXSSS entry. All information will be stored to
jid.dytr.ssstat ascii file at every 0.000008 seconds and will be used for unbalance input in the rotor
dynamic simulation.
$
$ ALL BLADES
$
BCPROP,101,1011106,1011107,1011108,1011109,1011110,1011111,1011112,+
Main Index
BCPROP 101 includes the properties of all blades and BCPROP 21 includes only the broken blade
properties. These two subsystem information will be used in UNBALANC and CONM2 entries of
SOL 400 rotor dynamics simulation.
$
$ CONTACT ID
$
01
$
02
$
03
$
04
$
05
$
06
$
07
$
08
$
09
$
BCTABLE 1
SLAVE
+
+
+
SLAVE BODY
1
21
21
1
21
22
1001
1002
1003
1
0
0.1
MASTER BODY
22
22
1
23
1004
1005
1006
0.
0
9
0.
0
SS1WAY
DESCRIPTION
remaining all blades to direct contact case (recording)
broken blade to direct contact case (recording)
broken blade to remaining all blades
remaining all blades (self contact)
broken blade to non-direct contact case
direct contact case (self contact)
bearing point 1 : fuse at 6.0E-3 seconds
bearing point 2
bearing point 3
0.1
0.
In the example, 9 contacts are defined. In order to reduce the size of binout file which includes the contact
forces, only the fan case is considered to capture the FBO loads.. Only the contact forces between the
remaining blades and the fan case (contact 01) and the broken blade and the fan case (contact 02) are
stored in the binout file. To store contact forces in binout files, two options in BCTABLE and one
parameter are required. SPR and MPR options can store the contact forces on SLAVE and MASTER
parts respectively. DYPARAM*,LSDYNA,DATABASE,NCFORC parameter controls the timestep of
contact forces output which are defined in BCTABLE.
To define the release mechanism, breakable joints (CSPOT) are used. These are elements that have
coincident nodes on the hub and the blade roots but are distinct.
Figure 13-8
Main Index
The breakable joints between the hub and the release blade are added using CSPOT. The joints will be
released at 0.00001 seconds after the start of FBO simulation.
CSPOT
..
CSPOT
1111
101
0.00001
10
1111
1126
10
1126
116
CSPOT entry defines the complex or combined welds. This is used to connect two nodes which are
defined by BCGRID entry and are released (broken) at 0.00001 seconds.
BLDOUT
1
0.09204
2
1
0
2.90E+1
4
99
1.0E-6 0.0
0.244
12
1
3
3
3
0
1
99
0.
2
99
1.
2
99
0.
2
99
BLDOUT entry defines the contact force output information and mapping criteria for a sequential SOL
700 FBO and SOL 400 RD analyses. Using this entry, the all forces can be categorized and stored to
MASTER file in the SOL 700 run. All slaves and maters in the BCTABLE must be assigned to BLDOUT
entry using six different types of flags in ISLVis and IMASTis. In the example, nine ISLVis and nine
IMASTis are required because there are nine contact definitions in BCTABLE. See MD Nastran Quick
Reference Guide for other fields.
SPCD2
1
GRID
123
$
BCGRID 123
20003787THRU
2000394220003947+
+
THRU
20004022
80
-1.
2000386220003867THRU
The spin down event after the blade out can be defined by using a time-dependent pre-determined
rotational speed of the turbine using SPCD2, BCGRID, and TABLED1 entries.
Main Index
SOL 400
SOL 400 executive control entry activates nonlinear static and transient analysis.
1.38E5
0.25000
In order to use equivalent material properties in SOL 400, all MATD024 materials models used in
SOL 700 are translated to MAT1 and MATEP with slope option.
TSTEPNL 100
Main Index
4000
1.0E-2
0
1.0E-4
1.0E-2
TSTEPNL entry of SOL 400 controls the convergence criteria and data for nonlinear transient analysis.
ROTORG 10
$
RSPINT 10
$
TABLED1 1000
+
0.0
+
0.042
+
100.
10
THRU
21
11
10
RPM
4500.0
3689.1
2250.0
0.012
0.055
ENDT
1000
4255.0
3605.1
0.016
0.25
4096.6
2915.7
0.028
0.5
+
3834.2 +
2250.0 +
ROTORG entry defines the rotor which consists of GRID IDs from 10 to 21. RSPINT entry indicates the
rotational direction which is assigned to the rotational axis from GRID 11 to GRID 10. The rotational
speed is defined in TABLED1, 10 for describing the speed down at various time steps. Note that the
magnitude of the rotational velocities defined in SOL 400 differ from SOL 700. This is because the unit
of rotational velocity used in SOL 400 is RPM and is different to that used by SOL 700 (radian/seconds)
$ impact_FBO.dytr.ssstat
subsystem:
1
total mass of subsystem
x-coordinate of mass center
y-coordinate of mass center
z-coordinate of mass center
....
subsystem:
= 0.91899477E-01
= 0.16037865E+03
=-0.28772884E+02
= 0.10338639E+03
21
=
=
=
=
0.59591613E+01
0.16148860E+03
0.41383951E-05
0.10000020E+03
Main Index
-0.2139E+01
-0.1921E-02
0.1748E+04
The mass, mass center and mass inertia tensor computed in SOL 700 are stored in the
impact_FBO.dytr.ssstat file. These values are then used in SOL 400 to define mass unbalance
by UNBALNC and CONM2 entries. As shown in the box above, the order of the subsystem id numbers
in ssstat file is determined by the order of DBEXSSS as defined in SOL 700. For example,
subsystem 1 represents the released blade while subsystem 21 represents all blades and hub
information. The unbalance mass in the UNBALNC entry is the same value of total mass as defined in
subsystem 1. ROFFSET and ZOFFSET of UNBALNC entry are calculated by the difference of the mass
locations between subsystem 1 and 21. In the example, the x-direction in SOL 700 FBO simulation is
coincident with the z-direction of the rotor in SOL 400 RD simulation. In addition, the mass inertia tensor
of subsystem 21 is recorded to Iij fields of CONM2 entry. GRID 12 which describes the mass location
of hub and blades is also set to the same center location of subsystem 21.
In the gyroscopic nonlinear transient analysis, only the additional unbalance mass is considered as
opposed to FBO simulation, where the unbalance mass results from losing mass due to blade out.
Therefore, the additional mass must be added to the opposite side of the location where blade-out
occured. To add the mass to the opposite side of the blade out, the unbalance is assigned at the location
which is measured 180 degrees in the positive direction of the local unbalance coordinate system.
BLDOUT,1, 1, 1.0E-6, 0.0, 0, 0, 1.0E-3, 1
+,0.0919,2.9000E+1, 1.10995, 12, 0, 0.,1.,0.
BLDOUT entry is also used in SOL400. BLDOUT entry in SOL 400 can control and apply the FBO forces
101
101
101
K
1002
1012
1.0E7
0
1.0E7
Bearings in SOL 400 are modeled using CBUSH elements. PBUSHT controls the failure criteria. The
CBUSH element is defined to fail at 1.65E5 lbf in radial (y-z) direction.
Main Index
Figure 13-9
Main Index
SOL 700
Displacement Contours on Fan Blades and Rotor SOL 400 vs SOL 700
SOL 400
SOL 700
Figure 13-10
Stress Contours on Fan Blades and Rotor SOL 400 vs SOL 700
Table 13-1
SOL400
SOL 700
Analysis Time
135 seconds
398 seconds
300%
24.66 mm
(0.971 inch)
24.13 mm
(0.950 inch)
2.2 %
710.2 MPa
(103 ksi)
696.4 MPa
(101 ksi)
2.0 %
The stress and deformation results between SOL 400 and SOL 700 were within 2% of each other, which
is quite acceptable (see Table 13-1) . However, for this particular analysis, which took a few minutes to
complete, SOL 400 ran the same model three times faster than the SOL 700 implicit solver. One reason
for the speed up difference is because SOL 700 implicit solver is based on a double precision version.
Main Index
0.0015 seconds
0.0037 seconds
Main Index
Figure 13-12
Plastic Strain
Figure 13-13
Main Index
Effective Stresses
Impact Loads
Main Index
Loads
Figure 13-15
Main Index
Figure 13-16
In the implicit rotordynamic analysis, the failure load for bearing 1 is set to 734 kN (1.6E5 lbf). A radial
dependence is specified for the fuse option. Figure 13-17 shows the time history for the force in this
bearing. The bearing is found to fuse in less than a revolution after the FBO event. The time-to-fuse is
then used to modify the explicit FBO analysis. In the FBO analysis, fusing is modeled by deactivating
contact between the two rings of the bearing at the analysis time recorded in the implicit
rotordynamic analysis.
Figure 13-17
Main Index
Drop Test
Drop Test Simulation of a Computer Package
Description
Many companies perform drop test simulation to predict the impact-resistance properties of the package
for their products. This is an example of a computer package which includes the CPU box, foam and the
clipboard box which is dropped at a velocity of 3.81 m/s on a rigid floor. To model the simulation, contact
relations were defined between the ground, the clipboard box, the foam and the CPU box itself. A picture
of the model without the clipboard box is shown below.
SOL 700 Entries Included
SOL 700
TSTEPNL
PARAM, DYDTOUT
PARAM, DYSHELLFORM
PARAM, DYSHINP
BCTABLE
BCBODY
BSURF
BCPROP
MATD020
MATD014
Model
The model has a total of 33178 grid points and 127397 elements as follow:
13024 Trias
1859 Quads
112514 Tetras
Main Index
The ground, clipboard box, and CPU box were modeled with shell elements. The foam was modeled with
Tet elements. All shell elements are Belytschko-Tsay formulation. The gravity is defined to take into
account the mass of the CPU box and the bouncing effect after the drop. The drop speed of the CPU box
is modeled by defining an initial velocity of 3.81m/s, applied on all the grid points of the CPU in
a vertical direction towards the ground. The simulation time is 0.025 seconds. The unit system is Newton,
meters, and seconds.
Input
All nodes of the CPU box have an initial velocity specified by the TIC entry. All nodes of the rigid ground
have been constrained in all the degrees of freedom. Contacts are defined between:
1. The ground (master) and bottom of the clipboard box (slave).
2. The CPU box (master) and the foam (slave).
3. The clipboard box (master) and the foam (slave).
Input File
SOL 700,NLTRAN path=3 stop=1
SOL 700 is a executive control that activates an explicit nonlinear transient analysis.
TIME 10000
CEND
LOADSET = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
IC=1
TSTEPNL = 20
BCONTACT = 1
weightcheck=yes
The bulk entry section begins...
$------- BULK DATA SECTION ------BEGIN BULK
INCLUDE final_scale2.bdf
TSTEPNL 20
100
2.5e-4
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (100) and Time
Increment (2.5e-4 seconds) of the simulation. The total time is the product of the two entries. Notice here
the Time Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value
of the Time Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the
smallest element dimension during the simulation.
Main Index
PARAM,DYDTOUT,2.5e-3
PARAM, DYDTOUT is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the time interval of d3plot outputs.
PARAM*,DYSHELLFORM,2
PARAM*, DYSHELLFORM is a SOL 700 bulk data entry to define the shell formulation. If
100
4
0.
0.
-1.
GRAV is a bulk data entry that defines acceleration vectors for gravity or other acceleration loading.
Bulk data entry that defines Contact relations and Contact bodies:
$ Define contact
BCTABLE 1
SLAVE
MASTERS
SLAVE
MASTERS
SLAVE
MASTERS
3
1
2
3
4
3
5
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is also used by SOL 600 and it is meant to define
Main Index
$ bottom of cardboard as
BCBODY
1
3
$
$ ground as master
BCBODY
2
3
$
$ foam as slave
BCBODY
3
3
$
$ CPU as master
BCBODY
4
3
$
$ cardbox box as master
BCBODY
5
3
slave
DEFORM
DEFORM
DEFORM
DEFORM
DEFORM
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700
231364
THRU
231420
BSURF is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700 only,
which defines a contact surface or body by element IDs. All elements with the specified IDs define a
contact body.
$ define
BCPROP
$
$ define
BCPROP
$
$ define
BCPROP
$
$ define
BCPROP
BCPROP is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700
only, which defines a 3-D contact region by element properties. All elements with the specified properties
define a contact body.
Main Index
Bulk data entry that defines properties for shell and solid elements:
$ ==========
$
PSHELL
$
PSHELL
$
PSHELL
$
PSOLID
Bulk data entry that defines boundary conditions and initial velocity of the package:
$ ------- Initial Velocity BC nodal_vel
$ Loads for Load Case : Default
TIC
1
1
1
TIC
1
2
1
..
..
TIC
1
8228
1
TIC
1
8237
1
Main Index
-----3.81
-3.81
-3.81
-3.81
TIC is a bulk data entry that defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural
transient analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at independent degrees
of freedom.
End of input file.
Main Index
Results
t = 0.0 seconds
t = 0.008 seconds
t = 0.0175 seconds
t = 0.0175 seconds
Main Index
Main Index
230 mm
13
Main Index
The model has a total of 90428 grid points and 78153 elements as follow:
11040 Quads
40077 Pentas
27036 Hexas
The impact velocity of the rigid block modeled by 48 hexa elements is 2052.8 mm/s in the x-direction
(vertical). The velocity is applied on all nodes of the block by using the TIC entry. Since the tire is
inflated, PLOAD4 and Table entries are used to apply a pressure load of 0.2 MPa to internal surface of
the tire as shown in the figure shown above. Gravity is also taken into account. The wheel is constrained
in all directions at surface located around the bolt locations as marked in color.
Main Index
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL 1
100
4.-4
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (100) and Time
Increment (0.4 ms) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of time increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps are determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest element
dimension during the simulation.
BCTABLE
1
SLAVE
3
0
0.
0
7
0.
0
.3
0.
0.
MASTERS 3
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry to define Master-Slave contact as well as self contact.
BCBODY
BSURF
...
3
3
3D
200001
DEFORM
200002
3
200003
0
.3
200004 200005
200006
BCBODY and BSURF are bulk data entries that are used by MD Nastran Implicit and Explicit Nonlinear
only. BCBODY defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2-D or 3-D and BSURF assigns a contact body
Main Index
82.3
200001
200
213713
213700
232641
310001
144.119 -138.485
203800
203813
203713
203700
213800
230
201803
201802
201809
211803
211802
310
201204
211204
211703
201703
1
3
123456
23
864
874
60001
THRU
875
876
882
883
60108
Bulk data entry that defines initial velocities for the rigid block model:
2
TIC
...
60001
-2052.8
TIC is a bulk data entry that defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural
transient analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at independent degrees-offreedom.
SPCADD
TLOAD1
2
6
1
7
3
1
TLOAD1 is a bulk data entry that defines a time-dependent dynamic load or enforced motion for use in
transient response analysis.
MATD027
200
0.
9.6-10
.49
0.6933
.03224
Five material models are used in this analysis. MATD027 is used to model the rubber of the tire, with the
following properties:
Density = 9.6E-10 ton/mm3
Poissons ratio = 0.49 and
Coefficients of strain energy equation are 0.6933 and 0.3224 (see MD Nastran Quick
Reference Guide.)
PSOLID
...
PCOMP
...
Main Index
200
360
301
303
200
0
0.
.5
.6
90.
25.
YES
YES
301
305
.5
.5
0.
90.
0.
YES
YES
The other material models are used to model the alloy wheel and the composite tire. PCOMP is used for
the definition of a composite material laminate shell. The composite layers are shown in schematic
above. It consists of a total of 4 material layers 301, 301, 303 and 305. The thicknesses and orientation
angles are shown in the definition of PCOMP entry above.
PLOAD4
210101
...
GRAV
232401 1.
9800.
200105
-1.
0.
0.
PLOAD4 is a bulk data entry which describes a pressure load on a face of 2D or 3D elements.
TABLED1
2
0.
1.
1000.
1.
ENDT
...
Several tables and coordinates are defined in the input file.
HGSUPPR, 200, SOLID, 200, 1,
,
,
,
0
...
, 0.040
HGSUPPR card is for the definition of the hourglass suppression method, the corresponding hourglass
damping coefficients and sets for the bulk viscosity method and coefficients.
Main Index
Results
t = 0.000 second
t = 0.027 second
Main Index
t = 0.013 second
t = 0.040 second
Defense
Rod Penetration
Description
This is an example of a rod penetrating through a plate. The initial velocity of the rod is 124.6 m/s in
horizontal direction, and 33.39 m/s in the vertical direction. To model the simulation, Adaptive Contact
was defined between the rod and the plate to predict the stress and deformations of both parts after
the penetration
SOL 700 Entries Included
SOL 700
TSTEPNL
PARAM, DYDTOUT
PARAM*,DYCONSLSFAC
BCTABLE
BCBODY
BCPROP
MATD024
TICD
Model
Because of symmetry, only half of the actual structures (rod and plate) were modeled in this example.
Boundary conditions were applied along the center line of the structures to ensure symmetric behavior.
The model has a total of 7668 grid points and 5664 solid elements. All the elements were hexahedrals
(CHEXA). The initial velocity of the rod is 124.6 m/s in horizontal direction, and 33.39 m/s in the
vertical direction toward the plate, applied on all the grid points. The simulation time is 0.11 seconds. The
unit system is Kilonewton, meters, and milliseconds.
Main Index
Input
All nodes of the rod have an initial velocity specified by the TICD entry. All nodes along the center line
have a boundary condition that ensures symmetric behavior of the structures. All nodes of the plate have
been constrained in all the degrees of freedom. Adaptive Contact is defined between the rod and the plate.
Input File:
SOL 700,NLTRAN path=3 stop=1
SOL 700 is a executive control entry that activates an explicit nonlinear transient analysis.
TIME 10000
CEND
param,marcbug,0
ECHO = NONE
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,print,PLOT) = ALL
Stress(SORT1,PLOT) = ALL
Strain(SORT1,PLOT) = ALL
accel(print,plot)= ALL
velocity(print,plot)= ALL
echo=both
$ LOADSET = 1
SPC = 2
$ DLOAD = 2
IC=1
TSTEPNL = 20
BCONTACT = 1
weightcheck=yes
page
The bulk entry section starts
BEGIN BULK
$
$
$
TSTEPNL
+
+
+
+
Main Index
20
10
11.
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (10) and Time
Increment (11 milliseconds) of the simulation. The total time is the product of the two entries. Notice here
the Time Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value
of the Time Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the
smallest element dimension during the simulation.
PARAM,DYDTOUT,5
PARAM, DYDTOUT is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the time interval of d3plot outputs.
PARAM*,DYCONSLSFAC,1.0
PARAM*,DYCONSLSFAC is a SOL 700 bulk data entry to define the default scale factor for contact
forces
Bulk data entry that defines Adaptive Contact relations and Contact bodies:
BCTABLE
1
SLAVE
MASTER
+
YES
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is also used by SOL 600 and it is meant to define MasterSlave as well as self contact.
BCBODY
BCBODY
3
4
3
3
DEFORM
DEFORM
3
4
0
0
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700
3
4
2
1
BCPROP is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700
only, which defines a 3-D contact region by element properties. All elements with the specified properties
define a contact body.
Main Index
0.8
0.8
MATD024 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry. It is used to model an elasto-plastic material with an yield stress
versus strain curve and arbitrary strain rate dependency. Failure can also be defined based on the plastic
strain or a minimum time step size.
Bulk data entry that defines initial velocity of the rod:
$ ------- Initial Velocity BC ini ----$
TICD
1
1
1
0.1246
TICD
1
1
3
-0.03339
2586
2586
TICD is a bulk a SOL 700 bulk data entry that defines transient analysis initial conditions with
increment options.
Main Index
1
1
10
7627
7659
Bulk data entry that defines boundary conditions along the center line, and the fixed boundary conditions
of the plate:
SPC1
..
..
246
10
11
2559
2560
2563
2564
2567
2568
2571
2575
3
2576
123456
2579
2587
2580
2596
2583
2605
2584
2614
2623
3
2
123456
1
7660
3
THRU
7668
2572
SPC1
2632
..
..
SPC1
SPCADD
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
12
Results
Main Index
Problem Description
When a metal cone is explosively collapsed onto its axis, a high-velocity rod of molten metal, the jet, is
ejected out of the open end of the cone. The cone is called a liner and is typically made of copper. The
jet has a mass approximately 20 percent of the cone mass, and elongates rapidly due to its high velocity
gradient. This molten rod is followed by the rest of the mass of the collapsed cone, the slug. Typical
shaped charges have liner slope angles of less than 42 degrees ensuring the development of a jet; with jet
velocities ranging from 3000 to 8000 m/s. A typical construction of a shaped charge is shown in
Figure 13-18.
Figure 13-18
Main Index
An example simulation of shaped charge formation is carried out to demonstrate the ability of SOL 700
to perform such a simulation. A simplified axisymmetric model of explosives and a copper liner is
created in a finite volume Euler mesh. Explosive are detonated starting from a point on the axis of
symmetry at the end of the explosives. The simulation is carried out for 60 s after detonation of the
explosives. The jet is formed and penetrates two thick plates. See Figure 13-19 for the model layout.
Figure 13-19
Typical shaped charges are axisymmetric. However, aiming at higher velocity, 3-D designs are targeted.
3-D simulation of shaped charge formation would be necessary to avoid excessive experimental work.
SOL 700 has full abilities to perform such a 3-D simulation.
SOL 700 Model
The model is simplified as shown in Figure 13-19. The aluminum casting is replaced with a rigid body.
Detonation is assumed to start at a point on the axis at the rear end of the explosives. The liner shape is
slightly simplified as shown in the figure. The retaining ring is assumed rigid and is modeled as a wall
boundary for the Euler Mesh (BARRIER). SI units are used in this example.
Main Index
Figure 13-20
Euler Mesh
The liner material pressure density relationship is modeled with EOSPOL model. The liner is made of
copper and the constants are taken as follows:
a1
1.43E11
N/m2
a2
0.839E11
N/m2
a3
2.16E9
N/m2
b1
0.0
b2
0.0
b3
0.0
Material yield strength is modeled with a Johnson-Cook yield model. The constants are taken as follows:
Main Index
1.2E8
N/m2
1.43E9
N/m2
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.0
Tmelt
1356.0
Troom
293.0
Cv
399.0
J/kg
8960
Kg/m3
0.477E11
N/m2
-2.5E10
N/m2
Main Index
100
701
1
2
701
801
801
2
3
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Results
Figure 13-21 shows the initial position of the copper liner and two thick plates at 0s, snap shots of
Main Index
Figure 13-21
Initial Position of the Copper Liner and Two Thick Plates, Snap Shots of Liner
Collapse, Jet Formation and Plates Penetrated (Courtesy Postprocessing by
CEI Ensight)
Figure 13-22 shows the velocity field of explosive gases, liner, and jet at 20 s. A jet velocity of about
6000 m/s is achieved
Figure 13-22
Main Index
TSTEPNL 1
10
1.E-06
1
PARAM*,DYINISTEP,1.E-11
PARAM*,DYMINSTEP,1.E-13
DYPARAM,VELMAX,20.0E+03
DYPARAM,LSDYNA,BINARY,D3PLOT,1.E-5
$
INCLUDE model.bdf
INCLUDE wall.dat
$ EXPLOSIVE
$
MATDEUL 100
1630.
100
101
102
$
EOSIG,100,,MCOMPB,SI,,,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,,,,99
$
SHREL,101,3.E9
$
YLDVM,102,2.E8
$
$ COPPER
$
MATDEUL 701
8960.
711
712
713
EOSPOL, 711, 1.43+11, 0.839+11, 2.16+9
SHREL,712,0.477E11
$ Johnson-Cook
$
A
B
n
C
m
EPS0
Cv
YLDJC,713, 1.2E8, 1.43E9, 0.5, 0.0, 1.0, 1.0, 399.0,+
$
TMELT TROOM
+, 1356.0, 293.0
$
PMINC,714,-2.5E10
$
$ STEEL
$
MATDEUL 801
7830.
811
812
813
EOSPOL, 811, 1.64E+11
SHREL,812,0.818E11
YLDVM,813,1.4E9
PMINC,814,-3.8E9
$
TICEUL1 1
1
TICREG 1
1
ELEM
1
100
1
TICREG 2
1
CYLINDER1
701
2
TICREG 3
1
CYLINDER2
TICREG 4
1
CYLINDER3
701
2
TICREG 5
1
CYLINDER4
801
3
TICREG 6
1
CYLINDER5
801
3
$
PEULER1, 1 ,, MMSTREN, 1
SET1
1
1
THRU
15342
CYLINDR, 1,, -0.5391, -0.56, 0., 2.0, 0.4147, 0.,+
+,0.2958
Main Index
714
814
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Main Index
0.4147, 0.,+
2.0406, 0.,+
2.0406, 0.,+
2.0406, 0.,+
Mine Blast
Problem Description
This is a simulation of an explosion under a vehicle. The vehicle has triggered a mine that is exploding
underneath the bottom shield. In this example, the actual explosion of the mine is not modeled. Instead,
the simulation is started moments after the mine explodes. This is called the blast wave approach. At the
location of the mine, a high density and high specific energy is assumed in the shape of a small sphere.
During the simulation, this region of high density, energy, and high pressure, expands rapidly. The blast
wave interacts with the bottom shield and causes an acceleration of parts of the flexible body. The intent
of this simulation is to find the location and the value of the maximum acceleration.
SOL 700 Model
An outline of the basic numerical model is shown in Figure 13-23 below. It is composed of the following
main components:
a. Vehicle Structure
b. Euler Domain 1 - air outside vehicle and compressed air (explosive)
c. Euler Domain 2 - air inside vehicle
d. Ground
e. Fluid Structural Coupling
Figure 13-23
Main Index
A. The Vehicle:
Vehicle structure is modeled by QUAD, TRIA shell elements and some BAR elements.
Figure 13-24
Vehicle Structure
7.85E-9
tonne/mm3
Modulus of elasticity
210000.
tonne/mm/s2
Poison ratio
0.3
Yield stress
250.
tonne/mm/s2
Assumed that there will be no failure of the structure. In a part of the structure, there is a hole through
which air and pressure waves can freely flow. This hole will be modeled with dummy shell elements.
B. Euler Domain 1:
The first Euler domain is the air on the outside of the vehicle. The properties of air at rest are:
Density
1.29E-12
Gamma
1.4
1.9385E8
tonne/mm3
tonne-mm2/s2
Main Index
At the location of the mine, a small region will be modeled with high density and specific internal energy
equivalent to TNT of 7kg when the sphere has a radius of .25 meter:
Density
107E-12
tonne/mm3
4.9E12
tonne-mm2/s2
Main Index
Many of the previous cards will be used to initialize the density and energy (TICVAL) and material
(DMAT/EOSGAM) in this Euler region:
TICVAL,4,,DENSITY,107E-12,SIE,3.9e12
TICVAL,5,,DENSITY,1.29E-12,SIE,1.938e11
MATDEUL,230,1.29e-12,203,,,,,,+
+,,1.01
EOSGAM,203,1.4
D. The Ground:
The ground is modeled as rigid body using dummy QUAD elements. It is used to close the Euler
boundary under the vehicle so the blast wave will reflect on this boundary:
PSHELL,999,999,1.
MATRIG,999,,,,1.0E10,0.00,0.00,-800.,+
+,1.E10,0.0,0.0,1.E10,0.0,1.E10,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,,,1,7,7
E. Fluid Structure Interaction:
In order to make fluid structure interaction possible, a closed volume needs to be defined. The car model
itself is not closed, so a dummy boundary will be defined to close the volume. This extra surface consists
of three parts:
Part 1 resides on the back,
Part 2 is the top cover, and
Part 3 is the vent on the bottom of the vehicle.
For all these parts, dummy shell elements are defined and hole definitions will be defined.
Figure 13-25
Main Index
With this closed volume, the coupling surface can be defined. For each Euler domain, a separate surface
is required. However, in this model, the interaction surface consists of the same elements, except for the
extra ground elements (pid=999) for the outer Euler domain region 1. The surface definition will make
use of the properties of the elements.
The outer surface:
BCPROP,97,60,61,62,110,135,150,900,+
+,910,920,999
The inner surface:
BCPROP,98,60,61,62,110,135,150,900,+
+,910,920
Now the coupling surfaces can be defined. For the outer region, all elements inside the volume are not
active. The covered option will, therefore, be set to INSIDE. Attached to this surface will be the first
Euler MESH:
COUPLE,1,97,INSIDE,ON,ON,11,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,1
The inner Euler domain is constrained by surface 2. For this volume, the outer Euler elements will be
covered:
COUPLE,2,98,OUTSIDE,ON,ON,,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,2
As discussed before, there are holes in the coupling surface. To this end, a flow definition is required for
one of the coupling surfaces. In this example, the flow cards are referenced from the first coupling
surface. The input to define flow between the regions is:
LEAKAGE,1,11,1,PORFCPL,84,CONSTANT,1.0
BCPROP,1,900
Also, for each of the other two flow surfaces, these set of cards are repeated
$
LEAKAGE,2,11,2,PORFCPL,84,CONSTANT,1.0
BCPROP,2,910
$
LEAKAGE,3,11,3,PORFCPL,84,CONSTANT,1.0
BCPROP,3,920
$
Finally, the flow definition itself prescribes that the Euler region from coupling surface 1 is interacting
with the Euler region from coupling surface 2:
PORFCPL,84,LARGE,,BOTH,2
Main Index
F. Miscellaneous:
a. Because this model uses the coupling surface interface, the time step safety factor for Eulerian
elements has to be .6. However, the Lagrangian elements (the quadratic and triangular
elements) determine the time-step, and it is beneficial to use a higher time step safety factor
for the Lagrangian elements:
PARAM,STEPFCTL,0.9
b. To show results every .0002 seconds the following output request was added:
DYPARAM, LSDYNA, BINARY, D3PLOT,.0002
PARAM, CPLSARC,.0002
Results
The Figure 13-26 below shows the location, value, and time of the maximum acceleration. The stress
distribution at this time is also in Figure 13-27.
Figure 13-26
Main Index
Acceleration Plot
Figure 13-27
Main Index
$
TICREG,1,11,SPHERE,400,230,4,20.
TICREG,2,11,SPHERE,501,230,5,1.
$
SPHERE,400,,1797.5,0.,-450.,250.
SPHERE,501,,0.,0.,-5000.,10000.
$
PEULER1,202,,2ndOrder,102
$
TICEUL1,102,12
$
TICREG,3,12,SPHERE,502,230,5,5.
$
SPHERE,502,,0.,0.,-5000.,10000.
$
TICVAL,4,,DENSITY,107E-12,SIE,3.9e12
TICVAL,5,,DENSITY,1.29E-12,SIE,1.938e11
$
MATDEUL,230,1.29e-12,203,,,,,,+
+,,1.01
$
EOSGAM,203,1.4
$
FLOWDEF,202,,HYDRO,,,,,,+
+,FLOW,BOTH
$
COUPLE,1,97,INSIDE,ON,ON,11,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,1
$
$ Define flow thru the holes
$
LEAKAGE,1,11,1,PORFCPL,84,CONSTANT,1.0
BCPROP,1,900
$
LEAKAGE,2,11,2,PORFCPL,84,CONSTANT,1.0
BCPROP,2,910
$
LEAKAGE,3,11,3,PORFCPL,84,CONSTANT,1.0
BCPROP,3,920
$
PORFCPL,84,LARGE,,BOTH,2
$
COUPLE,2,98,OUTSIDE,ON,ON,,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,2
$
BCPROP,97,60,61,62,110,135,150,900,+
+,910,920,999
$
BCPROP,98,60,61,62,110,135,150,900,+
+,910,920
$
$ ========== PROPERTY SETS ==========
Main Index
$
$
* pbar.9988 *
$
PBAR
9988
222
3600.1000000.1000000.2000000.
$
$
* pbar.9989 *
$
PBAR
9989
222 100000.
3.E+8
3.E+8
6.E+8
$
$
* pbar.9990 *
$
PBAR
9990
222
3000. 200000.2500000.3000000.
$
$
* pbar.9993 *
$
PBAR,9993,111,459.96,25066.,55282.,16543.
$
$
* pbar.9996 *
$
PBAR,9996,111,895.52,309450.,55349.,48782.
$
$
* pbar.9999 *
$
PBAR,9999,111,736.,490275.,827555.,2095137.
$
$
* pshell.30 *
$
PSHELL
30
111
3
$
$
* pshell.40 *
$
PSHELL
40
111
4
$
$
* pshell.50 *
$
PSHELL
50
111
5
$
$
* pshell.60 *
$
PSHELL
60
111
6
PSHELL
61
111
6
PSHELL
62
111
6
$
* pshell.80 *
$
PSHELL
80
111
8
$
$
* pshell.110 *
$
PSHELL
110
111
11
$
$
* pshell.120 *
$
PSHELL
120
111
12
$
Main Index
$
* pshell.135 *
$
PSHELL
135
111
13.5
$
$
* pshell.150 *
$
PSHELL
150
111
15
PSHELL
151
111
15
$
$
* pshell.200 *
$
PSHELL
200
111
20
$
$
* pshell.450 *
$
PSHELL
450
111
45
$
$ dummy elements for coupling surface
$ hole
PSHELL,900,901,1.
$ top cover
PSHELL,910,901,1.
$ side cover
PSHELL,920,901,1.
$
MATD009,901,1.E-20
$
$ ground
PSHELL,999,999,1.
$
MATRIG,999,,,,1.0E10,0.00,0.00,-800.,+
+,1.E10,0.0,0.0,1.E10,0.0,1.E10,,,+
+,,,,,,,,,+
+,,,,1,7,7
$
$
* conm2 *
$
CONM2,5000,1145,,1.5
CONM2,5001,1146,,1.7
$
$ ========= MATERIAL DEFINITIONS ==========
$
MATD024,111,7.85e-09,210000.,.3,250E10
$
MAT1,222,210000.,,.3,7.85e-09
$
INCLUDE model.bdf
INCLUDE ground.dat
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
The 180 degrees cylindrical surface and the two open sides of the bunker. The two open sides
are represented by dummy shell elements. These are elements 1 to 2240.
The top of the ground that lies within the bunker. This is a square and is formed by elements
2241 to 3280.
These facets make up a closed coupling surface, as shown in Figure 13-28.
Main Index
This coupling surface contains gas inside, and therefore Euler elements outside the coupling surface
should not be processed and so the COVER is OUTSIDE.
Figure 13-28
Coupling Surface 1
to 2240. The top of the ground inside the bunker is not part of the second COUPLE.
The top of the ground that is outside the bunker and 5 dummy surfaces of the ground that are
used to close the coupling surfaces. These are formed by the elements 3413 to 4012, 4095 to
4340, 4505 to 4709, 4894 to 7904.
These facets make up a closed coupling surface, as shown in Figure 13-29.
Figure 13-29
Main Index
Coupling Surface 2
This coupling surface is used for simulating the gas outside the coupling surface. So Euler elements
inside the coupling surface should not be processed and the COVER has to be set to INSIDE. The second
coupling surface uses the second Euler mesh and serves as inner boundary surface for this Euler mesh.
The outside boundary of this mesh is where the Euler domains ends and boundary conditions for this
boundaries are provided by a FLOWDEF. The FLOWDEF is chosen as non-reflecting. Waves exit the
Euler domain with only little reflection.
To get an accurate expansion of the blast wave, the diffusion should be kept at a minimum, and therefore
the Roe solver with second-order is used. Interactive failure will be used for the bunker structure, while
porosity will be used for the open sides:
The bunker elements can fail and gas flows through the failed elements from outside the bunker
into the bunker. All elements of the bunker are assigned to a BSURF, and occur in both coupling
surfaces. They are able to fail interactively, using the COUP1FL entry. These parts are formed by
elements 1 to 1600. The nodes of the failed elements are constrained in space by using PARAM,
NZEROVEL, YES, to preserve the geometry of the coupling surfaces from severe distortion.
Since gas can flow through the two sides without any obstruction, these two areas are modeled
with BSURF entries, and are opened by using a PORFLCPL entry. These sides are modeled with
dummy shell elements and consist of elements 1601 to 2400.
The couple cards refer to mesh-number. The first mesh for the Euler elements inside the bunker is created
and initialized by:
PEULER1,301,,2ndOrder,111
MESH,2,BOX,,,,,,,+
+,-430.,0.,-1287.,837.,480.,1296.,,,+
+,24,16,30,,,,EULER,301
The value "2ndOrder" activates the Roe solver with second-order accuracy. The property id is the link
between the TICEUL1 card 101 and the mesh card. The second Euler mesh for the Euler elements outside
the bunker is created and initialized by:
PEULER1,201,,2ndOrder,101
MESH,1,BOX,,,,,,,+
+,-647.,0.,-1293.,1057.,447.,1293.,,,+
+,33,23,37,,,,EULER,201
Main Index
Results
Figures 13-30 and 13-31 show a fringe plot and an isosurface. Figure 13-31 has been created by Ensight.
Figure 13-30
Figure 13-31
Isosurfaces Created using SIE Variable for the Two Euler Domains
Main Index
$INCLUDE mesh.dat
INCLUDE model.dat
$
TSTEPNL 1
20
0.0005
1
$------- Parameter Section -----DYPARAM,FASTCOUP,,FAIL
PARAM*,DYINISTEP,1E-7
PARAM*,DYMINSTEP,1E-8
DYPARAM,LIMITER,ROE
DYPARAM,RKSCHEME,3
DYPARAM,LSDYNA,BINARY,D3PLOT,0.002
$
$ ========== PROPERTY SETS ==========
$
$
* steel prop *
$
PSHELL
1
1
.150
$
$
* dummy_shell *
$
PSHELL,2,2,1E-3
MATD009,2,1E-20
$
$
PSHELL
3
4
.100
$
$ ========= MATERIAL DEFINITIONS ==========
$
$
$ -------- Material steel id =1
MATD024,1,.000734,2.9e+07,.3,50000,,.21
$
$ -------- Material AIR id =3
MATDEUL
3 1.2e-07
3
EOSGAM
3
1.4
$
$ -------- ground
MATRIG
4 .000734 2.9e+07
.3
$
$ ======== Load Cases ========================
$
$ ------- General Coupling: GENERAL ----$
$
COUPLE
7
1 INSIDE
ON
ON
+
+
1
1
$
BSURF
1
1
THRU
2240
3413
+
THRU
4340
4505
THRU
4709
$
$
COUP1FL,1,1.2e-07,3e+08
$
Main Index
16
THRU
4894
+
+
4012
THRU
4095+
7904
COUPLE
8
11 OUTSIDE
ON
ON
+
+
2
2
$
BSURF
11
1
THRU
3280
$
$
COUP1FL,2,1.2e-07,3e+08
$
$
COUPINT,1,7,8
$
PORFCPL,81,LARGE,,BOTH,8
LEAKAGE,1,16,32,PORFCPL,81,,1.0
BSURF
32
1601
THRU
2240
$
$ ------- Rigid Body Constraints ----$
SPCD2
1
RIGID
MR4
1
0
1
SPCD2
1
RIGID
MR4
2
0
1
SPCD2
1
RIGID
MR4
3
0
1
SPCD2
1
RIGID
MR4
5
0
1
SPCD2
1
RIGID
MR4
6
0
1
SPCD2
1
RIGID
MR4
7
0
1
TABLED1 1
+
0.
1.
1.
1.
ENDT
$
$-----Mesh.dat--------------$
MESH,1,BOX,,,,,,,+
+,-647.,0.,-1293.,1057.,447.,1293.,,,+
+,33,23,37,,,,EULER,201
$
$ Inner Euler
$
MESH,2,BOX,,,,,,,+
+,-430.,0.,-1287.,837.,480.,1296.,,,+
+,24,16,30,,,,EULER,301
$
PEULER1,201,,2ndOrder,101
PEULER1,301,,2ndOrder,111
$
$
TICEUL1
101
101
TICREG
1
101 SPHERE
8
3
TICREG
2
101 SPHERE
5
3
4
$
SPHERE
8
-536.4
165 -453.6
SPHERE
5
-536.4
165 -453.6
$
$
TICEUL1
111
111
TICREG
3
111 SPHERE
9
3
$
Main Index
+
+
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
+
1
85
10000
SPHERE
9
-53.4
100
$
$
$ ------- TICVAL BC AIR-INI ----TICVAL
4
DENSITY 1.2e-07
$
$ ------- TICVAL BC EXP-INI ----TICVAL
5
DENSITY3.84e-06
$
$
FLOWDEF,202,,HYDRO,,,,,,+
+,FLOW,BOTH
$
ENDDATA
Main Index
-673.6
10000
SIE
3e+08
SIE
3e+09
Main Index
Model
The chassis consists of 1986 grid points and 1996 quadratic shell elements. An impact loading is applied
at the end point of upper picture. The impact loading which is defined by FORCE and TABLE entries
starts 0 at 0 seconds, goes up to 0.01 at 0.001 second and down to 0 at 0.002 second like lower figure.
There is no boundary condition. The units are g, mm, and second.
Figure 13-32
Main Index
Input
On node 902517, the impact loading is applied. This analysis is done by the following three steps.
Step 1: Find modal properties using TIMNVH entry
Step 2: Check the obtained modal properties and select required natural frequencies
Step 3: Re-run with selected natural frequencies
Input file timnvh.bdf
SOL 700,NLTRAN path=3 stop=1
SOL 700 is the initiating command of an explicit nonlinear transient analysis.
Case control section is below.
CEND
LOADSET = 1
SUBCASE 1
TSTEPNL = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
Bulk entry section starts.
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL 1
100
.01
1
ADAPT
2
TIMNVH,1, , , 1.0, 1000., 3,.0005, 2,+
+, 0, 3, 1, 0.015, 0, 3, 13, .0030,+
+, 901581, 901641, 901697, 901865, 902061, 902097, , ,+
+, 902580, 902595, 902609, 902797, 902996, 903063
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (100) and Time
Increment (10 ms) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps is determined by MD Nastran during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest
element dimension during the simulation.
TIMNVH entry is for Time NVH analysis.
Main Index
1,
1.0,
500.,
3,
0.00005,
2,+
The range of natural frequencies to obtain is from 1.0 Hz to 500 Hz and only z-translational degrees of
freedom is considered (3). The sampling rate is 0.00005 seconds. The peaking criterion is two, which
means a peak is selected if the number of increasing and decreasing amplitude around a peak is over 2.
+,
0,
3,
1,
0.015,
0,
3,
13,
.0030,+
Acceleration is selected for the response (0) and translational eigenvectors are only requested as ASCII
format (3). Eignevalues are normalized by 1.0 (1) and 0.015 is selected as a tolerance value which means
if there are two modes which distance is smaller than 0.015 Hz, it is assumed to be the same mode. ACII
file format of natural frequencies and eigenvalues are requested (0) as well as translational time histories
of z-direction (3). Frequency-amplitude data of z-direction are requested (13) and a peak which
amplitude is less than 0.0030the maximum amplitude is ignored (.0030)
+, 901581, 901641, 901697, 901865, 902061, 902097, , ,+
+, 902580, 902595, 902609, 902797, 902996, 903063
The grid points (901581, 901641, 901697, 901865, 902061, 902097, 902580, 902595, 902609, 902797,
902996 and 903063) are only considered for Time NVH analysis.
Bulk data entry that defines grid points and elements.
CQUAD4
..
GRID
..
901092
64011
901572
901573
901705
901704
0.
1711.76 -595.649577.221
Bulk data entry that defines properties for shell elements with 3.5mm thickness:.
PSHELL
..
63
3.5
63
63
Main Index
4
1
2
3
5
5
3
1.
1.
902517 0
1
4
.01
0.
0.
-1.
0.
1
-10.
10.
0.
0.
0.
ENDT
0.
.001
1.
.002
0.
..
ENDDATA
$ Nodes of the Entire Model
$ Loads for Load Case : Default
SPCADD
2
1
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix
SPC1
1
2
903448 903909 904202
904558
10
PARAM, S700NVH is for the re-run of Time Domain NVH analysis. Using 1 as option Time Domain
NVH analysis is carried out without re-running SOL 700.
The PEAK value (original: 2) in TIMNVH entry is changed to -2 to use TIMNAT entry.
TIMNAT entry is for the control of the natural frequency selection. In this job, 35, 43, 49, 101, 108 Hz are
Main Index
1.00E+00
node 901581
node 902996
node 902797
1.00E-01
node 902609
node 902595
node 902580
node 902097
node 902061
1.00E-02
node 901865
node 901697
node 901641
node 903063
1.00E-03
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Comparison of natural frequencies between SOL 103 and SOL 700 (Hz)
Mode
SOL103
SOL 700
Diff(%)
Comparison
3.601695E+01
3.500018E+01
2.82%
4.395227E+01
4.300022E+01
2.17%
5.250646E+01
4.900025E+01
6.68%
6.742810E+01
Small peak
8.472197E+01
Small peak
1.019688E+02
1.010005E+02
0.95%
1.110159E+02
1.080005E+02
2.72%
Since an impact is applied to vertical direction and the peaks are detected by the vertical direction
acceleration, the horizontal dominant modes are hard to catch.
Main Index
In mode.out file
1st Mode Natural Frequency
MODES
EIGV
1
5
1
3.500018E+01
901581-3.32998498E-02-2.49243337E-04 7.08997618E-01
901641-4.29914555E-02 7.70991520E-05-1.08571907E-01
901697-4.15069142E-02 2.55256359E-04-6.31611930E-01
901865 4.37855265E-02-1.51550001E-04-4.18557096E-01
902061 7.97601410E-02 4.34427876E-04 5.67705213E-01
902097 8.68013598E-02 8.02417982E-03 1.00000000E+00
902580-3.38588683E-02 2.97715028E-04 7.28400224E-01
902595-4.37831381E-02 2.30181446E-04-9.77437006E-02
902609-4.24521220E-02-1.61168521E-04-6.35288211E-01
902797 4.11242103E-02-3.00773060E-04-4.29582120E-01
902996 7.69986448E-02 7.40153667E-04 5.51699503E-01
903063 8.41026922E-02-3.47784987E-03 9.82653769E-01
1st Mode
..
Output Node Number
x-eigenvector
y-eigenvector
z-eigenvector
Main Index
SOL 103
SOL 700
Mode
Main Index
SOL 103
SOL 700
Mode
SOL 103
SOL 700
Because the vertical mode shapes of mode 2 and 3 are very similar although the lateral mode shapes and
the amplitudes of vertical mode are quite different, the mode shapes 2 and 3 obtained from SOL 700 are
nearly similar.
Main Index
Prestress
Simulation of Prestress and Impact on Rotating Fan Blades
Description
Aerospace companies perform bird strike test simulation to predict the impact-resistance properties of
the aircraft structure. This is an example of a solid object, impacting against rotating fan blades. The
radius of the rotor and the fan blades are respectively 0.040 m and 0.195 m. The rotational speed of the
rotor is 10 rev/s.
The impactor is a cube of 0.0 4 x 0.0215 x 0.05 m and its velocity is 50 m/s (112 mph). Material model
MATD024 was used to simulate the elastic-plastic properties of the impactor with parameters as follows:
= 1000kg m 3
P R = 0.3
y = 2.E + 7 P a
E h = 2.1 E + 10P a
ETAN = 5 E + 7
To model the fan blades and the rotor MATD024 material was used as:
= 7800kg m 3
P R = 0.3
y = 2.E + 8 P a
E h = 2.1 E + 11P a
ETAN = 5 E + 8
Main Index
Model
The model has a total of 3173 grid points and 2950 elements as follows:
2800 Quads
150 Hexas
The rotor and fan blades are modeled by shell elements. The impactor is modeled with solid elements.
The relative speed of the impactor to the rotor is modeled by defining an initial velocity of 50 m /s (112
mph), applied on all the grid points of the impactor. The simulation time is 0.01 seconds. The unit system
is m, N, sec.
Input
The simulation consists of two runs. The first run is a presstress analysis that computes the deformations
and stresses due to rotation. This computation is essentially static. Conducting this computation in the
impact run would require structural relaxation. Since this would interfere with the impact process the
static part of the computation is done by an implicit solver in a presstress run. Boundary conditions and
initial conditions of the prestress run differ from the second run. In the prestress run the rear of the rotor
is fixed and a force in circumferential direction is applied to the rotor and fan blades. In the impact run
the rear of the rotor is given an angular velocity and the impactor is given an initial velocity. Contacts are
defined between the fan blades and the impactor.
Input file
SOL 700,NLTRAN stop=1
Main Index
SOL 700 is a executive control entry similar to SOL 600. It activates an explicit nonlinear transient
1.-5
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (5) and Time
Increment (1e-5 sec) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest element
dimension during the simulation.
By using the SOL 700 bulk data entry PRESTRS, a prestress analysis is carried out. Here the implicit
MD Nastran solver is used. This solver requires the analysis to be run with double precision executable.
Final deformations and stresses of elements are written to a text file named imput_file_name.nastin
to provide initial conditions for rotor and fan blades of the impact run.
Bulk data entries that define properties for shell elements
PSHELL1 1
+
0.0025
1
0.0025
BLT
0.0025
GAUSS
0.0025
.3
2.+8
5.+8
MATD024 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that models arbitrary elasto-plastic material.
Main Index
.15
Bulk data entry that defines geometric properties of the rotor and blades:
$ Pset: "p1" will be imported as: "pshell.1"
CQUAD4
1
1
77
78
6
..
..
$ Nodes of the Entire Model
0.
-1.
RFORCE is a bulk data entry that defines a static loading condition due to angular velocity.
Main Index
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (100) and Time
Increment (1e-4 sec) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps is determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest element
dimension during the simulation.
INCLUDE prestr10.dytr.nastin
The inputdeck of the impact run includes the nastran file prestr10.dytr.nastin. This makes the shell
elements that are defined in the prestress run available to the impact run. The only properties of the rotor
and fan blade that need to be defined in the impact run are material properties and boundary conditions.
The file prestr10.dytr.nastin contains the entry ISTRSSH. This entry specifies what result variables
of the prestress run are to be carried over to the impact run.
Bulk data entries that define Contact relations and Contact bodies:
$ Define contact
BCTABLE 1
SLAVE
3
0
MASTERS 3
..
Main Index
0.
0
4
0.
0
0.
0.
0.
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is also used by SOL 600 and it is meant to define MasterSlave as well as self contact. In addition to contact between impactor and fan blade there is also self
contact defined.
2120
2121
2122
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only, which defines a flexible or rigid
contact body in 2-D or 3-D. It could be specified with a BSURF, BCBOX, BCPROP, or BCMATL entry.
0
2804
2805
2806
BSURF is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is used by SOL 600 and SOL 700 only, which defines a contact
surface or body by element IDs. All elements with the specified IDs define a contact body.
Bulk data entries that define material properties for the shell and solid elements:
$ shell elements
$ Material Record : mat1.1
MATD024 1
7800.
2.1+11
.3
2.+8
5.+8
.15
$ solid elements
$ Material Record : mat1.2
MATD024 2
1000.
2.1+10
.3
2.+7
5.+7
.15
Main Index
2957
The shell elements are defined through the Nastran initialization file prestr10.nastin.
Bulk data entry that defines boundary conditions and initial velocity:
BCGRID
+
+
1
THRU
21
2073
THRU
2741
31
1346
THRU
THRU
1355
2064
2749
BCGRID is also used to specify a set of nodes which are to be constrained with SPCD2 (angular velocity).
Main Index
Results
Prestress Run
In accordance to the TSTEPNL entry 5 results increments were archived. The results of all increments are
essentially the same which indicates that the implicit calculations are stable. The results of the last
increment were written to the file prestres10.dytr.nastin.
Result Increment 2
Main Index
Impact Run:
The prestress result variables have been initialized at the begin of the analysis (Time = 0)
t = 0 sec
Main Index
t = 0.0001 sec
t = 0.001 sec
Main Index
t = 0.002 sec
t = 0.005 sec
Main Index
t = 0.01 sec
Main Index
Main Index
Model
The circular section located at the center of plate was modeled using SPH elements and the remainder of
the plate was modeled using structural material property (MATD003) in the example. The ball is modeled
by SPH elements and is impacting the the center of plate at 6.18 km/s . The model has a total of 19479
grid points, 300 solid elements and 18759 SPH particle elements. All the structural elements were Hexas.
The simulation time is 20.0 seconds.
Input file
SOL 700,NLTRAN stop=1
SOL 700 is an executive control card similar to SOL 600. It activates an explicit nonlinear
transient analysis.
Case control section is below:
DLOAD = 1
IC = 1
SPC = 1
BCONTACT = 1
TSTEPNL = 1
The bulk entry section starts:
BEGIN BULK
$
TSTEPNL*1
*
$
$ DATABASE_BINARY
6000
3.3333334E-03
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (6000) and Time
Increment (3.33 ms) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps are determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest element
dimension during the simulation.
LSDYNA,BINARY,D3PLOT option of DYPARAM entry controls the output time steps of d3plot binary file.
The result plots at every 0.5 seconds are stored in d3plot binary file.
$
$ Number of SPH =
CSPH*
*
Main Index
10000001
18759
11
8.2517613E-04
CSPH entry defines a SPH particle. The SPH element number (10000001) must correspond to the
grid number which describes the SPH element location. The lumped mass (8.25E-4) is applied on the
SPH element.
$
$ Part = material type #10
$
PSPH*
10
2
*
*
1.200000
0.2000000
*
0.0
0.0
2
4.000000
0.0
*
*
*
PSPH entry defines the property of SPH particle. Both of the material property and equation of state are
set to 2. The smoothing length of the particles is set to 1.2. The scale factors for the minimum and
maximum smoothing length are set to 0.2 and 4.0, respectively.
$
$ Number of EOS =
$
EOSGRUN*2
*
0.0
*
0.0
*
2
0.5328000
2.000000
1.339000
0.4800000
0.0
0.0
*
*
*
All fields are set for the coefficients of two equations above. Please see MD Nastran Quick Reference
Guide for details.
SPHDEF* 1
*
0
*
*
Main Index
0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
*
*
*
SPHDEF entry defines and controls the physics of SPH particles. All values of this example are assigned
using default values. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for details.
$
MATD003*1
*
2.9000000E-03
*
0.0
*
2.785000
7.0000000E-02
0.0
0.7000000
1.000000
0.0
0.2690000
0
*
*
*
MATD003 entry defines an isotropic and kinematic hardening plastic material including rate effects. This
material is used to model the boundary structural plate in the example. The density is 2.785 kg/cm3 and
Youngs modulus is 0.7 GPa. The Poissons ratio, the yield stress and the tangential modulus are set to
0.269, 0.0029 GPa and 0.07 GPa, respectively. The hardening parameter is set to 1, which describes the
isotropic hardening only.
$
$ *INITIAL_VELOCITY_NODE
$
TIC*
1
10000001
*
0.0
$
$ *INITIAL_VELOCITY_NODE
$
TIC*
1
100001
*
0.0
TIC*
1
100001
*
0.6180000
MATD024 is a SOL 700 bulk data entry. It was used to model an elasto-plastic material with an arbitrary
stress versus strain curve and arbitrary strain rate dependency. Failure can also be defined based on the
plastic strain or a minimum time step size.
Bulk data entries that defines initial velocity of the rod:
TIC entry defines a nodal initial condition. In the example, all SPH grids have initial velocity conditions.
Grid point 10000001 is located at the center of the plate and has zero velocity to all directions. Other
nodes on the center of the plate have zero velocities similar to grid point 10000001. Grid point 100001
is located at the ball which has a velocity of 0.618 cm/s in y direction. All nodes on the ball have the same
velocity as grid point 100001.
$
MATD010 2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Main Index
2.785
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.269
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.9E-03
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-2.0E-2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
MATD010 entry defines an elastic-plastic hydrodynamic material. This material is used to model SPH
elements. The density, shear modulus, yield stress and cutoff pressure are set to 2.785 kg/cm3, 0.269 GPa,
0.0029 GPa and -0.02 GPa, respectively.
$
$ Part = material type # 3
$
PSOLIDD*1
1
*
PSOLIDD entry defines a solid element property using element formulation and equation of state. In the
example, this entry can be changed to PSOLID because only material property is assigned.
Bulk data entries that define grid points and solid type elements.
$
$ Number of Nodes =
19479
$
GRID
1
-0.3E+1 0.404
-0.30E+1
..
GRID
101791
0.667E-1-0.467 0.467
$
$ Number of Solid elements =
300
$2345678$2345678$2345678$2345678$2345678$2345678$2345678$2345678$2345678
CHEXA
1
1
13
14
20
19
1
2
8
7
..
CHEXA
300
1
714
715
720
719
704
705
710
709
Main Index
100
ENERGY
*
RYLEN
Results
Figure 13-33
Main Index
t = 0.00 s
t = 1.98 s
t = 3.98 s
t = 5.98 s
t = 8.99 s
t = 20.0 s
Main Index
Figure 13-34
Main Index
Model
Figure 13-35
The SOL 700 model is shown in Figure 13-35. The main parts in the finite element model are:
sheet metal
punch
die
clamp
Sheet Metal
The SOL 700 material model for sheet metals is a highly sophisticated model and includes full
anisotropic behavior, strain-rate effects, and customized output options that are dependent on material
choice. Since not all of the materials can be derived from the simplified set given by the NUMISHEET
organization, most participants in the conference used an isotropic material model. In reality, the process
is definitely anisotropic and effect due to these differences can be seen in the transverse direction. For
materials displaying in-plane anisotropic behavior, the effect would be even more noticeable. The
parameters on the MAT190 (refer to the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide) specify planar anisotropic
behavior and are as follows (for the aluminum sheet):
MATD190 elastic material properties.
Isotropic behavior was assumed in the elastic range:
Main Index
Planar anisotropic yielding and isotropic hardening were assumed in the plastic range:
R0 = 0.71
R45 = 0.58
R90 = 0.70
Punch, Die, and Clamp
These three components provide the constraints and driving displacement for the analysis and are
modeled as rigid bodies. Contact is then specified with the metal sheet using the friction coefficient
values provided. The three contact types are specified as following:
Contact between the punch and the sheet
Contact between the die and sheet
Contact between the clamp and sheet
Finally, the punch is given a scaled downward velocity providing the driving displacement for
the analysis.
Input File
SOL 700,NLTRAN stop=1
SOL 700 is an executive control card and activates an explicit nonlinear transient analysis.
Case control section is below:
DLOAD = 1
IC = 1
SPC = 1
BCONTACT = 1
TSTEPNL = 1
The bulk entry section starts:
BEGIN BULK
$
TSTEPNL 1
$
DYPARAM LSDYNA
Main Index
20
2.0E-3
BINARY
D3PLOT
0.002
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (20) and Time
Increment (2.00 ms) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of Time Increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps are determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest element
dimension during the simulation.
LSDYNA,BINARY,D3PLOT option of DYPARAM entry controls the output time steps of d3plot binary file.
The result plots at every 0.002 seconds are stored in d3plot binary file.
Bulk data entries that define properties for shell elements
PSHELL1 1
+
.81
MATD020 2
1
1.0
4
BLT
210.E9
7
Gauss
0.3
MATD020 entry defines the rigid material property. In the example, the clamp, die, and punch are
modeled by the rigid materials.
MATD190 1
2.7E-4 7.1E7
0.33
2.0
+
6.0
.71
.58
.70
+
2.0
77
+
1.0
0.0
+
0.0
1.0
TABLED1,77,,,,,,,,+
+,-100.0,196.67,0.0,30.,30.,45.,40.,47.,+
+,50.,45.,ENDT
576.79E3.3593
.01658
0.0
+
+
+
+
0.0
MATD190 entry defines an anisotropic material developed by Barlat and Lian (1989) for modeling sheets
under plane stress conditions and failure criteria of Forming Limit Diagram. This material allows the use
of the Lankford parameters for the definition of the anisotropy.
Y ( p ) = k ( 0 + p ) p
Main Index
SPCD2 entry defines imposed nodal motion on a node, a set of nodes or nodes of a rigid body. The rigid
punch is moving downward at 1000 mm/s from 0 to 0.02 seconds.
FORCE
9999
MR3
-19.6E6
1.
FORCE entry defines a force on the grid point as well as rigids. Since the forces on the rigid body are not
yet supported by Nastran input processor, TODYNA and ENDDYNA entries are used in conjunction with
FORCE entry to by-pass the IFP (Input File Processor) and directly access SOL 700.
BCTABLE
1
SLAVE
1
0
0.162
0.
0
3
0.
0
SS1WAY
0.162
0.
+
+
BCBODY entry defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2-D or 3-D. Although SOL 700 only supports
a flexible contact in BCTABLE, the rigid contact can be applied using the rigid material of contact bodies.
In the example, all contacts have 0.162 static and kinetic friction coefficients. The surface to surface one
way contact method is used on the all contact definition.
BCBODY
..
$
BSURF
..
1
1
DEFORM
THRU
1600
BCBODY entry defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2-D and 3-D.
BSURF entry defines a contact surface or body by element IDs. All elements with the specified IDs
define a contact body.
$
GRID
..
GRID
$
CQUAD4
..
CQUAD4
Main Index
-75.
75.
0.0
4528
-8.33333-37.0067-75.405
43
42
4468
63
4527
4273
4274
4528
Figure 13-36
Main Index
Main Index
Figure 13-37
Figure 13-38
Figure 13-39
t = 0.000 s
t = 0.004 s
t = 0.008 s
t = 0.012 s
t = 0.016 s
t = 0.020 s
Note that the FLD diagram correctly predicts the failure of elements at t = 0.019 as shown in the stress
fringe plots.
Main Index
Generate jid.dytr.nastin
Analysis Scheme
Model
The model of explicit run is the same as Part 1. In the implicit run, only the sheet metal is used.
Input File
Explicit Input File
BEGIN BULK
$
TSTEPNL 1
Main Index
10
1.8E-3
SEQROUT entry generates the jid.dytr.nastin file at the end of simulation. The nastin file
includes the final deformations and stresses of the assigned part. The nastin file can be used for a
subsequent explicit or implicit SOL 700 run. In the example, only the result for Part 10 which includes
the sheet metal is written out to the nastin file.
10
1.8E-3
SEQROUT entry generates the jid.dytr.nastin file at the end of simulation. The nastin file
includes the final deformations and stresses of the assigned part. The nastin file can be used for a
subsequent explicit or implicit SOL 700 run. In the example, only the result for Part 10 which includes
the sheet metal is written out to nastin file.
Because all information of nodes and element connectivity is in jid.dytr.nastin file, Grid and
CQUAD entries are removed in the implicit input. Only one point boundary condition at the center and
SPRBCK entry are added in the input file.
Since MATD190 is not available in the implicit analysis, MATD036 is used instead of MATD190.
MATD036 and MATD190 are identical material models except that FLD is supported only in MATD190.
MATD036 1
+
6.0
+
2.0
+
+
2.7E-4 7.1E7
.71
.58
0.33
.70
2.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
576.79E3.3593
.01658
0.0
+
+
+
+
0.0
MATD036 is only different in the failure criteria using FLD. Others are the same as MATD190 in the
Main Index
0.005
200
1
100
0.0
1.00E-3
1.0E-2 0.10
1
+
+
+
SPRBCK activates the implicit spring back analysis. Nonlinear with BFGS updates solver type is used in
the example. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for other fields.
SPC1
123456
841
Only one point at the center of the sheet metal is fixed to prevent singular condition in the
implicit simulation.
Main Index
Results
Vertical (Z-direction) Displacement Contour Plot
:
Explicit Simulation
t = 0.000 s
Implicit Simulation
Main Index
Figure 13-41
Main Index
Miscellaneous
Paper Feed
Description
The objective of the paper feeding analysis is to predict the paper jamming and the capacity of the printer.
In this example, angular velocity is applied on five rollers to feed the paper in the printer and 31are
defined to simulate the paper feeding process.
SOL 700 Entries Included
SOL 700
TSTEPNL
PARAM*,DYMINSTEP
PARAM*,LDTSTEOFCTL
BCTABLE
CELASID
CDAMPID
TLOAD1
SPCD
FORCE
PELAS
PDAMP
CONM2
RBE2
Model
Main Index
The model has a total of 6946 grid points, 6170 elements, and 20 rigid body connections as follows:
4972 Quads
1188 Hexas
10 Concentrated masses
The paper is modeled by 1830 quad elements. All shell elements are Belytschko-Tsay formulation. The
circumferential velocite is set to 1500 mm/s using different angular velocities of drives and pinches.
Gravity is also taken into account. Total time of simulation is 0.4 seconds.
Loading and Boundary Conditions
The angular velocity of each drive and pinch is defined such that a 1500 mm/s circumferential velocity
is created. The rotational velocities are applied sequentially at center node of the drive starting from drive
1 through drive 5 by defining Tables and SPCD. To close the gap between all the drives and the pinches,
two opposite direction vertical forces are applied by using a combination of FORCE and Table entries.
The magnitude of the load is predefined at each drive location.
drive_1
entrance
paper
pinch_1
upper guide_3
pinch_4
upper guide_1 upper guide_4
pinch_5
upper guide_5
pinch_2
pinch_3
lower guide_5
lower guide_1
drive_5
lower guide_4
drive_2
guide_2
Main Index
drive_4
lower guide_3
drive_3
RBE2
Damper
Main Index
Spring
BEGIN BULK
TSTEPNL 1
100
.004
ADAPT
10
TSTEPNL is a SOL 700 bulk data entry which describes the number of Time Steps (100) and Time
Increment (0.004 s) of the simulation. End time is the product of the two entries. Notice here the Time
Increment is only for the first step. The actual number of time increments and the exact value of the Time
Steps are determined by SOL 700 during the analysis. The time step is a function of the smallest element
dimension during the simulation.
BCTABLE
1
SLAVE
98
0
0.
0
31
0.
0
.3
0.
0.
MASTERS 98
...
BCTABLE is a SOL 700 bulk data entry that is also used by SOL 600 and it is meant to define MasterSlave as well as self contact.
BCBODY
BSURF
3007
...
98
98
3D
3001
DEFORM
3002
98
3003
0
3004
3005
3006
BCBODY is a bulk data entry that is used by MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) and SOL 700
Main Index
1
1
325
406
12.5
1
2
405
1
361
20.05
0.
2
362
12
366
11
365
21001
18
21001
21002
21002
19
21001
21002
401
402
CELAS1D and CDAMP1D are for the scalar spring connection and scalar damper connection,
respectively.
TLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
...
DLOAD
...
FORCE
...
GRAV
19
1
21
2
20
20
21001
1.
21001
VELO
21
6
1.
0
9800.
-120.
19
9800.
0.
1.
22
0.
-1.
1.
1.
25
0.
0.
TLOAD1 is a bulk data entry that defines a time-dependent dynamic load or enforced motion for use in
transient response analysis. SPCD is for the enforced motion value, velocity in this example, in dynamic
analysis. Using FORCE card, a concentrated force at a grid point by specifying a vector is applied.
3.+6
PELAS
...
PDAMP
...
CONM2
...
18
4.9
19
196.
51001
21001
.3
8.4-7
.001
PELAS and PDAMP are bulk data entries which describe properties of scalar spring and damper,
respectively. CONM2 is for the definition of mass on a grid point.
Main Index
55003
21001
123456
1001
SPCADD
...
SPC1
...
123456
21002
TABLED1
1
-.12
4.-4
0.
1.
0.
.1201
0.
1.
1002
1.-4
.1205
1003
.5
0.
1004
2.-4
1.2
1005
.8
0.
RBE2 is a bulk data entry which defines a rigid body with independent degrees of- freedom that are
specified at a single grid point and with dependent degrees of freedom that are specified at an arbitrary
number of grid points.
Several tables and coordinates are defined in the input file.
Main Index
Results
t = 0.00 second
t = 0.40 second
Main Index
t = 0.20 second